AVP Family (AVP 4000)

Transcription

1 AVP Family (AVP 4000) Software Version 9.31.x REFERENCE GUIDE 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

2 AVP Family (AVP 4000) ENGLISH (UK) - READ THIS FIRST! If you do not understand the contents of this manual. DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT. Also, translation into any EC official language of this manual can be made available, at your cost. ITALIANO - LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO! Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale. NON UTILIZZARE L APPARECCHIATURA.. È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell utente. SVENSKA - LÄS DETTA FÖRST! Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok. ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING. En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas, på Er bekostnad. NEDERLANDS - LEES DIT EERST! Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt. STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING. U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen. PORTUGUÊS - LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA! Se não compreende o texto deste manual. NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO. O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o português à própria custa. SUOMI - LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ! Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä. ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA. Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella. FRANÇAIS - AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT! Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel. NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL. En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel. DANSK - LÆS DETTE FØRST! Udstyret må ikke betjenes. MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE HÅNDBOG. Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog. DEUTSCH - LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS! Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein, dann. BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT! Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen Berechnung lieferbar. ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ - ΔΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡΩΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ! Αν δεν καταλάβετε το περιεχόμενο αυτού του βοηθήματος/εγχειριδίου. ΜΗΝ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ. Επίσης, αυτό το εγχειρίδιο είναι διαθέσιμο σε μετάφραση σε αυτή τη γλώσσα και μπορείτε να το αγοράσετε. ESPAÑOL - LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO! Si no entiende el contenido de este manual. NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO. Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al (idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo. Copyright Copyright Ericsson AB All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright owner. Disclaimer No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the copyright owner. The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from the use of this document. ii 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

3 Contents Contents Chapter 1: Introduction This chapter identifies the equipment versions covered by this Reference Guide, describes the purpose of the equipment in a typical system and lists the available options. Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment This chapter provides product specific installation information including rack mounting, ventilation and pin-out details of the external connectors. Chapter 3: Getting Started This chapter provides a guide to powering up the unit, setting up the IP address and using the unit. Chapter 4: Front Panel Control This chapter describes the front panel display menus and options and details any operating procedures. Chapter 5: Web GUI Control This chapter describes the configuration of the unit using the Web Graphical User Interface. Chapter 6: Advanced Video Processing and Networking This chapter describes the principles and techniques used in the design of the equipment to aid in understanding its operation and function. Chapter 7: Options, Licensing and Upgrades This chapter provides details of option cards that may be fitted to this equipment. Chapter 8: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding This chapter details routine maintenance tasks, servicing advice and information regarding warranty and maintenance. It also lists error and error messages that may occur and recommends the action to be taken. Annex A: Glossary Annex B: Technical Specification Annex C: Dolby E PCM Bypass and Switchout Annex D: Alarms List Annex E: Logo Creator 1/1553-FGC Uen Y iii

4 Preliminary Pages Introduction In a fast changing, highly competitive market, media organizations need encoding solutions that deliver high quality, high reliability and operational flexibility. The number of channels continues to increase. HD is growing fast, offering a better quality viewing experience. Consumers are buying larger and larger TV sets and now plans are being laid for Ultra High Definition TV. All that means media organizations need to make the most efficient use of bandwidth and ensure consumers get a quality viewing experience. The AVP is a flexible platform consisting of a base unit or chassis into which various option cards can be plugged. The base unit provides an Ethernet control interface, Ethernet data interfaces, and basic Transport Stream processing functionality. Other functionalities such as video encoding, audio encoding, and additional input or output interfaces are provided by the addition of option cards. The AVP is designed for flexibility, modularity, multi-codec capabilities, and multiple independent outputs. Please ensure that you are familiar with the operation of the unit by reading this guide carefully. This Reference Guide should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the equipment. It is not intended that this Reference Guide will be amended by the issue of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue. Further copies of this Reference Guide can be ordered from the address listed in Customer Services. If passing the equipment to a third party, also pass the relevant documentation. Revision History Issues of this Reference Guide are listed below: Issue Date Software Version Comments A May x Initial release of the AVP Family (AVP 4000) Reference Guide Sv 9.4.x B August x Updated to software version 9.5.x New supported features added C October x Updates for software version 9.6.x New supported features added. D January x Updates for software version 9.7.x New supported features added. E April x Updates for software version 9.8.x New supported features added. F August x Updates for software version 9.10.x New supported features added. G December x Updates for software version 9.11.x New supported features added. iv 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

5 Preliminary Pages Issue Date Software Version Comments H May x Updates for software version 9.12.x and 9.13.x. New supported features added. J October x Updates for software version 9.16.x. New supported features added. K December x Updates for software version 9.17.x. New supported features added. L February x Updates for software version 9.18.x. New supported features added. M April x Updates for software version 9.19.x. New supported features added. N September x Updates for software versions 9.20.x, 9.21.x. and 9.22.x New supported features added. S November x Updates for software versions 9.23.x New supported features added. T December x Updates for software versions 9.24.x New supported features added. U March x Updates for software versions 9.25.x New supported features added. V April x Updates for software versions 9.26.x New supported features added. W June x Updates for software versions 9.27.x New supported features added. X September x Updates for software versions 9.28 and 9.29.x New supported features added. Y January x Updates for software versions New supported features added. Associated Documents The following manuals/guides are also associated with this equipment: Ericsson Document Identity 1/1553-FGB Title Video Processing/Stream Processing Products Generic Product Information - Quick Guide FGB Installation, Safety and Compliance Information Generic Product Information - Reference Guide 1/1553-FGC Uen Y v

6 Preliminary Pages Useful Links: Installation, Safety and Compliance Information Generic Product Information - Reference Guide can be viewed at: FGB101348&Lang=EN&HighestFree=Y Product Guide downloads are available for all Product Families: Trademarks All best endeavors have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and trademarks used throughout this Reference Guide. Any notified omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this Reference Guide. Some trademarks may be registered in some jurisdictions but not in others. Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked within the text of this Reference Guide. Registered Trademarks Dolby GuideBuilder Trademarks Reflex Registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Registered trademark of Triveni Digital Inc. Trademark of Ericsson Television. Patents The feature Phase Aligned Audio is patented Ericsson functionality. Warnings, Cautions and Notes Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly. Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated. vi 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

7 Preliminary Pages Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed. Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Warning! Warnings give information which, if strictly observed, will prevent personal injury or death, or damage to property or the environment. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them. Caution! Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to equipment or other goods. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them. Note: Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant text. EMC Compliance This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in the Installation, Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson Compression Products Reference Guide supplied with your product. To maintain this certification, only use the leads supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services. Contact Information Support Services Ericsson understands that our products are mission-critical, providing services that influence customer perception and impact your revenue. Our objective is to ensure that you realize maximum utility and achieve the highest levels of availability from our products. To realize that objective, we offer a variety of Service Level Agreements designed to meet your business needs and budget. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y vii

8 Preliminary Pages Warranty All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12-month warranty. Service Level Agreements Customers may choose one of several Support packages, either as an enhancement during the standard 12-month warranty or as an extension after the warranty has expired. For standalone equipment, customers may choose either Ericsson s Extended Hardware Warranty or Secure Basic Support. Extended Hardware Warranty provides hardware repair of covered equipment after the expiration of the standard warranty. Secure Basic Support provides hardware repair, remote diagnostics and support, and 24x7x365 remote support for emergencies. For systems, along with Secure Basic Support, customers have the option of either Secure Advanced Support or Secure Superior Support. These support packages provide higher committed response and resolution times, onsite support where necessary, service performance review and a host of other proactive services to help you get the maximum return on your investment in Ericsson solutions. Call Ericsson Sales for more details. Customer Services Europe, Middle East and Africa Tel: +44 (0) Fax: +44 (0) tvsupportemea@ericsson.com Americas Tel: Tel: Fax: tvsupportamericas@ericsson.com Asia Tel: Fax: tvsupportapac@ericsson.com US and Canada International Hong Kong Hong Kong Australia and New Zealand Internet Address Tel: +61 (0) Fax: +61 (0) tvsupportanz@ericsson.com Technical Training Ericsson provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies. Ericsson can provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to individual needs. Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities. viii 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

9 Preliminary Pages International Tel: +44 (0) Fax: +44 (0) Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address Ericsson Unit 2 Strategic Park Comines Way Hedge End Southampton Hampshire SO30 4DA United Kingdom Return of Equipment If you need to return equipment for repair please contact your local Ericsson Customer Services Department. Please refer to the Customer Services Contact Information on Page viii. You will then be directed to return the faulty equipment to a repair centre with the appropriate facilities for that equipment. A tracking number will be issued that should be used if you need to enquire about the progress of the repair. The equipment should be properly packed and the tracking number should be clearly marked on the outside of the packaging. Technical Publications If you need to contact Ericsson Technical Publications regarding this publication, tvtechpubs@ericsson.com. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y ix

10 Preliminary Pages BLANK x 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

11 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Contents 1.1 Introduction Who Should Use this Reference Guide Software Version New Features in this Release What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide AVP 4000 Chassis Options AVP 4000 Software Value Packs AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Software Value Packs AVP 4000 Option Cards AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Option Cards AVP 4000 Overview Front Panel Power Switch Confidence Monitor Light Bar USB Connector Rotary Knob Main Display Keypad Base Chassis Options AVP4000/BAS/1AC 1RU and AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED Base Chassis AVP4000/BAS/2AC 1RU Base Chassis AVP4000/BAS/2ACFL 1RU Base Chassis AVP4000/BAS/1DC and AVP4000/BAS/2DC 1RU Base Chassis License Keys List of Figures Figure 1.1 Front Panel Figure 1.2 Confidence Monitor Figure 1.3 AVP4000/BAS/1AC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted Figure 1.4 AVP4000/BAS/2AC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted Figure 1.5 AVP4000/BAS/2ACFL Rear Panel Figure 1.6 AVP4000/BAS/1DC and AVP4000/BAS/2DC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted /1553-FGC Uen Y 1-1

12 Introduction List of Tables Table 1.1 AVP 4000 Base Chassis Options Table 1.2 AVP 4000 Value Packs Purchased with Chassis Table 1.3 AVP 4000 Value Pack Upgrade Options Table 1.4 AVP 4000 Option Cards Table 1.5 AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Option Cards /1553-FGC Uen Y

13 Introduction 1.1 Introduction Who Should Use this Reference Guide This Reference Guide is written for operators / users of the Advanced Video Processor (AVP) It describes the unit s functions and operation. The Reference Guide is written to assist in the installation and day-to-day operation and care of the unit. Maintenance information requiring the covers to be removed is not included. Warning! Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only Ericsson television trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this equipment. Caution! Unauthorized maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties Software Version This Reference Guide covers the functions of software versions 9.31 and later. To verify the installed version either: Access the front panel, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control. Access the Web Browser screens, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent build versions where the functionality of the equipment has not changed. Where the build standard changes the functionality, a new issue of this manual will be provided. The appropriate number should be quoted in all correspondence with Ericsson New Features in this Release The 9.31 release of software supports the following features: Four-slice encoding in HEVC UHD 4K. Automatic switching to CALVC for bitrates above 50 Mbps, for HEVC encoding. MGP support on systems using different subnet outputs. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-3

14 Introduction SD or HD automatic input detection when encoding to SD. Improvements in Reflex What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide This Reference Guide covers the AVP 4000 main units and options AVP 4000 Chassis Options The base chassis options available for the AVP 4000 are described in the following table. Table 1.1 AVP 4000 Base Chassis Options Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP4000/BAS/1AC/A FAZ /185 KDU /7 AVP 4000 Single AC PSU Chassis AVP4000/BAS/2AC/A FAZ /186 KDU /8 AVP 4000 Dual AC PSU Chassis (4 option slots) AVP4000/BAS/2ACFL/A FAZ /187 KDU /9 AVP 4000 Dual AC PSU with Flying Leads Chassis AVP4000/BAS/1DC/A FAZ /188 KDU /10 AVP 4000 Single DC PSU Chassis AVP4000/BAS/2DC/A FAZ /189 KDU /11 AVP 4000 Dual DC PSU Chassis AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED/A FAZ /190 KDU /12 AVP 4000 Single AC PSU with enhanced density. Ambient temperature restrictions apply. The AVP 4000 base chassis offers the capabilities: Remux BISS encryption PROFEC (SMPTE ) on output Pass-thru of audio AVP 4000 Software Value Packs The functionality of the AVP 4000 can be augmented by purchasing software value packs, as listed in the following table /1553-FGC Uen Y

15 Introduction Table 1.2 AVP 4000 Value Packs Purchased with Chassis Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/SWO/VP/SD FAZ /191 FAT Standard Definition value pack offering: MPEG-2 encode MPEG-4 encode Transcode Reflex DPI PSIP table download Teletext to DVB sub Loudness control on 2 pairs MPEG-1 Layer II audio AVP/SWO/VP/HD FAZ /192 FAT High Definition value pack offering: MPEG-2 encode HD + SD MPEG-4 encode HD + SD Transcode Reflex DPI PSIP table download Teletext to DVB sub Loudness control on 4 pairs MPEG-1 Layer II audio AVP/SWO/VP/ABR/HD FAZ /193 FAT ABR value pack offering: MPEG-4 ABR encoding HD + SD Transcode 4:2:2 10 bit (Decode and Encode) DPI 4 pairs AAC encode with Loudness control AVP/SWO/VP/CONT FAZ /194 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 4:2:2 10 bit Encode AVP/SWO/VP/CONT/AUDIO FAZ /195 FAT Audio for Contribution value pack offering: Phase Aligned Audio (6 ch) AVP/SWO/VP/M1L2 FAZ /201 FAT Audio value pack for MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. AVP/SWO/VP/AAC FAZ /196 FAT Audio value pack for: AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. AVP/SWO/VP/DOLBY/AC3 FAZ /198 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-5

16 Introduction Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/SWO/VP/DOLBY/PLUS FAZ /200 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital Plus encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. AVP/SWO/VP/DOLBY/AC3/DEC FAZ /199 FAT Audio value pack for: Decode of one compressed stream of Dolby Digital AVP/SWO/VP/DOLBYE/DEC FAZ /197 FAT Audio value pack for: Decode of one compressed stream of Dolby E CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC/HD FAZ /278 FAT High Definition HEVC value pack offering: 1 channel of HD HEVC 4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC/4K FAZ /279 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: UHD HEVC 16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/MP4/HD FAZ /304 FAT High Definition H264 value pack offering: 1 channel of HD H264 4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/MP4/X4 Contribution value pack offering: 4 channels of 4:2:2 encode for HD video CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/CONT FAZ /280 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 1 channel of 4:2:2 encode for HD video CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/CONT/X4 FAZ /281 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 4 channels of 4:2:2 encode for HD video CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/SLD FAZ /295 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: Enables 1 UHD HD channel for Super Low Delay CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/SLD/4K FAZ /296 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: Enables 1 UHD 4k channel for Super Low Delay CE/SWO/VP/CONT/AUDIO FAZ 101/0196/254 FAT Contribution audio value pack offering: Additional 4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II encode Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel) 1-6 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

17 Introduction Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description CE/SWO/VP/CONT/AUDIO/X4 FAZ 101/0196/282 FAT Contribution audio value pack offering: Additional 8 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II encode 4 x Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel) CE/SWO/VP/AAC FAZ 101/0196/256 FAT Audio value pack for: AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. CE/SWO/VP/DOLBY/AC3 FAZ 101/0196/257 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. CE/SWO/VO/M1L2 FAZ 101/0196/255 FAT Audio value pack for: MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). AVP/SWO/VP/JUNG FAZ /315 FAT Audio value pack for: Junger LevelMagic control for Taiwanese NCC compliance AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Software Value Packs Further value packs may be added to the AVP 4000 after the equipment has been shipped via the field upgradable options as listed below. Table 1.3 AVP 4000 Value Pack Upgrade Options Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/UPS/VP/SD FAZ /202 FAT Standard Definition value pack offering: MPEG-2 encode MPEG-4 encode Transcode Reflex DPI PSIP table download Teletext to DVB sub Loudness control on 2 pairs MPEG-1 Layer II audio AVP/UPS/VP/HD FAZ /203 FAT High Definition value pack offering: MPEG-2 encode HD + SD MPEG-4 encode HD + SD Transcode Reflex DPI PSIP table download Teletext to DVB sub Loudness control on 4 pairs MPEG-1 Layer II audio 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-7

18 Introduction Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/UPS/VP/ABR/HD FAZ /204 FAT ABR value pack offering: MPEG-4 ABR encoding HD + SD Transcode 4:2:2 10 bit (Decode and Encode) DPI 4 pairs AAC encode with Loudness control AVP/UPS/VP/CONT FAZ /205 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 4:2:2 10 bit Encode AVP/UPS/VP/CONT/AUDIO FAZ /206 FAT Audio for Contribution value pack offering: Phase Aligned Audio (6 ch) AVP/UPS/VP/M1L2 FAZ /212 FAT Audio value pack for: MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. AVP/UPS/VP/AAC FAZ /207 FAT Audio value pack for: AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. AVP/UPS/VP/DOLBY/AC3 FAZ /209 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. AVP/UPS/VP/DOLBY/PLUS FAZ /211 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital Plus encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Loudness control of the 2 channels. Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. AVP/UPS/VP/DOLBY/AC3/DEC FAZ /210 FAT Audio value pack for: Decode of one compressed stream of Dolby Digital AVP/UPS/VP/DOLBYE/DEC FAZ /208 FAT Audio value pack for: Decode of one compressed stream of Dolby E CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/HD FAZ /283 FAT High Definition HEVC value pack offering: HD HEVC 4 Channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode 1-8 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

19 Introduction Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/4K FAZ /284 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: UHD HEVC 16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/MP4/HD FAZ /306 FAT High definition MPEG-4 value pack offering: HD MPEG-4 AVC 4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/MP4/X4 High definition MPEG-4 value pack offering: 4 channels HD MPEG-4 AVC 16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/CONT FAZ /285 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 1 channel of 4:2:2 encode for HD video CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/CONT/X4 FAZ /286 FAT Contribution value pack offering: 4 channels of 4:2:2 encode for HD video CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/SLD FAZ /297 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: Enables 1 UHD HD channel for Super Low Delay CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/SLD/4K FAZ /298 FAT Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack offering: Enables 1 UHD 4k channel for Super Low Delay CE/UPS/CE-HEVC/SLD/ HDTO4K FAZ /299 FAT Upgrade to Super Low Delay from HD to 4K UHD encode. Note must already have SLD license. CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/CONT/X3 FAZ /300 FAT HEVC 422 upgrade value pack offering: Upgrade from single 4:2:2 encode to support 4:2:2 UHD encode. CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/X3 FAZ /301 FAT HEVC HD to UHD upgrade value pack offering: UHD HEVC encode to existing HD HEVC encode. CE/UPS/VP/CONT/AUDIO FAZ /260 FAT Contribution audio value pack offering: Additional 4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II encode Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel) CE/UPS/VP/CONT/AUDIO/X4 FAZ /287 FAT Contribution audio value pack offering: Additional 8 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II encode 4 x Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel) 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-9

20 Introduction Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description CE/UPS/VP/CONT/AUDIO/X3 FAZ /302 FAT Contribution audio value pack offering: Additional 6 channels of MPEG-1 LayerII encode 4 x Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel) CE/UPS/VP/AAC FAZ /262 FAT Audio value pack for: AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. CE/UPS/VP/DOLBY/AC3 FAZ /263 FAT Audio value pack for: Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). Note 3 packs required for surround encoding. CE/UPS/VP/M1L2 FAZ /261 FAT Audio value pack for: MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2 channels of audio (e.g. stereo). AVP/UPS/VP/JUNG FAZ /316 FAT Audio value pack for: Junger LevelMagic control for Taiwanese NCC compliance AVP 4000 Option Cards The option cards available to purchase with the base chassis are shown in the following table. Table 1.4 AVP 4000 Option Cards Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/HWO/EI9001/A FAZ /213 ROA Single channel EI9001 Encoder AVP/HWO/EI9001T/A FAZ /214 ROA Single channel EI9001 Transcoder AVP/HWO/ASI/IO/A FAZ /215 ROA ASI Input/Output Card with 2x Inputs and 2x Outputs AVP/HWO/EXTSYNC/A FAZ /216 ROA External Sync Module AVP/HWO/GPI/A FAZ /217 ROA General Purpose Input Card CE/HWO/HEVC/BNC/A FAZ /272 ROA HEVC Media Processing module with BNC connections CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/C/A FAZ /273 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Copper CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/F/A FAZ /274 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Fiber AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Option Cards Option cards may be added to an AVP 4000 as a field upgrade and are shown in the following table /1553-FGC Uen Y

21 Introduction Table 1.5 AVP 4000 Field Upgrade Option Cards Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/UPH/EI9001/A FAZ /218 ROA Single channel EI9001 Encoder AVP/UPH/EI9001T/A FAZ /219 ROA Single channel EI9001 Transcoder AVP/UPH/ASI/IO/A FAZ /220 ROA ASI Input/Output Card with 2x Inputs and 2x Outputs AVP/UPH/EXTSYNC/A FAZ /221 ROA External Sync Module AVP/UPH/GPI/A FAZ /222 ROA General Purpose Input Card CE/UPH/HEVC/BNC/A FAZ /275 ROA HEVC Media Processing module with BNC connections CE/UPH/HEVC/SFP/C/A FAZ /276 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Copper CE/UPH/HEVC/SFP/F/A FAZ /277 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Fiber 1.2 AVP 4000 Overview The AVP 4000 is a flexible platform consisting of a base unit or chassis in to which various option cards can be plugged. The base unit provides an Ethernet control interface for configuration, an Ethernet data interfaces for data routing between the host and the option cards, and basic Transport Stream processing functionality. Other functionalities such as video encoding, audio encoding, or other input or output interfaces are provided by option cards through various interfaces. The following is a summary of the features of the base chassis: 19 1 RU rack mount chassis. Front panel main display and keypad for control and status reporting. Power switch. Tri-color light bar to indicate chassis health. Dual redundant Ethernet control ports. Dual redundant Ethernet ports for data input and output. Option card slots (the number of option cards that may be fitted is different for each base unit) Option cards are hot swappable. Confidence monitor for monitoring input video stream. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-11

22 Introduction 1.3 Front Panel The front panel of the unit consists of a power switch, a confidence monitor, a light bar, an USB Connector, a rotary knob, a main display and a keypad. Power Switch Keypad Confidence Monitor Light Bar Mini USB Rotary Knob Main Display Figure 1.1 Front Panel Power Switch The mains switch is recessed to prevent accidental switch-off Confidence Monitor The confidence monitor allows the user to monitor the selected input video signal. Figure 1.2 Confidence Monitor The confidence monitor is a 1.8 inch TFT LCD. The On key on the confidence monitor turns the monitor on or off. By pressing and holding the On key, operation related data is shown. The first line displays the total number of hours the monitor has been operating; the second line displays the software version. The source of the video to be displayed, the sleep timeout time and the monitor brightness can be setup through the front panel or the web user interface. For details on how to configure the settings for the confidence monitor see Chapter 3, Getting Started Light Bar The light bar is green when there are no active alarms or warnings, and red if there is a critical alarm. It is yellow if there is an active warning, minor or major alarm /1553-FGC Uen Y

23 Introduction USB Connector The USB connector provides an interface for saving or exporting configurations to, and loading or importing configuration from an USB stick. Moreover, by applying an USB-Ethernet adaptor, the Ethernet port of a control computer can be connected to the USB connector on the Front Panel of the unit Rotary Knob The rotary knob is used for scrolling through and selecting the menu items Main Display Control and status information is displayed on a graphic VFD display Keypad Select and Cancel keys, as well as a numeric keypad is provided for interaction. 1.4 Base Chassis Options The AVP 4000 consists of a base chassis, AC or DC power supply inputs and up to six option cards. The base chassis is a 1RU 19 rack mount chassis that contains control interfaces and two pairs of dual redundant Ethernet ports for data output. Option cards are responsible for video, audio and data processing, and for producing output through various interfaces. The option cards are Hot Swappable, that is, they can be inserted or removed while the chassis is powered on. There are four base chassis options available: AVP4000/BAS/1AC 1RU and AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED Base Chassis These chassis options provide a single AC mains input and slots for up to six option cards. Data Ethernet x4 AC Input Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 6 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5 Control Ethernet x2 Figure 1.3 AVP4000/BAS/1AC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-13

24 Introduction AVP4000/BAS/2AC 1RU Base Chassis This chassis option provides a dual AC mains input and slots for up to four option cards. Data Ethernet x4 Dual AC Inputs Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 1 Slot 3 Control Ethernet x2 Figure 1.4 AVP4000/BAS/2AC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted AVP4000/BAS/2ACFL 1RU Base Chassis This chassis option provides dual AC mains input via flying leads and slots for up to six option cards. Figure 1.5 AVP4000/BAS/2ACFL Rear Panel AVP4000/BAS/1DC and AVP4000/BAS/2DC 1RU Base Chassis These chassis options provide DC inputs and slots for up to six option cards. Data Ethernet x4 DC Input Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 6 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5 Control Ethernet x2 Figure 1.6 AVP4000/BAS/1DC and AVP4000/BAS/2DC Rear Panel with No Cards Fitted /1553-FGC Uen Y

25 Introduction 1.5 License Keys Licenses control the availability of some of the features accessible from the unit. A License Key consists of a feature, and the number of instances of this feature that are allowed within the chassis or option card. License Keys are allocated on a first configured first served basis within the chassis. If an attempt is made to enable a feature, but the required license key is not available then the feature is not enabled, and a log message is generated. When a function that has a license associated with it is disabled, the license key is released within 1 second, and thereafter available to be re-allocated. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 1-15

26 Introduction BLANK /1553-FGC Uen Y

27 2 Installing the Equipment Chapter 2 Contents 2.1 Read This First! Mounting and Ventilation Fixing and Rack Mounting Ventilation Signal Connections Rear Panel Signal Connectors Data Ethernet Connector Control Ethernet Connector CE Option Modules Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/BNC Option Module) Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/SFP Option Module) ASI I/O Option Card Connectors External Sync Input Option Card Connector GPI Option Card Connector Mini USB Connector List of Figures Figure 2.1 Air-Flow through the Equipment Figure 2.2 ASI I/O Option Card Figure 2.3 External Sync Input Option Card Figure 2.4 Mini USB Connector List of Tables Table 2.1 Data Ethernet Connector Table 2.2 Link Speed: Left (Green) LED Table 2.3 Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED Table 2.4 Control Ethernet Connector Table 2.5 Port Status: Left (Green ) LED Table 2.6 Link Activity: Right (Yellow ) LED Table 2.7 Digital Video Input via the SDI Interface Table 2.8 Lock LED State Descriptions Table 2.9 ASI I/O Option Card Connectors Table 2.10 External Sync Input Option Card Connector /1553-FGC Uen Y 2-1

28 Installing the Equipment Table 2.11 GPI Data In Connector Table 2.12 GPI Alarm Contact Closure Connector Table 2.13 Data Input Connector Pin-out /1553-FGC Uen Y

29 Installing the Equipment 2.1 Read This First! Please refer to the Installation, Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson Compression Products Reference Guide supplied with your product for full details of installation requirements. This guide only contains additional product specific information where required. 2.2 Mounting and Ventilation Fixing and Rack Mounting The equipment is designed for fixed use only and has been shipped with fixing brackets suitable for a standard 19-inch rack. When installed in a rack, it should be secured using the fixing brackets. In addition, support shelves must be used to reduce the weight on the brackets. Ensure it is firmly and safely located and it has an adequate free-flow of air. Slide the unit onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means of an M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner. A freestanding unit should be installed on a secure horizontal surface where it is unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and leads disturbed Ventilation Side openings in the unit, as well as side-mounted cooling fans, are provided for ventilation. They ensure reliable operation of the product and protect it from overheating. The openings of the fans must not be blocked or covered. Air is released through vents at the side of the unit. Fans are mounted on this side of the unit Figure 2.1 Air-Flow through the Equipment 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 2-3

30 Installing the Equipment 2.3 Signal Connections Rear Panel Signal Connectors Caution! It is strongly recommended that the terminal marked at the rear panel of the equipment is connected to a site Technical Earth before any external connections are made and the equipment is powered. This limits the migration of stray charges. Signal connections are made via the rear panel. The rear panels, which are available are shown below. Full technical specifications for the connections are given in Annex B. Only the Data and Control Ethernet connectors and the PSU connectors are mounted on the chassis. All other connections at the rear panel are provided with the option modules that may be fitted Data Ethernet Connector The unit has four Ethernet ports - two for data input, and two for data output and will respond to ARPs, pings and other low-level Ethernet traffic. The ports are accessible via RJ-45 connectors on the rear panel of the chassis. These are labeled Ge 1, Ge 2, Ge 3 and Ge 4. Ge 1 and Ge 2 are used for data input, while Ge 3 and Ge 4 are data output. Table 2.1 Data Ethernet Connector Item Specification Connector type RJ-45 (100/1000 Base T) Connector designation Pin outs (Unused pins are not connected) Ge 1 (data input) Ge 2 (data input) Ge 3 (data output) Ge 4 (data output) Pin 1 - Tx Out (+) Pin 2 - Tx Out (-) Pin 3 - Rx In (+) Pin 6 - Rx In (-) Status and Activity Indication Each Ethernet Data Port has a rear panel mounted status LED associated with it to indicate link status, activity and speed as follows: 2-4 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

31 Installing the Equipment Table 2.2 Link Speed: Left (Green) LED Link Speed LED Status No Link Off 100 Mbps Flash Off x Mbps Flash Off x 3 The left LED flash sequence period is 1 s, with a short flash duration of 100 ms. Table 2.3 Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED Link Speed LED Status No Link Off Link On Activity Flash Control Ethernet Connector The Ethernet control ports are used to connect the equipment to a PC for access with a web browser. Both connectors share the same IP address, CTL 1 is the Primary control port, and is by default the active control port. Control Port CTL 2 should be considered as the secondary control network as it will not respond to the Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed to it either as a result of a redundancy switch, or via a user command. The active control port switches when CTL 1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and CTL 2 has the link. Table 2.4 Control Ethernet Connector Item Specification Connector type RJ-45 (100/1000 Base T) Connector designation CTL 1 CTL 2 Pin outs (Unused pins are not connected) Pin 1 - Tx Out (+) Pin 2 - Tx Out (-) Pin 3 - Rx In (+) Pin 6 - Rx In (-) Status and Activity Indication Each Ethernet Control Port has rear panel mounted status LEDs to indicate link status, activity and speed as follows: 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 2-5

32 Installing the Equipment Table 2.5 Port Status: Left (Green ) LED Port Status Link Speed LED Status Active Port No Link Off 100 Mbps Flash Off x Mbps Flash Off x 3 Spare Port No Link Off 100 Mbps Flash On x Mbps Flash On x 3 The left LED flash sequence period is 1 s, with a short flash duration of 100 ms. Table 2.6 Link Activity: Right (Yellow ) LED Link Speed LED Status No Link Off Link On Activity Flash CE Option Modules The following connectors are provided on the CE Video Compression Modules Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/BNC Option Module) High definition digital video can be input via the four 75 Ω female BNC connector (labeled SDI 1-4) on the rear panel. For HD video, each connector is the video source for channels 1-4. Ultra High Definition (UHD) (4K) video encoding uses all four SDI BNC connectors. The input video maybe either formatted as 4 synchronized HD quadrants or as 4 synchronized interleaved (SMPTE-425-5) sub pictures. The LED (labeled LOCK) next to each connector shows the lock status of the input video signal for that connector. In encoding more than one channel of H264 or HEVC video the relevant multichannel license (x4) needs to be purchased. If only one channel is licensed, the first connector (labeled SD 1) must be used for video input. The other connectors will not be operational unless in UHD /1553-FGC Uen Y

33 Installing the Equipment Table 2.7 Digital Video Input via the SDI Interface Item Connector types Specification 75 Ω female BNC Connector designation SDI 1-4 Pin-outs Centre Shield Input Ground/Chassis Table 2.8 Lock LED State Descriptions Item Off Red Green Alternate Red and Green Description The SDI Input is not active. The SDI input is active, but not locked. The SDI input is active and is locked. The SDI input is active, but video with the wrong line standard is being received Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/SFP Option Module) The CE-HEVC/SFP option card can be fitted with one or two SFP+ modules. If two modules are fitted, they must be of the same type - a mixed population is not supported. SFP Copper For the card ordered as CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/C/A, two SFP+ modules are fitted which have two miniature 75-ohm BNC connectors per module. High Definition and Ultra High Definition 4K digital video can be input via the miniature BNC connectors. For a single channel of HD, the input must be fed into the first connector of the first module. For a single channel of UHD 4K, the input is fed to all four connectors, and may be presented to the input as either four synchronized HD quadrants, or as four synchronized interleaved sub-pictures as per SMPTE SFP Fiber For the card ordered as CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/F/A, two SFP+ modules are fitted which have two fiber optical inputs per module. High Definition and Ultra High Definition 4K digital video can be input via the fiber optical inputs. For a single channel of HD, the input must be fed into the first connector of the first module. For a single channel of UHD 4K, the input is fed to all four connectors, and may be presented to the input as either four synchronized HD quadrants, or as four synchronized interleaved sub-pictures as per SMPTE /1553-FGC Uen Y 2-7

34 Installing the Equipment ASI I/O Option Card Connectors The ASI I/O Option Card rear panel provides two ASI inputs and two ASI outputs. Figure 2.2 ASI I/O Option Card Table 2.9 ASI I/O Option Card Connectors Item Connector types Specification 75 Ω female BNC Connector designation ASI IN 1 ASI IN 2 ASI OUT 1 ASI OUT 2 Pin-outs Centre Shield Input Ground/Chassis The input connectors are used for feeding the unit with external Transport Streams for external data insertion. The output connectors can be configured as a mirrored output pair (with the same Transport Stream on both outputs) or two independent outputs (with different Transport Streams on each output) External Sync Input Option Card Connector The External Sync Option Card rear panel connector is used for connecting a 10 MHz 1 V pp reference signal or an analogue video signal. Figure 2.3 External Sync Input Option Card Table 2.10 External Sync Input Option Card Connector Item Connector types Connector designation Specification 75 Ω female BNC SYNC IN Pin-outs Centre Shield Input Ground/Chassis 2-8 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

35 Installing the Equipment GPI Option Card Connector The General Purpose Interface (GPI) Option Card provides the following interfaces. Table 2.11 GPI Data In Connector Item Connector types Connector designation Specification 9-way D-type female (not supported in this release) DATA IN Table 2.12 GPI Alarm Contact Closure Connector Item Connector types Connector designation Specification 25-way D-type female GPI/ALARM Pin-outs 1 GPI Pin 1 14 GPI Pin 2 2 GPI Pin 3 15 GPI Pin 4 3 GPI Pin 5 16 GPI Pin 6 4 GPI Pin 7 17 GPI Pin 8 5 GPI Pin 9 18 GPI Pin 10 6 GPI Pin GPI Pin 12 7 GPI Pin GPI Pin 14 8 GPI Pin GPI Pin 16 9 Reset 22 Fail (NO) 10 Fail (COM) 23 Fail (NC) 11 Alarm (NO) 24 Alarm (COM) 12 Alarm (NC) 25 GND 13 Sync/10 MHz NO, NC and COM label normally open, normally closed and common alarm or fail relay contacts respectively. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 2-9

36 Installing the Equipment GPI Data Input Connector The Data Input provides an asynchronous serial data communications interface conforming to the IEC-232 (RS-232) standard. The DATA IN connector is a 9-way D-type female connector on the rear panel. The pin connections are shown in Table Table 2.13 Data Input Connector Pin-out Remote (DTE) Male Option Card (DTE) Female Signal Name Pin Signal Direction Pin Signal Name 1 1 Not Connected Received Data 2 2 Received Data Transmit Data 3 3 Transmit Data 4 4 Not Connected Signal Ground 5 5 Signal Ground 6 6 Not Connected 7 7 Not Connected 8 8 Not Connected 9 9 Not Connected Mini USB Connector The mini USB connector on the front panel of the AVP chassis provides an interface for remote web access and update from a computer, and for saving or exporting configurations to, and loading or importing configurations from a USB stick. Figure 2.4 Mini USB Connector For details on using the mini USB connector, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control /1553-FGC Uen Y

37 Getting Started Chapter 3 Contents 3.1 Introduction How to Connect Up the Unit How to Power Up the Unit How to Set the Unit IP Address How to Configure Ethernet Control Ports How to Configure Ethernet Data Ports How to Configure the AVP Using the Web GUI General AVP Configuration How to Enforce HTTPS How to Configure User Authentication How to Configure Advanced Video Processor Settings How to Configure Output Transport Streams How to Configure the Chassis for Multi-screen Functionality Installing the Option Cards Configuring the Option Cards How to Set Up Your Services Multi-screen Licensing Requirements How to Use ABR Templates How to Set up Encode Using Two Broadcast Cards from a Single HD-SDI Source How to Configure and Use a Separate PCR How to Set Up Transcoded (Re-encoded) Services on EI9001T How to Configure the De-jitter Performance of the Incoming Transport Stream from the IP Input How to Set Up Internal PSIP Data Insertion How to Set Up External PSIP Data Insertion How to Configure PSIP Pass-thru DVB Subtitle Processing How to Set Up DVB Subtitle Pass-thru on Encode Services How to Reposition DVB Subtitles SCTE-27 Subtitle Processing How to Set up SCTE-27 to DVB Subtitle Translation for Encoding Services How to Set Up SCTE-27 to DVB Subtitle Translation for Transcoded Services Teletext Processing Teletext to DVB Subtitles Translation /1553-FGC Uen Y 3-1

38 Getting Started How to Configure Output Transport Streams with Internal Reflex Support About Internal Reflex Internal Reflex Visualization How to Set up Internal Reflex Group Parameters How to Customize the Internal Reflex Properties of Individual Components How to Configure the Front Panel Video Confidence Monitor How to Configure VLAN Tagging How to Copy and Move Transport Streams and Services How to Configure MGP Overview of MGP Configuring MGP Recommendations How to Customize the Quick Set-up Menu to Quickly Access Required Features How to Configure Aspect Ratio Conversion for the Downconverted SD and PiP Output when the Incoming Video is HD Introduction Manual Control of the Down-conversion Process Combination of Parameters with PiP Down-conversion and Aspect Ratio Signalling Automatic Control of the Aspect Ratio from the AFD AFD Codes Passing Thru the Encode Chain Automatic Video Input Detection and Configuration Selection of Automatic Video Input Detection and Configuration Effects on Encoding of Video How to Set Up BISS Encryption for Services BISS Security BISS Key Entry BISS and Stored Configurations How to Set Up Audio Pass-thru How to Set Up Input for 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Encoding How to Set Up Audio Transcoding on EI9001T How to Set Up Phase Aligned Audio About Phase Aligned Audio Configuring Phase Aligned Audio Generic ANC How to Set Up a Generic ANC Component How to Filter Data for a Generic ANC Component How to Configure the AVP Using the Front Panel How to Configure Video Parameters How to Configure Audio Parameters How to Set Up a Transport Stream How to Add More Transport Streams How to Configure Video for EI9001 and EI9001T AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters AVP 4000 Video Encoder Parameters AVP 4000 Seamless and Reflex Operation How to Configure Video for CE-HEVC How to Configure and Use Video Input Detection How to Set Up 4K Video Encoding /1553-FGC Uen Y

39 Getting Started 3.13 How to Return to Default Settings from the GUI Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Splice Point Operation SCTE104 over IP How to Configure Splicing How to Control Temperature/Fan Speed How to Get and Apply Additional Licenses Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit Video Licenses Ordering Additional Licenses Entering License Keys Alarm Monitoring Simple Network Management Protocol Supported Protocols Operation List of Figures Figure 3.1 AVP 4000 Connections Figure 3.2 Ethernet Control Port Numbering Figure 3.3 Ethernet Data Port Numbering Figure 3.4 Configuring Basic Authentication Figure 3.5 Configuring LDAP Authentication Test Figure 3.6 Configuring LDAP Authentication Figure 3.7 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Transport Stream Figure 3.8 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service Figure 3.9 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Component Figure 3.10 Adding Additional Output Services Figure 3.11 Viewing (Unsaved) Output Services (1 Linear and ABRs Shown) Figure 3.12 Creating an ABR Service Figure 3.13 Adding Additional Output Service Figure 3.14 Additional Output Service Added Figure 3.15 Service Configuration Web Page Turning Off Embedded PCR Figure 3.16 Service Configuration Web Page Setting PCR PID Figure 3.17 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Transport Stream Figure 3.18 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service Figure 3.19 Setting Transport Stream Mode to VBR (SPTS Multicast) Figure 3.20 Setting Transport Stream Mode to CBR (SPTS or MPTS Multicast) Figure 3.21 Setting Transport Stream Mode to VBR (SPTS Unicast) Figure 3.22 Setting Transport Stream Mode to CBR (SPTS or MPTS Unicast) Figure 3.23 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service Figure 3.24 Service Configuration Web Page Remux or Transcode Figure 3.25 Transcode Service Configuration Adding a Service Figure 3.26 Transcode Service Configuration Component Selection Figure 3.27 Transcode Service Configuration Bit Rate Selection Figure 3.28 Prompt for Monitor Figure 3.29 Configuring Jitter Tolerance Figure 3.30 Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI Figure 3.31 Setting External PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI /1553-FGC Uen Y 3-3

40 Getting Started Figure 3.32 Transcode Service Enable PSIP Pass-thru Figure 3.33 Encode Services Selecting DVB Subtitles Component Figure 3.34 Encode Service Enabling Subtitles Pass-thru Figure 3.35 Encode Service Enabling Subtitles Reposition Figure 3.36 Encode Service Subtitles Reposition (General) using Properties Tab Figure 3.37 Encode Service Subtitles Reposition (Specific) using Properties Tab Figure 3.38 SCTE 27 Translation Selecting the Component Figure 3.39 Translation Enabling Transcode (to DVB Subtitles) Figure 3.40 Transcode Service Configuration SCTE 27 Component Selection Figure 3.41 Transcode Service Data Component Additional Configuration Figure 3.42 Adding DVB Subtitles Component Figure 3.43 VBI Line Data Content Selection Figure 3.44 DVB Subtitles Teletext Source Selection Figure 3.45 HD to SD and PiP Down-conversion Figure 3.46 Manual Aspect Ratio Conversion - Setting Input AFD Figure 3.47 HD Input Picture Figure 3.48 Selecting Automatic Aspect Ratio Conversion Figure 3.49 AFD Code Passing Thru the Encode Chain Figure 3.50 Encoding: Manual Input Format Figure 3.51 Transcode: Select the Video Format Figure 3.52 Transcode: Automatic Detection of Video Format Figure 3.53 Input Detection Selection Figure 3.54 Aspect Ratio Common Settings Figure 3.55 Closed Captions Selection Figure 3.56 BISS Security Level Selection Figure 3.57 BISS Key Entry Figure 3.58 BISS Key Session Word Figure 3.59 BISS Enabling and Key Selection Figure 3.60 Setting BISS Key Value Figure 3.61 Editing a BISS Key Figure 3.62 Selection of Components to be Scrambled Using BISS Figure 3.63 Scrambling Selection of an Individual Component Figure 3.64 Transcoding Audio Using EI9001T Card Figure 3.65 Manual Configuration of Dolby Digital Transcoding Figure 3.66 Component Selection Figure 3.67 Audio Component > Input Figure 3.68 Audio Component > Encode Figure 3.69 PAA - Adding Audio Components Figure 3.70 PAA - Setting Input Sources Figure 3.71 PAA - Setting Coding Mode Figure 3.72 Adding an ANC Component to a Service Figure 3.73 Select the VBI Tab on the ANC Component Properties Widget Figure 3.74 VANC Filter Entry Using Wild-cards Figure 3.75 Set-up Procedure for Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config Figure 3.76 Input Detection Configuration Figure K Video - HD Quadrants Figure K Video - Interleaved /1553-FGC Uen Y

41 Getting Started Figure 3.79 Fan Control Figure 3.80 Video License Error Message Figure 3.81 Finding the Host Card Chip ID for License Generation Figure 3.82 Alarm Monitoring List of Tables Table 3.1 IP Address Restrictions Table 3.2 Ethernet Control Port Parameters Table 3.3 Ethernet Data Port Parameters Table 3.4 Installation of Option Cards Table 3.5 Configuration of Option Cards Table 3.6 Repositioning Options Table 3.7 VLAN Creation Options Table 3.8 VLAN Tag Sharing Options Table 3.9 SD or PiP Output with Combination of Aspect Ratio Settings Table 3.10 Audio Pass-thru Bit Rate Configuration Table 3.11 Embedded Stereo Channel Pairs Table 3.12 License Requirements for PAA Encoding Table 3.13 VANC Filtering Wild-cards Table 3.14 Video Parameter Settings Table 3.15 Audio Input Settings Table 3.16 Audio Encode Settings Table 3.17 Transport Stream Parameters Table 3.18 IP Related Parameters Table 3.19 Component and Service Parameters Table 3.20 AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters Table 3.21 AVP 4000 Video Encoder Parameters Table 3.22 AVP 4000 Seamless and Reflex Operation Table 3.23 GOP Length Table 3.24 Input Options Parameters Table 3.25 Encode Options Parameters Table 3.26 Example Multiple Operation SCTE104 Message Structure Table 3.27 DPI PID Index Value Table 3.28 Splicing Control Options Table 3.29 SNMP Interface Parameters /1553-FGC Uen Y 3-5

42 Getting Started BLANK 3-6 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

43 Getting Started 3.1 Introduction Due to the number of different ways the AVP 4000 can be used, it is impossible to give precise setting up instructions for every possible working scenario. This chapter, therefore, gives general guidance and principles on how to power up and set up your unit for operation and describes the more common operations you will want to perform. For details of all Front Panel menus and controls, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control. For details of all Web Graphical User Interface (GUI) menus and controls, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. For more information on possible networking scenarios, see Chapter 6, Advanced Video Processing and Networking. 3.2 How to Connect Up the Unit See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for all connector details. Figure 3.1 AVP 4000 Connections 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-7

44 Getting Started To connect up the unit(s): 1. Connect signal input connectors Ge 1 and Ge 2 (for your input Transport Streams) to your local area network. 2. Connect signal output connectors Ge 3 and Ge 4 (for your output Transport Streams) to your local area network. 3. Connect computer control connectors CTL1 and CTL2 (for Web GUI Control) to your local area network. Both connectors share the same IP address, Ctrl1 is the Primary control port, and is by default the active control port. Control Port Ctrl2 should be considered as the secondary control network as it will not respond to the Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed to it either as a result of a redundancy switch, or via a user command. The active control port switches when Ctrl1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and Ctrl2 has the link. 4. Connect single or dual AC or DC power connectors, depending on the option purchased, to the power supply. 5. Connect your signal cables to/from your option cards, depending on which options are fitted to your unit, 3.3 How to Power Up the Unit To power up the unit(s): 1. With all signal and power cables connected as required, switch on the AC power supply to the unit. 2. Wait for unit initialisation to complete (approximately 1.5 minutes, depending on the number of options fitted in the unit). Caution! This equipment should not be operated unless the cooling fans are working and there is free-air flow around the unit. 3.4 How to Set the Unit IP Address Setting the IP address of a unit is accomplished using the front panel menus. For a full description of these menus, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control. To set the IP address of the unit(s): 1. Ensure the unit is fully powered up. 2. On the AVP front panel, using the rotary knob, scroll down to the Unit Config > Remote Control Setup option. 3. Press knob to select /1553-FGC Uen Y

45 Getting Started 4. Using the keys on the keypad, set the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address. 5. Press the Select button to save or Cancel to discard the changes. Note: It may be necessary to set the subnet mask to 0 in order to allow the IP address to be changed. IP Addresses on the unit must adhere to RFC3330 range of restrictions as listed in the following table of allocated IP addresses. Table 3.1 IP Address Restrictions Block Present Use Reference /8 This Network [RFC1700, p4] /8 Private-Use Networks [RFC1918] /8 Public-Data Networks [RFC1700, p181] /8 Cable Television Networks /8 Reserved but subject to allocation [RFC1797] /8 Loopback [RFC1700, p5] /16 Reserved but subject to allocation /16 Link Local /12 Private-Use Networks [RFC1918] /16 Reserved but subject to allocation /24 Reserved but subject to allocation /24 Test-Net /24 6to4 Relay Anycast [RFC3068] /16 Private-Use Networks [RFC1918] /15 Network Interconnect Unit Benchmark Testing [RFC2544] /24 Reserved but subject to allocation /4 Multicast [RFC3171] /4 Reserved for Future Use [RFC1700, p4] Note: The control network and data networks should not conflict. It is suggested that the ranges for these networks are in the Private-Use Networks as listed in the summary Table. IP Address range x (subnet ) is used for internal unit communications, so should not be used for external communications. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-9

46 Getting Started 3.5 How to Configure Ethernet Control Ports Overview The Base Chassis has two Ethernet control ports that support IEEE BaseTX and 1000BaseT protocols. The control ports are accessible via RJ-45 connectors mounted on the rear panel of the unit. Figure 3.2 Ethernet Control Port Numbering The Ethernet control ports are used to connect the unit to a control computer for control through a web browser or to a control system for control through ncompass Control (V6.5 onwards). Ethernet Control Port Parameters A single IP port is defined for all Ethernet control traffic to and from the chassis. The physical ports used for Ethernet control are by default the control Ethernet ports. The control ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions. The parameters controlling Ethernet port are as shown in the following table. Table 3.2 Ethernet Control Port Parameters Parameter Values Description Comments Network Mode Same Network The interface pair is on the same subnet. Read only parameter Different Network The interface pair is on different subnet. IP Redundancy Mode Active-Active The same traffic is present on both interfaces all the time. Read only parameter. Active-Standby The secondary interface is active only if the primary is down. Autorevert Auto-revert to Primary Enables auto-revert mode on the interface group. Auto-revert to Secondary Autorevert delay The time taken to enable an interface participate in redundancy, after the interface link is up. If this is set to 0 then switching happens immediately /1553-FGC Uen Y

47 Getting Started Parameter Values Description Comments Active Interface Primary, Secondary The currently active interface Read only parameter Line Speed Auto The connection speed 100 Mbps 1 Gbps Duplex Mode Auto Auto negotiate the mode Full Duplex Simultaneously transmit and receive Half Duplex Transmit and receive in a time division manner Default Virtual MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff The virtual MAC address of the Gex interface. Read only parameter IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd IP address of the control interface group Subnet Mask [default] aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Subnet mask for the control interface group Default Gateway [default] No defined gateway aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Gateway address for packets outside the defined subnet IGMP mode selection IGMP v3 Uses version 3 of the IGMP protocol IGMP v2 Uses version 2 of the IGMP protocol Physical Data Interface <n> Default MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff The MAC address of the Gex interface. Link Status Link Up (1000) Link is up and the link speed is 1000 Mbps. Read only parameter Read only parameter Link Up (100) Link Down Link is up and the link speed is 100 Mbps. Link is down. Link Up Time days : hours : mins : secs The length of time that the link has been up. If the link goes down this value is reset to 0. Read only parameter TX Packets Number of IP packets transmitted Read only parameter RX Packets Number of IP packets received Read only parameter IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd IP address of the data interface 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-11

48 Getting Started 3.6 How to Configure Ethernet Data Ports Overview Four gigabit Ethernet ports are provided for data input and output. Figure 3.3 Ethernet Data Port Numbering Ethernet Data Port Parameters The data Ethernet ports Ge 1 and Ge 2 are bonded together, as are Ge 3 and Ge 4. Each port of a pair transmits the same IP traffic. If the IP address or subnet mask of a secondary port is set to , then it will be assumed that it is operating in a mirrored redundancy configuration with the primary port, and therefore has the same IP address and subnet mask. VLAN Tagging VLAN tagging is supported on the Data Output interfaces. To configure VLAN, browse to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and select Vlan Group in the appropriate output under the Vlan Tags folder. Alternatively, you can also use the front panel to set up VLANs. The settings can be found under Advanced/System/Base Unit/Vlan Tags. The parameters controlling Ethernet port are as shown in the following table. Table 3.3 Ethernet Data Port Parameters Parameter Values Description Comments Network Mode Same Network The interface pair is on the same subnet. Read only parameter Different Network The interface pair is on different subnet. IP Redundancy Mode Active-Active The same traffic is present on both interfaces all the time. Read only parameter. Active-Standby The secondary interface is active only if the primary is down. Active Interface Primary, Secondary The currently active interface Read only parameter Line Speed Auto The connection speed 100 Mbps 1 Gbps /1553-FGC Uen Y

49 Getting Started Parameter Values Description Comments Duplex Mode Auto Auto negotiate the mode Full Duplex Simultaneously transmit and receive Half Duplex Transmit and receive in a time division manner Default Virtual MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff The virtual MAC address of the Gex interface. Read only parameter IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd IP address of the data interace group Subnet Mask [default] aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Subnet mask for the data interface group Default Gateway [default] No defined gateway aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Gateway address for packets outside the defined subnet IGMP mode selection IGMP v3 Uses version 3 of the IGMP protocol IGMP v2 Uses version 2 of the IGMP protocol Physical Data Interface <n> Default MAC Address aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff The MAC address of the Gex interface. Link Status Link Up (1000) Link is up and the link speed is 1000 Mbps. Read only parameter Read only parameter Link Up (100) Link Down Link is up and the link speed is 100 Mbps. Link is down. Link Up Time days : hours : mins : secs The length of time that the link has been up. If the link goes down this value is reset to 0. Read only parameter TX Packets Number of IP packets transmitted Read only parameter RX Packets Number of IP packets received Read only parameter IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd IP address of the data interface Data Output The unit can generate one or more output Transport Streams from the components produced by the option cards fitted. The IP output Transport Stream packets are encapsulated in IP packets prior to being transmitted via the Ethernet Data ports. The base unit does not provide any other interface through which Transport Streams can be output. Data Input The unit has two Ethernet ports for data input, and responds to ARPs, pings and Reflex PCR exchange messages for statistical multiplexing. The input of data is only supported for transcoded operation. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-13

50 Getting Started 3.7 How to Configure the AVP Using the Web GUI The unit is configured using the web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI). For details of all the GUI screens and options, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. For details of supported web browsers please refer to the release notes accompanying the software release General AVP Configuration The configuration consists of two phases. First, the general parameters of the base unit and the option cards are configured through the Device Configuration web page. Then, the output streams can be configured through the Service Configuration web page. To save any changes made, click on the Apply All button located at the right side of the user interface below the page tabs. Note: To save time, save the changes only after each parameter has been altered. When trying to leave a page without saving the changes, a dialog is displayed which allows saving or discarding the changes or abandoning the page. The modified folders in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget and the corresponding parameters in the Properties widget are highlighted in orange. Moreover, the changes are also listed on the Changes tab of the Information widget. To undo a change, simply click on it in the Information widget. The appropriate item shows up in the Properties widget and its original value can be restored manually How to Enforce HTTPS The AVP control interface can be used over HTTP or HTTPS protocols. The HTTPS protocol is always available, and uses a self-signed certificate. It is not possible to change this certificate. HTTP is available by default, but an administrator of the unit can turn this off. To turn off HTTP access: 1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options. 2. Change the control Disable HTTP Access (HTTPS is always On) to ON in order to disable HTTP access, thereby enforcing the use of HTTPS /1553-FGC Uen Y

51 Getting Started How to Configure User Authentication The AVP can be configured to force a user to log into the web application. Two authentication methods are available: Basic Authentication, and LDAP Authentication. Basic Authentication Basic Authentication allows an administrator to set up a user name and password via the web application. When applied, the browser will immediately require that the user logs into the unit for that session. Note: Basic Authentication is not designed to be a strong authentication method. Should something more robust be required, consider using LDAP Authentication. To set up Basic Authentication: 1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options. 2. Set Authentication on the Properties widget to Basic and enter a username and password. 3. Select Apply All to enforce authentication for the current session. Figure 3.4 Configuring Basic Authentication LDAP Authentication LDAP Authentication allows an administrator to use an external LDAP server to perform the user authentication. Note: The AVP provides a test mode to check the parameters for LDAP have been correctly entered. This test mode is necessary because if a mistake is made on entering the data, and full live LDAP is applied, no user will be able to authenticate and hence access to the unit will be permanently locked. To set up LDAP authentication: 4. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options. 5. Set Authentication on the Properties widget to LDAP Test. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-15

52 Getting Started 6. Enter the LDAP parameters as provided by the user s IT department. Figure 3.5 Configuring LDAP Authentication Test 7. Select Apply All. The user will be asked to enter their authentication details (username and password). The unit will attempt to authenticate against the server, and the result will be displayed on the same page. The unit automatically times out after two minutes and resets the Authentication mode to Off. 8. If the LDAP settings were successful, select LDAP Authentication for the Authentication control and select Apply All. Figure 3.6 Configuring LDAP Authentication /1553-FGC Uen Y

53 Getting Started How to Configure Advanced Video Processor Settings General Advanced Video Processor Settings To configure the General Advanced Video Processor Settings: 1. Navigate to the Device Configuration page and click on the Advanced Setup tab. Note: The Advanced Video Processor Settings widget displays all the unit parameters organized into different folders in a tree view. The folders can be expanded and collapsed by clicking on the plus or minus sign next to them or by selecting a node, right clicking on it, then choosing Expand Selected or Collapse Selected from the context menu. 2. General parameters such as Unit Name, UTC and SNTP Server are configured by navigating to Encoder > Base Unit 3. Configure the IP output parameters by navigating to Encoder > Network Configuration > Data Interface Group 3-4. Note: There is no actual output until a Transport Stream is created and its Status of Service parameter is set to Online. 4. Optionally, the redundancy mode for the unit can be set up in the Encoder > How to Configure Output Transport Streams How to Configure Output Transport Streams To configure a Transport Stream for an AVP, follow the steps below. Here, the IP output is taken as example. Transport Streams also can be easily configured on other outputs using the same procedure. 1. Navigate to the Service Configuration web page. 2. Expand the Host Outputs node in the Outputs widget, and click on the required output. A blue box is drawn around the selected item and the properties associated with it are displayed in the Transport Stream accordion panel of the Properties widget. 3. Create a Transport Stream by right clicking on the required output and selecting the Add Transport Stream command from the context menu, as shown in Figure 3.7. The properties of the newly created Transport Stream appear in the Properties widget. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-17

54 Getting Started Figure 3.7 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Transport Stream 4. Adjust the Transport Stream properties as required. Note: It is good practice to configure a Transport Stream by setting the Bit rate tracking mode to Maximize Video. In this way, any changes in the Transport Stream bit rate will be reflected in the video component bit rates. 5. To set up internally generated ATSC tables, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. 6. To create a service in the newly created Transport Stream, make sure the Transport Stream is selected. Right click on it and select Add Service from the context menu, as shown in Figure 3.8. The properties of the newly created service shall appear in the Service accordion panel of the Properties widget. Adjust the service properties as required /1553-FGC Uen Y

55 Getting Started Figure 3.8 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service Note: Transport Streams and services can also be added through the Action menu in the Outputs widget. 7. Expand the nodes in the Inputs widget and select the video stream to be included in the Transport Stream. 8. Hold down the left mouse button and drag it over the newly created service, as shown in Figure 3.9. The color of the dragging box changes to green when the component is over the service. This indicates that the component is now over a valid dropping position. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-19

56 Getting Started Figure 3.9 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Component 9. Release the left mouse button. The component is added to the newly created service and its parameters are shown on separate tabs in the Video Component accordion panel of the Properties widget. 10. Adjust the video properties as required. 11. Add all the required components from the Inputs widget to the Transport Stream as above. Adjust the component parameters in the respective accordion panel of the Properties widget. Note: To identify the source of a certain component in the Outputs widget, click on the component. The source of the component is highlighted in grey in the Inputs widget. You may have to scroll in the Inputs widget to actually see the highlighted component. 12. Modifying the same parameter for different items of the same type (for instance, the bit rate of two or more audio components) can be carried out by selecting all the items, navigating to the property to be changed, and changing the value. If the values for the selected items are different, then the string [Mixed] is shown in the respective field. 13. If you want to create another service or Transport Stream, repeat the steps above. 14. Turn the Transport Streams online by selecting the Transport Stream and clicking on the Online button in the Properties widget. All Transport Streams can be set online in one go by selecting all of them and clicking on the Online button /1553-FGC Uen Y

57 Getting Started How to Configure the Chassis for Multi-screen Functionality In order to use Multi-screen Encoder functionality, the AVP chassis must have the relevant software release and be fitted with appropriate option cards fitted in specific slots. ABR is a licensed feature and the chassis must have one AVP/SWO/ABR/SD license and optionally one AVP/SWO/ABR/HD license installed for each service. The slot configuration will depend on which chassis is used Installing the Option Cards Install the EI9001/T cards in the slots indicated in Table 3.4, depending on what functionality you want to achieve, and which chassis is being used. Table 3.4 Installation of Option Cards Chassis Type of Services Slots to Populate All types of Six Slot Chassis One service comprising of ABR and Multiplatform 4, 5 and 6 All types of Six Slot Chassis One service comprising of ABR only 5 and 6 All types of Six Slot Chassis Two services each comprising of ABR only 3, 4, 5 and 6 AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED Two services each comprising of ABR and Multiplatform 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED Three services each comprising of ABR only 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 AVP4000/BAS/2AC One service comprising of ABR and Multiplatform 1, 2 and 3 Slot 4 must have a blanking plate fitted. AVP4000/BAS/2AC One service comprising of ABR only 3 and 4 AVP4000/BAS/2AC Two services each comprising of ABR only 1, 2, 3 and 4 Only an AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED can be populated with up to six EI9001 or EI9001T cards. All other six-slot-chassis can only be populated with up to four EI9001 or EI9001T cards Configuring the Option Cards Card roles are a software configurable option that must be set up via the web GUI. Each card must be given the correct card role to gain access to the required functionality. It is recommended that the unit is free of all output Transport Streams and Services before proceeding. To configure the card roles, the following procedure must be followed. Table 3.5 shows the roles that particular cards are to take given the required services and chassis in use. To configure the option cards: 1. Select the appropriate slot on the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page, and select the EI9001T > Build folder. 2. Set the appropriate Card Role in the Properties panel. 3. Repeat for all the cards in the chassis, and select Apply All. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-21

58 Getting Started 4. The unit must be rebooted after configuring card roles. If the unit does not automatically reboot, select Support > Device Management, and select the Reboot Device button in the Reset Device panel. Table 3.5 Configuration of Option Cards Chassis Type of Services Slot Card Role All types of Six Slot Chassis One service comprising of ABR and Multiplatform 4 ABR 5 Decode/Encode 6 Broadcast All types of Six Slot Chassis One service comprising of ABR only 5 ABR 6 Decode/Encode All types of Six Slot Chassis AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED AVP4000/BAS/1AC/ED AVP4000/BAS/2AC Two services each comprising of ABR only Two services each comprising of ABR and Multiplatform Three services each comprising of ABR only One service comprising of ABR and Multiplatform 3 ABR 4 Decode/Encode 5 ABR 6 Decode/Encode 1 ABR 2 Decode/Encode 3 Broadcast 4 ABR 5 Decode/Encode 6 Broadcast 1 ABR 2 Decode/Encode 3 ABR 4 Decode/Encode 5 ABR 6 Decode/Encode 1 ABR 2 Decode/Encode 3 Broadcast AVP4000/BAS/2AC One service comprising of ABR only 3 ABR 4 Decode/Encode AVP4000/BAS/2AC Two services each comprising of ABR only 1 ABR 2 Decode/Encode 3 ABR 4 Decode/Encode /1553-FGC Uen Y

59 Getting Started How to Set Up Your Services After configuring your hardware, described to the previous section, the required output services can then be added to enable multi-screen functionality. Setting Up Transcode If you have installed and configured a Transcode Card in the slots whose card role is Decode/Encode then you can now set up your unit for transcode operation. To set up transcode: 1. Configure the IP input stream that you wish to use as your source in the usual way. 2. Configure a transcode service (not an encode service), by dragging-anddropping a service from the Input panel to a Transport Stream in the Output panel. Note: The input service must contain HD (1080i or 720p) resolution video. Setting Up HD-SDI Input (Encode) If you have installed and configured an Encode Card in the slots whose card role is Decode/Encode then you can now set up your unit for encode operation. To set up HD-SDI Input (Encode): 1. Configure an encode service in the usual way, by dragging-and-dropping a component from the Input panel to a Service in the Output panel. Note: The input service must be HD (1080i or 720p) resolution video. Adding Additional Output Services (Including ABR) At this stage, you should have a service configured using the Decode/Encode card and additional output services can now be added to this initial configuration. To set up additional output services: 1. Right-click on the configured Output Service, and select Add Additional Output Service from the displayed menu. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-23

60 Getting Started Figure 3.10 Adding Additional Output Services 2. A sub-menu displays various options for adding further output services. The interface will only allow you to add services that the unit supports. Nonselectable options are greyed-out. Notes: Each option card can only support a single type of codec. This means that depending on how your primary encode is configured, only certain options are displayed. The On Same Card option enables a PiP service to be added (only relevant for H.264). On a card with the Broadcast role, the On Same Card option also enables a secondary SD service. The Adjacent Card option enables the adjacent Broadcast Card to be configured to generate a main service (HD or SD) and a secondary SD service. The ABR Service option creates a fixed list of profiles which run on an ABR Card. This option is only available when you right-click on a card with the Decode/Encode role. Once created, these profiles can be edited in a similar way to other standard services and outputs. ABR profiles and individual components can be removed from the list by right-clicking and selecting Delete from the displayed menu /1553-FGC Uen Y

61 Getting Started Figure 3.11 Viewing (Unsaved) Output Services (1 Linear and ABRs Shown) 3. Click on Apply All to save your configuration to the unit, and to set your Transport Streams to online (this can be done quickly for all Transport Streams by selecting each one with CTRL pressed and then clicking Online once). Your encoded/transcoded services are now able to be output to multiple screens with multiple profiles Multi-screen Licensing Requirements Video Licenses for ABR ABR is a licensed feature and the chassis must have one AVP/SWO/ABR/SD license and optionally one AVP/SWO/ABR/HD license installed for each ABR service. In addition, at least one HD MP4 video license is required for each Decode/Encode card, and suitable video licenses are required for any services being generated on additional broadcast cards. Audio Licenses for ABR Up to four audio components are available, and are re-used across all ABR outputs, with the restriction that each ABR output can have up to two audio components associated with the output. Up to four audio components configured with the same settings are covered by one encode license. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-25

62 Getting Started If Automatic Loudness Control (ALC) is also required, that too is a licensed feature and the same number of ALC licenses as the encode licenses will be needed to enable the feature across the ABR profile set How to Use ABR Templates The AVP 4000 provides a default set of 10 ABR profiles that will be created when the user creates an ABR service. For specific customers, the default set may be changed by uploading a template which has been created for their specific usecase. The template works in cooperation with underlying software and is not a method of obtaining generic changes to the profile set. Please contact Ericsson Television Product Management if you need such a template or change. To use a template 1. Ensure the chassis is licensed and configured to support ABR. 2. Before creating an ABR service, go to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > ABR Template Management to select and upload the template file supplied. 3. Create the ABR service as documented in section How to Set Up Your Services. Figure 3.12 Creating an ABR Service How to Set up Encode Using Two Broadcast Cards from a Single HD- SDI Source The AVP 4000 provides the capability of encoding two outgoing services of HD, one of which may be used in a statistical multiplex group, and the other CBR, or both CBR. This is achieved using two EI9001 cards but only sourced from a single HD- SDI feed /1553-FGC Uen Y

63 Getting Started To set up an encode configuration: 1. Ensure the two cards to be used are numerically adjacent in the chassis. For example, cards in slots 3 and 4 (any adjacent pairing may be used). 2. Plug the HD-SDI coaxial cable into the BNC connector on the lower numbered slot. The data from this HD-SDI feed may be used by the card in the next adjacent superior slot. For example, if the HD-SDI feed is on slot 3, then slot 4 may be set up to use the HD-SDI data from slot Set up the encode service for the lower-numbered slot as documented in section How to Configure Output Transport Streams. 4. To set up the encode service for the higher-numbered slot, right-click on the service, and select Add Additional Output Service > On Adjacent card (slot 4 ) > [encode type]. Figure 3.13 Adding Additional Output Service 5. When the new service has been created, modify and check all settings for all components, and then click the Apply All button to save the changes made. Note: Only incoming video with HD resolutions are supported for this use case. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-27

64 Getting Started Figure 3.14 Additional Output Service Added How to Configure and Use a Separate PCR By default the unit will use PCR embedded in the video. If a separate PCR is required, complete the following steps: 1. Select Off for Embedded PCR in the Video Component > Output tab. Figure 3.15 Service Configuration Web Page Turning Off Embedded PCR 2. Select the Video PCR Stream from the video Inputs list and drag-and-drop it into the output service. 3. Configure the required PCR PID on this component /1553-FGC Uen Y

65 Getting Started 4. Select Outputs > Service n and set the PCR PID to the same value as that set for the component. Figure 3.16 Service Configuration Web Page Setting PCR PID How to Set Up Transcoded (Re-encoded) Services on EI9001T The AVP fitted with an EI9001T and licensed with the AVP/SWO/TRANS supports the transcode of services presented on the IP input. To configure a transcoded service on an AVP, follow the steps below. Here, the IP output is taken as example. Transport Streams also can be easily configured on other outputs using the same procedure. 1. Navigate to the Service Configuration web page. 2. Expand the Host Outputs node in the Outputs widget, and click on the required output. A blue box is drawn around the selected item and the properties associated with it are displayed in the Transport Stream accordion panel of the Properties widget. 3. Create a Transport Stream by right clicking on the required output and selecting the Add Transport Stream command from the context menu, as shown in Figure The properties of the newly created Transport Stream appear in the Properties widget. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-29

66 Getting Started Figure 3.17 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Transport Stream 4. Adjust the Transport Stream properties as required. 5. To set up internally generated ATSC tables, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. 6. Configure the Transport Stream input by right clicking on the required input (Physical Data Interface 1 or 2) and selecting the Add Transport Stream command from the context menu, as shown in Figure The incoming Transport Stream content of the newly created Transport Stream appear in the Properties widget Figure 3.18 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service 7. Adjust Transport Stream properties as follows: /1553-FGC Uen Y

67 Getting Started For an incoming SPTS VBR Multicast, set the Transport Stream Mode to VBR. This will automatically disable Input FEC Control, which is not supported for VBR input. Set the Multicast IP Address to the incoming stream address and set the Source IP Address to Figure 3.19 Setting Transport Stream Mode to VBR (SPTS Multicast) For an incoming CBR Multicast, which may be SPTS or MPTS, set the Transport Stream Mode to CBR. Set the Input FEC Mode to Off if not expecting FEC on the incoming stream, or set the Input FEC Mode to Auto if FEC may be expected on the incoming stream. Set the Multicast IP Address to the incoming stream address and set the Source IP Address to Figure 3.20 Setting Transport Stream Mode to CBR (SPTS or MPTS Multicast) 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-31

68 Getting Started For an incoming SPTS VBR Unicast stream, set the Transport Stream Mode to VBR. This will automatically disable Input FEC Control, which is not supported for VBR input. Set the Source IP Address to the incoming stream address and set the Multicast IP Address to Figure 3.21 Setting Transport Stream Mode to VBR (SPTS Unicast) For an incoming CBR Unicast, which may be SPTS or MPTS, set the Transport Stream Mode to CBR. Set the Input FEC Mode to Off if not expecting FEC on the incoming stream, or set the Input FEC Mode to Auto if FEC may be expected on the incoming stream. Set the Source IP Address to the incoming stream address and set the Multicast IP Address to Figure 3.22 Setting Transport Stream Mode to CBR (SPTS or MPTS Unicast) /1553-FGC Uen Y

69 Getting Started 8. To transcode a service in the output Transport Stream, simply drag-and-drop the selected input service to the Transport Stream output. Figure 3.23 Service Configuration Web Page Adding a Service Note: Only Services can be dragged-and-dropped for transcode operation, Transport Streams and video/audio/data components cannot be. 9. Select Transcode through a card on this device. Figure 3.24 Service Configuration Web Page Remux or Transcode 10. The Transcode Configuration wizard will prompt you the card to use for transcode operation, the format of the incoming video, and to select which components you want to transcode or pass-thru. By default, the first available transcoder card is being used. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-33

70 Getting Started Figure 3.25 Transcode Service Configuration Adding a Service 11. The Transcode Configuration wizard will then prompt you to select the components to be transcoded. Figure 3.26 Transcode Service Configuration Component Selection /1553-FGC Uen Y

71 Getting Started 12. If one or more DVB subtitle components are selected, in the next screen select the maximum expected bit rate needed to pass thru the subtitles, as the actual bit rate used cannot be determined at run time. Figure 3.27 Transcode Service Configuration Bit Rate Selection 13. The Transcode Configuration Wizard will prompt you if you want to monitor PIDs on the incoming source stream. Up to 40 PIDs can be monitored in total across all services, and can selectively force a switch to a marked backup stream should a PID be marked for Monitor & Redundancy. Figure 3.28 Prompt for Monitor 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-35

72 Getting Started How to Configure the De-jitter Performance of the Incoming Transport Stream from the IP Input The AVP is capable of de-jittering the incoming Transport Stream from the IP input. The Jitter Tolerance parameter can be controlled to allow for how much IP jitter can be absorbed on the input under Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > IP Input Manager Notes: The configuration has an effect on the input to output end to end delay. For that reason, we recommend using the default configuration of 60 ms. The incoming Transport Stream requires a PCR to be present in order for the Transport Stream to be accepted by the AVP 4000 and the de-jittering operation to operate. Figure 3.29 Configuring Jitter Tolerance How to Set Up Internal PSIP Data Insertion The Internal Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Data Insertion feature allows the user to insert internally generated MPEG Program Specific Information (PSI) and ATSC PSIP data into any of the internally created Transport Streams. This is primarily used in ATSC applications. The PSI information includes the following MPEG tables: Program Association Table (PAT) Program Map Table (PMT) The internally generated PSIP data includes the following ATSC tables: /1553-FGC Uen Y

73 Getting Started Conditional Access Table (CAT) Master Guide Table (MGT) System Time Table (STT) Terrestrial/Cable Virtual Channel Table (T/C)VCT Event Information Table (EIT) Operation To set up PSIP data insertion: 1. On the Service Configuration page, create the Transport Stream you want to add the PSIP information to. 2. Add the required services and components, and adjust the Transport Stream and component settings. 3. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add the PSIP data to. In the Properties widget, set Syntax to ATSC and the External Generation to Off. The Program Specific Information and the PSIP Information accordion panels are now displayed. Note: If external table generation is enabled, the unit does not produce tables internally. 4. By setting a table On, the appropriate parameters are displayed. To configure PSIP data, set PAT/PMT to On. Set PMT Repetition Period as required. The default value is 500 ms. 5. Conditional Access Table can be activated by setting CAT parameter to On. 6. By setting STT On, GPS UTC Offset and Daylight Saving can be configured. 7. By setting (T/C)VTC On, the following parameters can be configured: Delivery (Terrestrial/Cable), Major Channel Number, Modulation Mode. 8. By turning EIT On, EIT Base PID and the number of the Event information Tables can be set. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-37

74 Getting Started Figure 3.30 Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI How to Set Up External PSIP Data Insertion The External Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Data Insertion feature allows the user to insert MPEG Program Specific Information (PSI) and ATSC PSIP data generated by a Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment into any of the internally created Transport Streams. The feature requires the AVP/SWO/PSIP license to be installed on the unit. The PSI information includes the following MPEG tables: Program Association Table (PAT) Program Map Table (PMT) The PSIP data can include the following ATSC tables: Master Guide Table (MGT) Rating Region Table (RRT) System Time Table (STT) Event Information Table (EIT) External Text Table (ETT) Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (TVCT) Cable Virtual Channel Table (CVCT) /1553-FGC Uen Y

75 Getting Started The tables to be included have to be set up on the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment. For the configuration of the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder refer to its user manual. Note: In general, all tables generated by Triveni Digital GuideBuilder will be included in the output. Operation External PSIP data insertion requires a valid AVP/SWO/PSIP license be present on the unit. Note: If external table generation is enabled, the unit does not produce tables internally. To set up PSIP data insertion, follow the steps below: 1. On the Service Configuration page, create the Transport Stream you want to add the external PSIP information to. 2. Add the required services and components, and adjust the Transport Stream and component settings. 3. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add the PSIP data to. In the Properties widget, set Syntax to ATSC and the External Generation to On - Triveni. The PSIP accordion panel is now displayed. 4. In the PSIP accordion panel, set the TCP Port to the port through which your unit will communicate with the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment. The default port used by Triveni Digital GuideBuilder is Set the Maximum PSIP bit rate as required. The more tables that are generated by the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder, the higher the data rate. Note: Once the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder has been set up and a communication link between the Triveni and your unit is established, the actual bit rate will be updated in the Real PSIP bit rate field. 6. If you want to generate STT, then set the STT Table Insertion option to On. Note: The STT table itself is generated by the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder, and the generated table is updated with the UTC time on the AVP 4000 unit. UTC time can be configured by drilling down to Encoder > Base Unit in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the Advanced tab of the Device Configuration page, and setting the correct UTC time and date in the UTC Time and UTC Date fields in the Properties widget. A time server can be set up in the SNTP Server field. 7. In the Minimum PID and Maximum PID fields, set the PID range for the generated PSIP tables. 8. Configure the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment as described in its user manual. Make sure you apply the same Transport Stream and communication 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-39

76 Getting Started settings as you did on the AVP 4000 unit, otherwise the embedded information will not reflect the structure of the internally created Transport Stream. Figure 3.31 Setting External PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI How to Configure PSIP Pass-thru When using an EI9001T card for a transcoding operation, the user can pass-thru a range of PIDs that allow the pass-thru of PSIP tables. Two groups of PID ranges as well as individual PID values can be entered by the user. To configure PSIP Pass-thru: 1. Drag-and-drop the incoming Service from the pre-configured input TS (see Section ) /1553-FGC Uen Y

77 Getting Started Figure 3.32 Transcode Service Enable PSIP Pass-thru 2. Check the Enable PSIP Pass-thru box. The PID configuration is displayed. 3. Select the PID range and/or values to be passed through the Transport Stream DVB Subtitle Processing DVB subtitles can be input to the AVP 4000 from an IP source. The AVP 4000 is capable of passing through up to six PIDs containing DVB subtitles. These pass-thru components may be added to services that are either transcode or encode. The AVP 4000 is also capable of processing two DVB subtitle components allowing user selected repositioning of the subtitles. In this scenario, on services in which video is downscaled from HD resolutions to SD resolutions will have the associated DVB subtitles downscaled appropriately How to Set Up DVB Subtitle Pass-thru on Encode Services The AVP 4000 can pass through up to six DVB subtitle components. These components arrive at the input of the AVP 4000 via IP, but can be added to outgoing Transport Streams whose other components are being encoded from an SDI source. 1. Set up the encode service according to section Set up the IP input according to section paragraphs 6 and 7. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-41

78 Getting Started 3. Select DVB subtitle component from IP input, and drag onto encode service, selecting pass-thru. Figure 3.33 Encode Services Selecting DVB Subtitles Component Figure 3.34 Encode Service Enabling Subtitles Pass-thru How to Reposition DVB Subtitles DVB subtitles may, alternatively, be repositioned. 1. Set up the output service, according to section or section If the output service is an encoding service (and not transcoding), then set up IP input according to section paragraphs 6 and Select the required DVB subtitle component from the IP input, drag onto the encode service and select Reposition /1553-FGC Uen Y

79 Getting Started Figure 3.35 Encode Service Enabling Subtitles Reposition 4. Repositioning of the DVB subtitle is possible by choosing from the drop-down list in the wizard (shown in step 3). This is also available after the wizard has completed, on the Properties tab of the DVB Subtitles component. Figure 3.36 Encode Service Subtitles Reposition (General) using Properties Tab The positions available are described in Table /1553-FGC Uen Y 3-43

80 Getting Started Table 3.6 Position Default Top-Left Top-Center Top-Right Middle-Left Middle-Center Middle-Right Bottom-Left Bottom-Center Bottom-Right Fixed Offset Repositioning Options Meaning The DVB subtitles are not repositioned but instead keep their original settings. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the top of the screen, and towards the left side. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the top of the screen, and centered horizontally. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the top of the screen, and towards the right side. The DVB subtitles will be placed in the middle of the of the screen (vertically), and towards the left side. The DVB subtitles will be placed in the middle of the of the screen (vertically), and centered horizontally. The DVB subtitles will be placed in the middle of the of the screen (vertically), and towards the right side. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the bottom of the screen, and towards the left side. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the bottom of the screen, and centered horizontally. The DVB subtitles will be placed toward the bottom of the screen, and towards the left side. Two additional entry boxes appear for the user to enter the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position to start the DVB subtitles at. The position (0, 0) is at the top of the screen and on the left side. See Figure Figure 3.37 Encode Service Subtitles Reposition (Specific) using Properties Tab /1553-FGC Uen Y

81 Getting Started SCTE-27 Subtitle Processing The AVP 4000 is capable of processing up to two SCTE-27 components per output service. The SCTE-27 components are input to the AVP 4000 from IP sources. The processing offered is to either pass-thru the components onto the output service, or to translate the components into DVB subtitle components. Set up of SCTE-27 pass-thru is similar to set up of DVB subtitle pass-thru, see How to Set Up DVB Subtitle Pass-thru on Encode Services How to Set up SCTE-27 to DVB Subtitle Translation for Encoding Services Incoming SCTE-27 components arriving over IP can be added, as DVB subtitle components, onto an existing encoded service (in which the video and audio input arrives over SDI). It is assumed that the SDI and IP sources are generated somewhere upstream by the same device and hence are synchronous. The AVP 4000 will not synchronize the separate components. 1. Set up the encode service according to section Set up the IP input according to section paragraphs 6 and Select the required SCTE-27 component from the IP input, drag onto the encode service, and select Transcode in the popup dialog box. Set the other parameters as required and select Finish. Figure 3.38 SCTE 27 Translation Selecting the Component 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-45

82 Getting Started Figure 3.39 Translation Enabling Transcode (to DVB Subtitles) How to Set Up SCTE-27 to DVB Subtitle Translation for Transcoded Services 1. Set up the transcode service according to chapter At step 11, select up to two SCTE 27 components for Transcode. Figure 3.40 Transcode Service Configuration SCTE 27 Component Selection /1553-FGC Uen Y

83 Getting Started 3. For each data component whose bit rate cannot be determined automatically, select the maximum bit rate in the output transport stream to allocate to that component. Also, for transcoded SCTE 27 and repositioned DVB subtitle components, select the Subtitle position of the output DVB subtitles. Figure 3.41 Transcode Service Data Component Additional Configuration Teletext Processing Teletext input over SD-SDI arriving as data in the vertical blanking interval can be processed by the AVP 4000 and converted into a teletext component as part of a service on the Transport Stream output, or converted into a DVB subtitle component as part of a service on the Transport Stream output Teletext to DVB Subtitles Translation The teletext arriving in VBI is a data stream represented by digitized analog waveforms. A DVB subtitle component comprises of a bitmapped picture presented by the end user s set-top box or television set as an overlay onto the video. The AVP 4000 is able to convert the teletext data into such a bitmapped picture using a built-in font based on the open source font free sans. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-47

84 Getting Started Restrictions of Teletext to DVB Subtitles Translation 1. The VBI data supported is Presentation Level 1 of ETS , version Languages supported are restricted by Presentation Level 1, limited by codes within the data stream, and by character sets available for the conversion into pictures. 3. The DVB subtitle output is standardized in ETS , and the conversion process supports version Only 576i25 SD-SDI is supported as an input video format. Setting Up Teletext to DVB Subtitle Translation 1. Set up an encoding service according to section Add the main video component as described in section 3.7.5, and any other components as required. 3. From the Inputs widget, select and drag the component Video 1 DVB Subtitles Stream 1, and add it to the service, as shown below. Figure 3.42 Adding DVB Subtitles Component 4. In the Outputs widget, Select the Video component, and then select the Properties tab VBI. 5. For each line known to contain Teletext data, select Teletext System B from the drop-down box on that line. This must be completed for both fields 1 and /1553-FGC Uen Y

85 Getting Started Figure 3.43 VBI Line Data Content Selection 6. In the Outputs widgets, select the DVB Subtitles component. On the Properties widget select the DVB Subtitles tab and enter the Teletext Page Number to be used. The range of pages supported is 1 through to 899. Selecting a page number of 0 informs the AVP 4000 to automatically search for the index page of the Teletext data. 7. Select the Teletext tab on the Properties widget, and check the Teletext Source parameter is set to VBI Lines. Figure 3.44 DVB Subtitles Teletext Source Selection 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-49

86 Getting Started How to Configure Output Transport Streams with Internal Reflex Support About Internal Reflex Internal Reflex (Reflex) is the statistical multiplexing system provided by Ericsson. Reflex works on a group of components (called a Reflex group), and monitors the bit rate demand of each component within the group on a frame-by-frame basis. It adjusts the bit rate allocated to each component to ensure that the picture quality is constantly optimized. A Reflex group can use the available bit rate within a Transport Stream, or it can have a manually set bit rate. Either way, the sum of the bit rates of the components within the group never exceeds the Reflex group bit rate. Internal Reflex does not require an external control entity for correct operation. As a trade-off, internal Reflex can only control the bit rates of internally generated components. Reflex requires a valid AVP/SWO/REFLEX license for each option card whose output video stream is included in a Reflex group. To set up Reflex operation, first a Reflex group must be created and components have to be added to it. Then the Reflex group parameters must be set up. Finally, the Reflex parameters for each component must be customized Internal Reflex Visualization Once all parameters for all channels (components) are set, the Reflex operation can be monitored on a chart under the Bit rates area in the Reflex Group accordion of the Properties widget. The chart is only updated if there are no pending changes. To commit any pending changes and have the chart updated by the web user interface, click on the Apply button in the top right corner of the page. To create a Transport Stream with Reflex support, do the following: 1. Browse to the Service Configuration page. 2. In the Outputs widget, create a Transport Stream. 3. Right click on the newly created Transport Stream, and select Add Reflex Group. (You can also choose the Add Reflex Group option from the Edit menu.) 4. Select the Reflex group you want to add one or more services to. 5. Right click on the selected Reflex group, and choose Add Service from the context menu. (You can also choose Add Service option from the Edit menu.). 6. Now add components to the required services by dragging them from the Inputs widget or selecting them in the Inputs widget, choosing Edit > Copy, selecting the service in the Outputs widget, and choosing Edit > Paste /1553-FGC Uen Y

87 Getting Started Note: Components cannot be directly added to Reflex groups, only to services within a group How to Set up Internal Reflex Group Parameters Once all components to be statistically multiplexed are added to the Reflex group, you can set up the group parameters. For this, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Reflex group you want to set up. 2. In the Properties widget, set a name for the group in the Group Name field. 3. For the Seamless Buffer Delay option, specify the encoding delay your application can tolerate. The larger the delay, the better the output video quality is. 4. If you want to use the maximum available bit rate in the Transport Stream, select On under Use Max Available Bit Rate. Otherwise, set Use Max Available Bit rate to Off, and specify a bit rate for the group under Group Bit rate. Note: The sum of the bit rates of the components outside the Reflex group plus the bit rate set in the Group Bit rate field cannot exceed the total bit rate of the Transport Stream How to Customize the Internal Reflex Properties of Individual Components To customize the Reflex related properties of the individual components, do the following: 1. Select the video component whose Reflex related properties you want to customize. Note: Even though all sorts of components can be added to a Reflex group, only video components will be under Reflex control. More importantly, the bit rates of component types other than video will not be included in the group bit rate. 2. In the Properties widget, select the appropriate Preset option. Note: If you want to use presets for a given video encoding profile, choose the Auto option for Preset in the Properties widget. All parameters will be populated for you based on the encoding profile selected. Otherwise, choose the Manual option. 3. If the Preset is set to Manual, adjust the bit rate range for the video component in the Min Seamless Bit rate and Max Seamless Bit rate fields. The video bit rate can be varied by the Reflex between the values set in the Min Seamless Bit rate and the Max Seamless Bit rate fields. Note: The delay shown under Buffer Delay is the same as the delay set under the Reflex group properties. The Buffer Size is the buffer size corresponding to the set delay. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-51

88 Getting Started 4. Set in the intended quality in the Target Quality field. Currently, this value is not observed by the video encoding module, and it is for future purposes only How to Configure the Front Panel Video Confidence Monitor The confidence monitor on the front panel can be configured to monitor the video input on any VCM fitted to the chassis, from either the GUI or the front panel. To configure the confidence monitor, proceed as follows: 1. From the GUI go to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Front Panel Parameters > Video Monitor Setup > Video Monitor Video Select. The Properties panel will provide a drop down box listing all available sources with the relevant slot number (in many cases this will be only a single VCM). 2. Select the required source. There is a preview time for the confidence monitor that sets the time the monitor display is active from the time the On button is pressed. This is to help maximize the life of the monitor. If a longer preview time is required, proceed as follows: 1. From the GUI go to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Front Panel Parameters and set the Video Monitor Preview Time to the required value (in seconds). 2. From the front panel navigate to Unit Config > Display Setup > Video Monitor Input and select the required source How to Configure VLAN Tagging VLAN tagging can be used to segregate IP packets from data interfaces. VLAN Creation A VLAN is created by specifying the VLAN ID, IP address and the Netmask. All Transport Streams which are tagged to this VLAN use the VLAN IP address as its source IP address. Hence the VLAN and VLAN ID must be created before it can be used to tag a Transport Stream. To create VLANs, navigate to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Encoder > Vlan Tags and select the output you want to assign the VLAN tag to, and click Add in the Properties pane. Alternatively, on the front panel navigate to Advanced/System/Vlan Tags and set up the VLANs as required. The available options are listed in the following table /1553-FGC Uen Y

89 Getting Started Table 3.7 VLAN Creation Options Parameter Values Description Vlan ID (Create) New VLAN ID to create. Vlan IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx VLAN IP Address (VLAN tagged Transport Stream will have this as its source IP address). Vlan Netmask yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy VLAN Netmask. Vlan Gateway zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz VLAN gateway address for the current VLAN. Vlan Priority 0-7 Quality of service can be controlled by setting the VLAN priority. A higher number has higher priority for services sharing a transport stream and por. Note: The VLAN ID and its IP address must be unique across all Ethernet interfaces. VLAN Tag Sharing Once the VLANs are created, they can be assigned to IP Transport Streams. To do that, navigate to the Service Configuration page, and create a Transport Stream for the appropriate IP output. Then, click on the newly created Transport Stream, and in the Properties widget select the required VLAN tag. VLANs can also be assigned to Transport Streams in the Outputs/IP Output <m>/data Interface Group <n>/transport Stream ID: <id>/destination List/Destination <k>/vlan Tag front panel menu. The following options can be set: Table 3.8 VLAN Tag Sharing Options Parameter Values Description Vlan Tag None, existing VLAN tag Disables VLAN tagging or assigns the selected VLAN tag to the current Transport Stream. Vlan Priority 0-7 Priority that can be used to support QoS. It is also possible to group multiple Transport Streams under the same VLAN. To do this, assign the same VLAN tag to all of them. Note: VLANs can be managed through the Service Configuration page (on the web GUI) by clicking on the Manage button next to the Vlan Tag parameter. VLAN Deletion A VLAN can be deleted by changing the VLAN Tag parameter under the Transport Stream to None. If a VLAN tag used by any Transport Stream is deleted, the VLAN Tag parameter is set to None in the respective Transport Streams. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-53

90 Getting Started How to Copy and Move Transport Streams and Services To copy or move a previously created Transport Stream or service, or an existing component from one output to the other, proceed as follows: 1. Select the Transport Stream, service or component. Note: More items can be highlighted by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking. 2. To move the selected items, drag them over another valid dropping location and release the mouse button. For Transport Streams, valid dropping positions are the outputs, for services, the Transport Streams and for components, the services. 3. To copy the item instead of moving, hold the Ctrl key while dragging. The item is moved or copied to the specified location. The commands in the Edit menu of the Properties widget can also be used for copying or moving items. To use these, proceed as follows: 1. Highlight the item or items you want to copy or move, and then choose Edit > Copy or Edit > Cut. 2. Then, highlight the location where you want to paste the items. Select Paste from the Edit menu. The items will be copied or moved to the new location. 3. There is also an option to create an identical mirror of an existing Transport Stream such that any changes made to the original Transport Stream are automatically applied to the mirrored Transport Stream. To create a mirrored Transport Stream highlight the Transport Stream to be copied, chose Edit > Copy, highlight the output where the mirrored TS is to be applied to and chose Edit > Paste as Mirror 4. To save your changes, click the Apply All button located at the right side of the user interface below the page tabs. Note: A component can be included in more than one Transport Stream as an instance of an input component. Therefore, any change to it, be it automatic by the bit rate tracking algorithm or manually applied by the user, is reflected in all instances How to Configure MGP Overview of MGP The Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is a mechanism used to control the emission of multicasts containing media streams over IP, where multiple AVP units can emit the same multicast onto the same network. This mechanism ensures only one AVP unit in such a group will emit. In a system deployment, this permits controlling software to not have to configure downstream switches to prevent duplication of the same multicast onto the same network /1553-FGC Uen Y

91 Getting Started MGP is configured automatically by Ericsson control software, but can be set up via the GUI (or the Front Panel). Please note that some of the settings mentioned here are hidden if the unit is or has been under the control of Ericsson control software. MGP can operate in one of two modes, or it may be turned off: In Unit Level mode, it is assumed that another unit is, or may be configured with, the same output transport streams. When a failure occurs, MGP will coordinate a redundancy switch of all the services from one unit to the other. In Media Level mode, transport streams may be grouped together into media bundles, which may be individually switched between units. In addition, MGP operation is significantly affected by two other settings: The Network Mode for the output Interfaces, a choice of Same Network or Different Network, and The transport stream source IP redundancy, a choice of Transparent or Nontransparent. With a Network Mode set to Same-Network, interfaces 3 and 4 share the same IP address and are therefore on the same network. Further options define how the interfaces are used. But from the perspective of MGP, there is only one logical output interface. With a Network Mode set to Different-Network, interfaces 3 and 4 must be connected to seemingly different networks (or sub nets) and they each get their own distinct IP address. When TS Source IP Redundancy is set to Transparent, media IP packets and MGP status IP packets are virtually sourced from IP addresses which can remain the same when a service bundle is switched from one unit to another. This setting is incompatible with the Different-Network mode. MGP works by emitting MGP Status Messages (MSMs) alongside the media packets, but on a separate multicast common to a bundle, if applicable, and shared with units likely to take over a service in case of failure or simply targeted for a nearseamless switch Configuring MGP Set up the output interface Network mode: Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > Network Configuration > Data Interface Group 3-4 > Network Mode. 1. Set up the Transport Stream source IP redundancy mode: Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > Base Unit > TS Source IP Redundancy. Note: A selection of output interface Network mode of Different Network, together with a transport stream source IP redundancy mode of Transparent, is not a valid combination. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-55

92 Getting Started 2. Select the mode of operation for MGP: Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP Settings. 3. Set up the MSM multicast address: a b In Unit Level mode, the MSM multicast address is configured at Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP Settings. In Module Level mode, there is the potential of a media bundle per Transport Stream and the MSM multicast address is configured at Service Configuration > Host Outputs > Transport Stream (output) > MGP Settings. MGP protection also needs to be switched on for each Transport Stream (Configuration > Host Outputs > Transport Stream (output) > MGP protection). Please note that toggling between MGP modes will disable MGP protection for each Transport Stream. 4. Configure the MGP spares: Recommendations a In Unit Level mode, configure the spares through Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP Spares, entering the IP address of each spare. Up to four spares can be configured. With a Same-Network configuration, it is recommended that Transparent source IP redundancy is used. With a Different-Network configuration, only Non-Transparent source IP redundancy is available. Care must be taken to set the source addresses for spare units, providing the addresses of both output interfaces, or MGP will not work correctly. Note: Source IP redundancy can only be set to Non-Transparent when there are no output Transport Streams configured How to Customize the Quick Set-up Menu to Quickly Access Required Features The quick set-up menu provides a means for the user to customize access to frequently used parameters: 1. Open the Customize Items dialog by selecting Actions > Customize Items. 2. In the Configuration Items widget of the Customize Items dialog, select the Quick Setup Items node, and select Actions > Add Folder. 3. Double-click on the newly created node, and rename it to a more descriptive name. 4. Expand the Encoder tree and scroll down to the item you want to add to your custom list in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget /1553-FGC Uen Y

93 Getting Started 5. By holding down the left mouse button, drag the item over the new folder in the Configuration Items widget. 6. Add the item to the new folder by releasing the mouse button. The item cannot be added to the Quick Setup Items node. Any valid drop position is indicated by the dragging rectangle changing into green. 7. Repeat the process for any additional items you want to add. You can create as many folders as you wish or you can use any previously created one. The created folders can be reordered by the drag-and-drop technique used for adding the item. The added items can also be relocated through drag-and-drop. To delete a folder or an item, select it then choose Action > Remove Item. 8. When ready, click Save to save the changes. The new items are added to the Quick Setup menu. Notes: The list of added items can be exported by selecting Action > Export and can be imported on another unit by Action > Import Parameters associated with Transport Stream creation and configuration cannot be added to the quickset-up items How to Configure Aspect Ratio Conversion for the Down-converted SD and PiP Output when the Incoming Video is HD Introduction When an HD input is used, both the SD and PiP encoded outputs are created on the EI9001 option card from the down-conversion process. Figure 3.45 HD to SD and PiP Down-conversion Manual Control of the Down-conversion Process To manually configure the aspect ratio down-conversion: 1. Navigate to the Video Component pane and select the ARC tab. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-57

94 Getting Started 2. In the Video Aspect Ratio (AR) Common Settings for Primary and Secondary video tab, set the Use Input AFD to false to enable manual control of the aspect ratio conversion. 3. Choose the Default Aspect Ratio Conversion as either Anamorphic, Center Cut or Letter Box, as required. Figure 3.46 Manual Aspect Ratio Conversion - Setting Input AFD Combination of Parameters with PiP Down-conversion and Aspect Ratio Signalling The example picture shown in Figure 3.47 represents an HD source, with an aspect ratio of 16:9. Figure 3.47 HD Input Picture Table 3.9 shows how both SD and PiP outputs are presented with the various combinations of: Down-conversion Default Aspect Ratio Conversion (Anamorphic, Center Cut, Letter Box). Aspect Ratio setting on the encoder (4:3 or 16:9) /1553-FGC Uen Y

95 Getting Started Table 3.9 SD or PiP Output with Combination of Aspect Ratio Settings Aspect Ratio Downconversion Setting Down-converted Output with Square Pixels Display with an Aspect Ratio Setting of 4:3 Display with an Aspect Ratio Setting of 16:9 Anamorphic Center Cut Letter Box When a PiP is generated from a native HD video input, we recommend setting the down-conversion setting to Anamorphic with an aspect ratio setting of 16:9. For a native SD video input, we recommend setting the PiP to an aspect ratio setting of 4: Automatic Control of the Aspect Ratio from the AFD When automatic control of the down-conversion from the AFD input is required, the SMPTE-2016 needs to be configured. To automatically configure the aspect ratio down-conversion: 1. Navigate to the Video Component pane and select the ARC tab. 2. In the Video Aspect Ratio (AR) Common Settings for Primary and Secondary video tab, set Use Input AFD to On and the SMPTE 2016 to On. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-59

96 Getting Started Figure 3.48 Selecting Automatic Aspect Ratio Conversion AFD Codes Passing Thru the Encode Chain The AFD codes received on the input are passed through the encoding chain as follows: The HD output will always pass the AFD code as received on the input. When an HD input is used, the down-converted output (SD or PiP) will make use of the AFD code and consume it in the down-conversion process. The AFD code in the output will therefore signal as coded frame. When an SD input is used, the encoder will always pass the AFD code as received on the input (as no down-conversion takes place). Figure 3.49 AFD Code Passing Thru the Encode Chain /1553-FGC Uen Y

97 Getting Started Automatic Video Input Detection and Configuration The AVP 4000 is capable of automatically detecting the format of the video and automatically configuring the encode to match. The AVP 4000 can be configured to detect between HD input standards only or between SD and HD input standards Selection of Automatic Video Input Detection and Configuration Encode Set up an encoding service as documented in section How to Configure the Chassis for Multi-screen Functionality. On the Service Configuration > Outputs > <service> > Video component, select the Input tab on the Properties widget. The parameter Input Detection is presented with five options: Off, HD 25/50Hz, HD 29.97/59.94Hz, SD/HD 25/50Hz, SD/HD 29.97/59.94Hz. Selecting the Off option allows you to explicitly set the Video Input Format. When Off option is selected, auto detection is disabled and the user must select the valid Video Input Format manually. Figure 3.50 Encoding: Manual Input Format If HD 25/50Hz is selected, the AVP 4000 will automatically select an HD vertical resolution based on the incoming video. The Detected Video Standard gives feedback to the user on what vertical resolution has been detected by the AVP If the detected standard is an HD format with a frame rate of either 25Hz or 50Hz, the Video Input Format is automatically set to that detected standard. The same applies for HD 29.97/59.94Hz. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-61

98 Getting Started If SD/HD 25/50Hz is selected, the AVP 4000 will automatically select an SD/HD vertical resolution based on the incoming video. The Detected Video Standard gives feedback to the user on what vertical resolution has been detected by the AVP If the detected standard is with a frame rate of either 25Hz or 50Hz, the Video Input Format is automatically set to that detected standard. Note: AVP 4000 does not support video up-conversion hence when SD/HD 25/50Hz option is selected the output video profile can only be set to an SD profile Transcode The same applies for SD/HD 29.97/59.94Hz. Note: AVP 4000 does not support SD/HD detection for the transcode use case in this release. Set up a transcoding service as documented in How to Set Up Transcoded (Re-encoded) Services on EI9001T. The wizard presented to the user has the field Select input detection mode with options Off, HD 25/50Hz or HD 29.97/59.94Hz. If you select Off then you must also configure the incoming video format via the field Select the format of the incoming video. Figure 3.51 Transcode: Select the Video Format If the user selects either HD 25/50Hz or HD 29.97/59.94Hz, the Select the format of the incoming video field is grayed-out because the AVP 4000 will automatically detect the incoming video format /1553-FGC Uen Y

99 Getting Started Figure 3.52 Transcode: Automatic Detection of Video Format Effects on Encoding of Video For both encoded services and transcoded services, the encoding video parameters are affected by the selection of the Input Detection field. If you have selected Off, the encoding parameters available include a single selection of GOP Length. Figure 3.53 Input Detection Selection 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-63

100 Getting Started If you have selected either (SD/)HD 25/50Hz or (SD/)HD 29.97/59.94Hz, the encoding parameters available include separate selections of GOP Length for the lower frame rate and for the higher frame rate. When the AVP 4000 automatically configures the encoding based on the detected input, the appropriate GOP Length will be used. There are parameters that only applies to SD or HD video only. When auto input detection is set to SD/HD 25/50Hz or SD/HD 29.97/59.94Hz then the user is expected to enter two parameters: one for the SD video and one for the HD video. When input detection is set to SD/HD 25/50Hz, the user needs to select separate Teletext sources to be used when input video is detected as SD or HD. Figure 3.54 Aspect Ratio Common Settings When input detection is set to SD/HD 29.97/59.94Hz, the user needs to select separate closed caption sources to be used when input video is detected as SD or HD /1553-FGC Uen Y

101 Getting Started Figure 3.55 Closed Captions Selection How to Set Up BISS Encryption for Services BISS Security When the AVP/SWO/BISS license is enabled as part of the AVP/SWO/MEZZ/BASIC package, the encoder uses Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) to scramble services in the outgoing Transport Stream. Both BISS Mode-1 and BISS Mode-E are supported. To provide the option of additional security for the BISS encrypted stream, there are two security levels available: normal BISS encryption (the original implementation) and Advanced BISS encryption (new, higher security). By default, normal BISS Encryption security level is enabled. If the higher security level is required this can be configured from the GUI by browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-65

102 Getting Started BISS Key Entry Figure 3.56 BISS Security Level Selection The unit supports the use of 31 keys for BISS, which are stored in a memory table on the unit, with the location identified as BISS Key 1 to BISS Key 31. Each required key must be entered into the table by the user, and once entered, the key value is not visible and there is no means of reading the value. The key may be entered or edited via the browser when applying BISS to an output service from the Service Configuration tab. Figure 3.57 BISS Key Entry /1553-FGC Uen Y

103 Getting Started Alternatively, the table entries can be edited by browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > BISS keys table and selecting the required key location. Figure 3.58 BISS Key Session Word To set up BISS encryption service from the GUI: 1. Go to the Outputs widget of the Service Configuration page, and select the service for which you want to apply BISS encryption. 2. In the Properties tab select the drop down option against BISS Key, which will show the list of 31 keys. Select the required key location. Note: If None is selected, BISS will not be enabled. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-67

104 Getting Started Figure 3.59 BISS Enabling and Key Selection 3. If a key is selected that has not had its key word set, a pop-up box provides the user definable fields for this key. Select the required Key Type (Mode-1 or Mode-E) and enter the New Key value (12 hexadecimal characters for Mode- 1 and 16 hexadecimal characters for Mode-E). Figure 3.60 Setting BISS Key Value If a key has already been set, an asterisk is displayed in the drop down list next to the label. If this key is selected the pop-up box will not appear. The user can modify the key by selecting the Edit Key box /1553-FGC Uen Y

105 Getting Started Figure 3.61 Editing a BISS Key Note: Although the BISS technical specification (Tech 3292 rev. 2.) states that BISS Mode-E shall work with shorter BISS Mode-1 keys, this is not supported in the unit. The Encrypted Session Word field only accepts 16- digit keys. 4. When BISS has been enabled on a service a padlock will appear in the outputs tree next to the service name and in Voyager units the Clear indicators on the GUI banner and front panel will change to Scrambled. 5. It is possible to select which of the components of the service are to be scrambled, when a BISS key has been selected. The choice of components can be done at the service level or independently for each component. At the service level, in the Service Configuration > Outputs > Service Properties widget, open the Service > Scrambling accordion panel and select the components to be scrambled. Figure 3.62 Selection of Components to be Scrambled Using BISS 5. Selecting an individual component to be scrambled using BISS is performed on the component tab of the Properties of that output component. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-69

106 Getting Started Figure 3.63 Scrambling Selection of an Individual Component BISS and Stored Configurations Both an xml and stored configuration will contain an entry for a BISS key, if a key had been set for the service on the unit that the configuration was saved from. To comply with the specification that requires the value of keys that are not available on external interfaces and cannot be retrieved, this uses the name of the table location (BISS Key n). Loading an xml or stored configuration with BISS enabled will successfully configure the unit, resulting in a Transport Stream output and service configured, with BISS enabled using the same BISS Key n setting as for the original configuration. The contents of the BISS key table are NOT transferred, so unless the same key has already been entered the key will either be not set or a previously entered different key might be applied. To ensure the correct key is set the user can edit the key stored in the table as described above. Loading an xml that contains a BISS key entry onto a unit that has never had BISS enabled will not enter any keys. ******NOTSET***** will still be displayed on the user interface and the output WILL NOT be encrypted. A key needs to be manually entered. Once a BISS key has been set for a service, switching BISS off does not affect the storage of the key. The key is maintained and used when BISS is re-enabled. If a different key is required it needs to be manually updated, or a different key from the table selected. The entered keys are maintained over a power cycle. Note: Deleting the unit configuration does not delete the contents of the BISS key table How to Set Up Audio Pass-thru When configuring the audio module to pass audio without encoding, it is necessary to set the audio encode coding standard to Pass-thru before selecting the audio input format to the pre-compressed format to be passed. Note: If an attempt is made to select a pre-compressed input format while the module is configured to encode audio, an error message referring to no more licenses will be displayed, and the configuration cannot be applied /1553-FGC Uen Y

107 Getting Started When configured for audio pass-thru, you are also able to select the bit rate or bit depth of the incoming stream. However, there is no monitoring to ensure that the input matches the configured value and, if the configured value is set lower than the actual incoming bit rate, the output transport stream can be over-rated causing problems with the output. Table 3.10 Audio Pass-thru Bit Rate Configuration Audio Input Configurable Options LPCM Pass-thru * Bit Depth 16 bit (1960 kbps) 20 bit (2340 kbps) 24 bit (2728 kbps) Dolby Digital Pass-thru Bit Rate Range 96 kbps to 640 kbps Dolby Digital Plus Pass-thru Bit Rate Range 96 kbps to 640 kbps * Supported from the embedded SDI input encode mode only. Not supported with IP input on EI9001T How to Set Up Input for 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Encoding Overview The unit can only de-embed stereo channel pairs (groups) from the SDI/HD-SDI input signal. Therefore, to set up 5.1 encoding, three groups have to be deembedded from the SDI/HD-SDI input signal, and routed to the audio encoder. The embedded groups have to be consecutive. That is, they have to carry the different channels as detailed in Table 3.11 (SMPTE 320M). Table 3.11 Embedded Stereo Channel Pairs Group Embedded n Embedded n+1 Embedded n+2 Description Left Front, Right Front Center, LFE Left Rear, Right Rear Configuration Note: This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one must be created before continuing. 1. In the Inputs widget, select Audio Stream Drag the selected component to a service in the Outputs widget. 3. In the Outputs widget, click on the audio component. Note: If you click on the Audio component in the Outputs widget, the corresponding audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Inputs widget. 4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab. 5. Set the Input Format to Uncompressed (LPCM) 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-71

108 Getting Started 6. Set the Input Source to Embedded n (SDI 1), the embedded stream that contains the left front and right front channels. 7. In the Properties widget, click on the Encode tab. 8. Select the required Coding Standard. 9. Select 3/2L (5.1 Surround) for Coding Mode. Your 5.1 encoding is now set up How to Set Up Audio Transcoding on EI9001T When transcoding video using an EI9001T card, only two audio components may be transcoded and two audio components passed-thru. This is because the decoder is restricted to two stereo pairs for decoded audio and two stereo pairs for precompressed pass-thru components. Figure 3.64 Transcoding Audio Using EI9001T Card The current GUI operation, when dragging and dropping the components, makes use of the Audio Decoder (daughter card) and will therefore restrict the number of audio channels to be decoded to two stereo pairs. For that reason, transcoding 5.1 Dolby digital Channels is not possible using the audio decoder from the daughter card. Configuring Dolby Digital Transcoding from a TS Input Using the EI9001T Card To transcode Dolby Digital 5.1 audio streams, the decoder on the main card should be used /1553-FGC Uen Y

109 Getting Started Figure 3.65 Manual Configuration of Dolby Digital Transcoding Manually configure the audio as shown in the following steps: 1. Navigate to the Transcode Service window shown in Figure 3.66, configure the incoming Audio as pass-thru. Figure 3.66 Component Selection 2. Navigate to the Audio Component window shown in Figure Select the Input tab. 4. Select Dolby Digital from the Input Format drop-down menu. 5. Select Embedded 5 (SDI 1) from the Input Source drop-down menu. Figure 3.67 Audio Component > Input 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-73

110 Getting Started 6. Select the Encode tab as shown in Figure Configure the output format of the transcoded audio as required. the example below, HE-AAC is selected from the Coding Standard drop-down menu. Figure 3.68 Audio Component > Encode How to Set Up Phase Aligned Audio About Phase Aligned Audio Phase Aligned Audio (PAA) is a proprietary feature of Ericsson Television Contribution Encoders that uses multiple MPEG-1 Layer II encoders operating at 384 kbps to carry each channel pair in the group of phase aligned audio channels. Phase aligned encoding is supported only if the appropriate number of AVP/SWO/PAA licenses are present (1 for single PAA, and 2 for dual PAA) combined with additional AVP/SWO/M1L2 licenses. The minimum required licensing is shown in Table PAA is available on SDI inputs as long as the upstream embedder provides DIDs on the same video line and in a fixed sequence. It is only guaranteed to be aligned if the audio channel status blocks are aligned at the input of the encoder. PAA is not available on IP inputs. Table 3.12 License Requirements for PAA Encoding Number of additional Licenses required 6 Channel 8 Channel Dual 6 Channel Dual 8 Channel AVP/SWO/M1L AVP/SWO/PAA When configured in MPEG-1 Layer II 6 or 8 Channel Aligned Encoding, each pairing is identified by the use of ISO_639_language descriptors. The languages are encoded using two language codes per component as follows: First instance on Audio Module 1: - aaa, aab for first dual mono - aac, aad for second dual mono - aae, aaf for third dual mono /1553-FGC Uen Y

111 Getting Started - aag, aah for fourth dual mono Second instance on Audio Module 2: - bba, bbb for first dual mono - bbc, bbd for second dual mono - bbe, bbf for third dual mono - bbg, bbh for fourth dual mono When adding PAA to an output Transport Stream service, each audio component that makes up the PAA must be manually added to the service before configuring the components for PAA Configuring Phase Aligned Audio To set up PAA, or dual PAA, audio streams for a service on the Service Configuration page, proceed as follows: Note: This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one must be created before continuing. See section In the Inputs widget, select Audio 1- Audio 3 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 1 - Audio 4 (for 8 channel aligned) by first selecting Audio 1, holding down the Shift key, then clicking on Audio 3 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 4 (for 8 channel aligned). 2. Drag the selected components to a service in the Outputs widget. Figure 3.69 PAA - Adding Audio Components 3. In the Outputs widget, click on the audio component corresponding to Audio 1. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-75

112 Getting Started Note: If you click on Audio Stream 1 in the Inputs widget, the corresponding audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Outputs widget. 4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab, and set the Input Format to Uncompressed LPCM. 5. Set the Input Source to Embedded 1 (SDI 1). Figure 3.70 PAA - Setting Input Sources 6. Click on the Encode tab and set the Coding Standard to MPEG Layer II. Figure 3.71 PAA - Setting Coding Mode The other components of the same group will be automatically configured. 7. If you are setting up dual PAA encoding, repeat steps 1-4 for Audio 9 - Audio 11 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 9 - Audio 12 (for 8 channel aligned). 8. If dual PAA encoding is used, then for the second PAA encoded group set the Input Source to the first embedded pair relevant to the second group. This may be Embedded 4 (SDI) or higher. The remainder of the configuration for the second group is the same as for the first group (steps 5 and 6) /1553-FGC Uen Y

113 Getting Started Generic ANC Ancillary data arriving over an SDI or HD-SDI link may be passed through to the outgoing Transport Stream by including the ancillary data in a generic ANC component. The AVP 4000 allows you to optionally filter the ancillary data using the data packet s Data ID (DID) and Secondary Data ID (SDID). The filter can be set to either: block the specified data and allow all other data to pass through, or alternatively allow the specified data to pass through and block all other data How to Set Up a Generic ANC Component To set up a generic ANC component: 1. Set up the encode service per section Add the ANC component in the same manner as a video stream as described in section Figure 3.72 Adding an ANC Component to a Service 3. Select the ANC component on the Output service. In the Properties widget, select the VBI tab and open the Generic ANC accordion if the accordion is closed. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-77

114 Getting Started Figure 3.73 Select the VBI Tab on the ANC Component Properties Widget 4. Turn Generic ANC Extraction to On. 5. Calculate the maximum anticipated bit rate considering the number of VANC types expected to pass-thru on this component. One type typically takes around 90 kbps. Set this maximum into the Max ANC Bit Rate field How to Filter Data for a Generic ANC Component To filter data for a generic ANC component: 1. Select the ANC component on the Output service. In the Properties widget, select the VBI tab and open the Generic ANC accordion if the accordion is closed. 2. If filtering is not required, select Off for the Generic ANC Filter Control. This will cause all VANC types present on the input to be passed-thru on the ANC component. 3. If the desire is to only allow certain VANC types to pass-thru on the ANC component, and block all other VANC types, select Allow for the Generic ANC Filter Control, and then follow step 5 to select the types that will pass-thru /1553-FGC Uen Y

115 Getting Started 4. If the desire is to block certain VANC types to pass-thru, allowing all other types to pass-thru on the ANC component, select Block for the Generic ANC Filter Control and follow step 5 to select the types that will be blocked. 5. On selecting either Block or Allow, the web interface will display a table of filters. This table may be initially empty and the user is to populate it. a b c To add a VANC type to the filter, press the Add Filter button, and insert the details of the DID, SDID and line number of that type. To remove a VANC type from the filter, click on the line to select it, and press the Remove selected button. To clear the table of all entries, press the Remove all button. The DID and SDID entries in the filter table are always displayed in hexadecimal, indicated by the number being prefixed with 0x unless entering a value, in which case the value is in decimal. Entering a DID or SDID number can be done in decimal or hexadecimal. To enter a decimal number, just enter it using standard numbers. For example, enter 123 and press ENTER on the keyboard. This will immediately be displayed in the hexadecimal equivalent (in this example, this is 0x7B). To enter a hexadecimal number, type 0xAB where AB is the hexadecimal number required. If a range of VANC types with similar identifiers are required to be filtered, or present on a range of lines, a wild-card may be used. The only wild-card supported is the value 0 (zero), chosen because zero is not a valid DID, SDID or line number. Use of the wild-cards gives rise to the characteristics in Table Table 3.13 VANC Filtering Wild-cards DID SDID Line Filter Applies To 0 0 Non-zero Any DID and SDID on a specified line. 0 Non-zero Non-zero Any DID with a specified SDID on a specified line. Non-zero 0 Non-zero A specific DID with any SDID, on a specified line. Non-zero Non-zero Non-zero An exact match on DID, SDID and line The filter will either block or allow all types, as set by the filter control setting. 0 Non-zero 0 A specified SDID for all DIDs on any line. Non-zero 0 0 A specific DID with any SDID, on any line. Non-zero Non-zero 0 A specific DID and SDID on any line. By way of example, the entry in the table shown in Figure 3.74 VANC Filter Entry Using Wild-cards, will filter all VANC types with DID 0x61 regardless of the SDID number and regardless of which line contains that VANC type. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-79

116 Getting Started Figure 3.74 VANC Filter Entry Using Wild-cards 3.8 How to Configure the AVP Using the Front Panel The unit is fully configurable via the front panel. The most important parameters are available under the dedicated menu items, while the full functionality of an option card can be found under the Advanced menu. For the details of the interaction with the front panel and the menu system, see Operation and Control. The configuration consists setting the general parameters of the base unit and the option cards. Then, the output streams can be configured through the Output menu How to Configure Video Parameters To configure the video parameters, select the AVP Encoder menu and set the parameters as listed in Table Table 3.14 Video Parameter Settings Parameter Video Input Locked Video Bit rate Video Profile Buffer Mode Source Setting True, False. Read only parameter Mbps. (Limit depends on video profile.) SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit SD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile Main level 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High level 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit (The availability of a profile depends on the option card and the presence of an appropriate license.) CBR, Seamless, Fast Channel Zap, Capped VBR. SDI, Daughter Card 1, Color Bars, Black, Moving Object, Slate. The input source, which can be an external video signal through the SDI connector, a Transport Stream to be decoded by the decoder Daughter Card or an internally generated test pattern. 1 Only available for EI9001T licensed with the AVP/SWO/TRANS /1553-FGC Uen Y

117 Getting Started How to Configure Audio Parameters Audio Input Parameters Table 3.15 Audio Input Settings To configure the audio input parameters, select the AVP Encoder /Audio Module/Audio Encode 1/Input menu and set the parameters as listed in Table Parameter Input Format Settings Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby E Input Source Off, Mute, Test Tone (-18 dbfs), Test Tone (-20 dbfs), Embedded 1-8. Output on Audio Loss No PID, Silence Audio Encode Parameters To configure the audio encode parameters, select the AVP Encoder /Audio Module/Audio Encode 1/Encode menu and set the parameters as listed in Table Table 3.16 Audio Encode Settings Parameter Coding Standard Bit rate Coding Mode Settings MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, AAC (Options depend on licenses) Range depends upon selected coding standard Available options depend on selected coding standard The parameters of the encoding can be configured in a sub menu whose name depends on the Coding Standard chosen. Set up the encoding as needed. Note: The number of audios available for configuration will depend upon the number of licenses How to Set Up a Transport Stream A Transport Stream is made up from one or more services. A service is made up from one or more components. To build a Transport Stream, proceed as follows: 1. Select the Output menu. 2. Select the output to which the Transport Stream is to be sent. 3. Select Transport Stream ID: Check that the parameter settings are correct. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-81

118 Getting Started Table 3.17 Transport Stream Parameters Parameter Service List Current State Change State Transport Stream Bit rate Reserved Bit rate Bit rate Tracking Mode Auto Enable Auto Disable Syntax Description Select to manage services in the Transport Stream. (Next step.) Read Only displays current output state (online, offline) Online, Offline. Controls the actual presence of the Transport Stream in the output Mbps. The amount of bit rate in the Transport Stream that cannot be allocated to any of the transmitted components. Off, Maximize Video. false, true. Specifies whether or not to automatically re-enable the Transport Stream (set its Setmode state to Online) when the condition set in the Auto Disable field is not met. Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Audio or Video lost, Any UPSTREAM critical alarm, Any critical alarm. Specifies the condition on which the Transport Stream has to be disabled. Audio lost and video lost means that the audio or video lock of any of the components in the Transport Stream is lost, UPSTREAM critical alarm is an alarm that is triggered by any of the components that contribute to producing the elementary streams carried by the Transport Stream. DVB, ATSC Program Specific Information Transport Stream ID A new ID can be assigned to the Transport Stream. PAT-PMT On, Off PAT-PMT Parameters PMT Repetition Period 100 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms. Specifies how often (in ms) the PMT is transmitted. Dolby Digital Descriptor DVB, ATSC, DVB & ATSC CAT TSDT On, Off On, Off Service Information Original Network ID NIT On, Off NIT Parameters Network Name Set Network Name Network ID Generate LCN Send extended NIT (SIRG) Insert NIT into PAT Set network ID Off, IEC 62216, NorDig v1, DTG Default On, Off. If PSI/SI Level is set to On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT) make sure the Send extended NIT (SIRG) is On so that the Carrier ID is sent. True, False SDT On, Off 5. For an IP Transport Stream set up the IP related parameters as shown in Table /1553-FGC Uen Y

119 Getting Started Table 3.18 IP Related Parameters Parameter TS Packets per IP Packet IP Encapsulation Description Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate in one IP packet. Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP and RTP is self explanatory and means that the Transport Stream is first encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an IP header is added. If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns and Row is selected one (Column) or two (Column and Row) RTP streams are output in addition to the RTP streams that carry the Transport Stream. IP Configuration/Destination 1 Destination IP Address Destination UDP Port Source IP Address Source MAC Address Source UDP Port The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream. The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream. The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream. Read only parameter, not yet supported. The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream 6. Select the Service List menu in order to add one or more services to the Transport Stream. 7. Select Add Service. A new service by the name Service Name appears in the list. 8. Select Service Name. 9. Check that the parameter settings are correct. Table 3.19 Component and Service Parameters Parameter Component List Service ID PMT PID PCR PID Description Select to manage components in the service. (Next step.) Set Service ID A new PMT PID can be assigned to the service. The PID to be used for the PCR. If PCR on separate PID is enabled, this value must match the PID given to the PCR component in the output service. SDT Parameters Service Provider Set service provider name. Service Name Service ID Service Type Set service name. After setting the service name the service will be listed accordingly. A new ID can be assigned to the service. Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast. 10. Select the Component List menu in order to add one or more components to the service. 11. Select Add Component. A new component identified by its PID appears in the list. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-83

120 Getting Started 12. Select the component just added. 13. Select Elementary Stream and assign an input to be handled as the component. 14. Adjust PID or Bit rate weighting if necessary. 15. Move up to the Component List menu and repeat steps 9-12 to add more components to the service. 16. Move up to the Service List menu and repeat steps 5-13 to add more services to the Transport Stream. 17. After the Transport Stream has been created, move up to the Transport Stream ID: 1 menu. Select the Change State option and set it to Online How to Add More Transport Streams To add more Transport Streams to other outputs, follow the procedure detailed in section How to Set Up a Transport Stream by first selecting the Outputs menu, then repeating the Transport Stream creation process. Alternatively, an existing Transport Stream can be copied to another (or in case of IP output to the same) output by proceeding as follows: 1. Select Outputs. 2. Navigate to the output to which a Transport Stream is to be added. 3. Select Add Existing Transport Stream. 4. Select the Transport Stream you want to copy. 5. The selected Transport Stream will be copied to the output. 6. Select the newly copied Transport Stream. 7. Select Change State and set it to Online. 3.9 How to Configure Video for EI9001 and EI9001T AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters Table 3.20 AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters Parameter Optimum PSNR Setting Optimum Visual Setting Adaptive Pre-Processing Filter OFF ON The APF is especially useful in low bit rate MPEG-2 encoding to prevent excessive blocking, due to the lack of an in-loop deblocking filter within the standard, unlike in H.264. However, the APF may also benefit H.264 encoding at low bit rates /1553-FGC Uen Y

121 Getting Started Parameter Optimum PSNR Setting Optimum Visual Setting MCTRF OFF Default This filter is designed to be able to remove random input noise (such as thermal camera noise) without blurring motion that may be present in the source video. Horizontal Bandwidth 100% (Pass-thru) 90%. Half-line Removal (PAL) OFF ON Profile Always use High Profile for H.264 H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 (SD) H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 (HD) Resolution Full i.e. 1080i:1920x p: 1280x720 PAL: 720x576 NTSC: 720x480 Full, although in very low bit rate scenarios you can set a lower horizontal resolution to avoid excessive blocking at the expense of increased softness. Typically dictated by customer requirements AVP 4000 Video Encoder Parameters Table 3.21 AVP 4000 Video Encoder Parameters Parameter Optimum PSNR Setting Optimum Visual Setting Buffer Mode CBR mode Same GOP Length Around one second: 24 in 480i25 and 1080i25 30 (MPEG-2) or 32 (H.264) in 1080i in 720p50 60 (MPEG-2) or 64 (H.264) in 720p59.94 GOP Structure MPEG-2: IBBP H i: IBBBP H p: IBBBBBBBP Same Closed GOPs OFF Same Scene Cut Detection ON Same In-loop Filter Normal Normal, but could use Low or Auto to increase the sharpness at the expense of possible more blocking 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-85

122 Getting Started AVP 4000 Seamless and Reflex Operation The recommended settings for Seamless and Reflex operation are below: Table 3.22 AVP 4000 Seamless and Reflex Operation SD/HD Min Bit Rate (Kbps) Delay (sec) Calculated Buffer Size (Kbit) Max Buffer Size (Mbit) Minimum Allowed Bit Rate (kbps) MPEG 2 SD HD H.264 SD HD or Use this default if in ATSC and the Reflex group includes MPEG 2 HD MPEG 2 SD HD H.264 SD HD or How to Configure Video for CE-HEVC Buffer Mode The buffer modes offered are: CBR Constant Bit Rate operation is the recommended mode of operation for all profiles and bit rates. Low Delay removes pre-processing functions to reduce the encode delay but at a lower quality. Bit Rate, GOP Structure and GOP length selections will affect the delay. Mega Low Delay removes frame sync in pre-processing to reduce encode delay further but at reduced quality. Bit Rate, GOP Structure and GOP length selections will affect the delay. Super Low Delay (HEVC only) offers the lowest delay possible. Bit rate selection may affect the delay. In this mode, the only GOP structures possible are All P and I Frame only. Not available with H.264. GOP Structure For best picture quality the following GOP structures are recommended: /1553-FGC Uen Y

123 Getting Started In SD and HD 1080i H.264 and HEVC operation the GOP structure should be set to IBBBP. In HD 720p H.264 and HEVC use IBBBBBBP. To achieve low encoding delay, the Low Delay Buffer mode should be used. In this case, the recommended GOP structure is still IBBBP. To achieve even smaller delays, a smaller number of B pictures can be used. The IBP GOP structure is the best compromise between latency and picture quality and the IP GOP structure gives the lowest possible delay, but may impact on video quality. Table 3.23 GOP Length Video Quality GOP Length 1080i Hz p Hz i 25 Hz p 50 Hz 52 To achieve the lowest possible encoding delay Super Low Delay mode should be used. In this mode, the GOP Structure options will change from the typical offerings of: IBBBP etc to: All P and I Frame only. Profile High@Level 4.0 is recommended for 4:2:0 mode and bit rates below 20 Mbps. High@Level 4.1 will achieve the same performance, but allows higher bit rates up to 62.5 Mbps. Hi422-10bit@Level 4.1 is recommended for better quality performance and allows bit rates up to 80 Mbps. Bit Rates The maximum bit rate possible varies with the profile and level. However, if two or more channels are in use, the maximum video bit rate for each channel is 30 Mbps. CE-HEVC Card Teletext / Ancillary Data Rates For single channel usage, the maximum data rate that can be supported is 500 kbps for the combined Teletext and ancillary data, across all channels. This can be subdivided in any way between the channels so long as the total bit rate does not exceed 500 kbps. HEVC HDTV 4:2:0 Recommendation For HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, the typical bit rate is around 12 Mbps. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-87

124 Getting Started HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit is supported by professional STBs and allows higher bit rates to be used. Typically this profile is used for bit rates above 25 Mbps. HEVC UHDTV 4:2:0 Recommendation For UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, the typical bit rate is around 30 Mbps. HEVC HDTV and UHDTV 4:2:2 Recommendation On video with strong color content on 4:2:2 HEVC HDTV, the bit rate should be set at 9 Mbps or higher for HDTV and 20 Mbps for UHDTV. At a bit rate below 9 Mbps for HDTV and 20 Mbps for UHDTV, the video quality is likely to be better in the 4:2:0 format. Video content with less color, e.g. film material, the bit rate can also be used at a lower bit rate in 4:2:2 format. HEVC HDTV and UHDTV 10-bit Recommendation The 10 bit format can be used at the same bit rate as in 8 bit even at low bit rates. There is no cross-over in video quality between 8 bit and 10 bit. Even at low bit rates, the 10 bit format can remove contour artifacts on flat areas or on fade changes. Horizontal Bandwidth Always set to 100% for Contribution and Distribution applications Inloop Filter The default (recommended) setting is Normal. Setting the Inloop Filter to Low can be used to improve sharpness (e.g., in grass in sports sequences) at the expense of increased blocking artifacts. Auto mode is designed to be adaptive and alter the filter strength on a per-picture basis, and will generally lower the filter strength on sports content to improve the sharpness in grass, albeit at the expense of increased blocking artefacts on the crowd and players perhaps, but will revert back to normal or higher filter strength on other content How to Configure and Use Video Input Detection Overview The CE VCM s are capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available at the SDI/HD-SDI input. The VCM can be set up to report whenever it detects a format change in the input video stream, or it can even modify encoding parameters to suit /1553-FGC Uen Y

125 Getting Started Note: Changes to the source that result in a change of configuration will result in a loss of video for a short time. This outage time varies depending on the configuration change. Input Detection Configuration Once a video component has been added to an output Transport Stream on the Service Configuration page, input detection options can be set up on the Input and Encode tabs for the respective video in the Properties widget. Input Options Table 3.24 Input Options Parameters Parameters Values Description Input Detection Detected Video Standard Select Configs to be loaded on input video detection SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97, 3G 1080p50, 3G 1080p59.94 Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97 No Action Config n Specifies what to do when the input video format has been changed. The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only parameter. Only available when Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config is selected. For each input format a drop down box will display all available stored configs Encode Options Table 3.25 Encode Options Parameters Parameters Values Description Profile for SD Profile for HD Profile for 3G Profile Off, Available profiles depend on card type and licenses Profile Off, Available profiles depend on card type and licenses Profile Off Available profiles depend on card type and licenses The profile to set when a change to an SD format has been detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure. The profile to set when a change to an HD format has been detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure The profile to set when a change to an 3G format has been detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-89

126 Getting Started Input Detection is Set to Off If Input Detection is turned off, the input video format is not monitored by the VCM. No action is taken when there is a change in the format of the incoming native video through the SDI/HD-SDI input, other than that specified by the output on video loss parameter. Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Report If Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Report, a video lock alarm is raised if the video lock is lost on the SDI/HD-SDI input and the output on video loss setting will apply. If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is reported as the detected video standard, otherwise the detected standard will be displayed. Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Configure Video Profile Only If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is reported as the detected video standard, a video lock alarm is raised and the output on video loss setting will apply. If the VCM can lock to the new input, a change in the input format the detected standard will be displayed and a change in the Video Input Format parameter will be triggered. Then the Video Profile will be changed as set in the Profile for {SD, HD or 3G} field if there is a change between SD, HD or 3G. Notes: When the format changes between SD and HD the video bit rate may be changed if the current bit rate is outside the range supported by the new profile. When the format changes between SD and HD any VBI or VANC configuration will not be maintained. Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config Pre-requisites The user must fully configure the unit as required for each expected source and save each as a separate stored configuration on the unit. If the user does not intend to support all of the possible source options, then an associated configuration is not required. The suggested operational workflow is described by the diagram below /1553-FGC Uen Y

127 Getting Started Identify which input formats need operational requirements Repeat for all required input formats FULLY Configure unit for required input format operation (eg SD 25Hz) with Auto Detect set to OFF Save as a Stored Configuration and name appropriately. Note that when no stored configs are available no options will be presented for selection when trying to configure Auto Detect and Configure use stored config, so no point setting it yet! N All required configs stored Y Repeat for each stored config Load stored config n onto unit. Enable Auto Detect and Configure use stored configs and select the required config to be used sof each required source. Save the modified configuration in the same stored config location. Once all required stored configs are available Auto Detect and Configure use stored config can be configured as required. It is not absolutely necessary to do this for every configuration, but would ensure that the unit would continue to operate in the same way if any of the stored configs were manually loaded onto the unit. N All required configs modified and stored? Unit is ready to use any of the stored configurations can be loaded at any time and the auto detect and configure operation will continue to function. Figure 3.75 Set-up Procedure for Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config Y 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-91

128 Getting Started Figure 3.76 Input Detection Configuration Operation If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is reported as the detected video standard, a video lock alarm is raised and the output on video loss setting will apply. If the VCM can lock to the new input, a change in the input format the detected standard will be displayed and the selected configuration file for the detected format is applied. Note: ONLY the video, audio, VANC and VBI configuration parameters from the stored configuration for the associated options card are applied in this case. All other cards and base unit parameters remain unaffected. If the video is embedded in a Transport Stream for which Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize Video, and the Bit Rate Weighting for the video component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, then the Video Bit Rate might also get updated. For more information, see Operation and Control > Bit Rate Tracking. Some examples are also given below: Source changed from HD to SD, and Profile for SD input is set to SD MPEG-2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit: The new encoding profile is SD MPEG-2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit. The bit rate is limited to 15 Mbps (maximum allowed by profile) if it was higher than 15 Mbps before the change. Otherwise the bit rate is not affected /1553-FGC Uen Y

129 Getting Started Source changed from SD to HD, and Profile for HD input is set to HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit: The new encoding profile is HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit. If there is a room to increase the video bit rate to a value higher than the maximum set for the previously used SD profile, then the bit rate is increased How to Set Up 4K Video Encoding About UHD Video The CE-HEVC encoder is capable of encoding a 3840x2160 UHD picture as defined in SMPTE The 4K image is delivered into the encoder via either 4-off 3G BNC connectors or 4-off LC optical connectors depending on the input option ordered at the time of manufacture. There are 2 recognized formats of how to carry the 4K picture over the 4-off 3G connections, quadrant or interleaved. The CE-HEVC encoder supports both input formats. The CE-HEVC option module supports Level A direct image mapping. Mapping an uncompressed video image into a serial digital interface operating at a nominal rate of 3 Gbps. Quadrant The 4K picture is broken into for HD quadrants and carried on 4 synchronized SDI signals as show below. Figure K Video - HD Quadrants 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-93

130 Getting Started Interleaved The 4K picture is broken up into sub pictures by dividing the original picture using the two sample interleaved division as shown below. See SMPTE and for more information. Figure K Video - Interleaved Configuration To set up 4K video encoding for a service on the Service Configuration page, proceed as follows: Note: This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one must be created before continuing. See section In the Inputs widget, select Video 1 Main Video Stream. 2. Drag the selected component to a service in the Outputs widget. 3. In the Outputs widget, click on the video component. Note: If you click on Audio Stream 1 in the Inputs widget, the corresponding audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Outputs widget. 4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab. 5. Set the Source to SDI. 6. Set the Video Input Format to one of the following depending on the input format described above and the video frame rate: a b UHD 2160p50 Interleaved. UHD 2160p59.94 Interleaved /1553-FGC Uen Y

131 Getting Started c d Note: UHD 2160p50 Quad. UHD 2160p59.94 Quad. It is possible to set Input Detection to Auto Detect and Configure if using the Interleaved format. 7. Click on the Encode tab. 8. Set the Profile to UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit. Note: For 4:2:2 video encoding a license must be purchased and the Profile set to UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit. 9. Set the Buffer Mode to either CBR, Low Delay or Mega Low Delay depending on the picture quality and end to end delay required. See section 3.10 for more details. 10. Set the Video Bitrate to the required value depending on the bandwidth available and picture quality required. See section 3.10 for more details and recommendations How to Return to Default Settings from the GUI All settings are retained through a power cycle. If the unit seems to be behaving strangely or you just want to erase all settings then the default settings can be restored. To restore the default settings navigate to Support > General > Clear Device Configuration and select the Reset Configuration button. The configuration will be reset and the device will reboot Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Splicing is used to insert a Digital Programme (e.g. advertisements) into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream. DPI is available when the DPI license is purchased. One license is required for each video component. The AVP 4000 supports DPI from splice point insertion controlled from: SCTE104 messages in VANC. SCTE104 messages from the control IP input. SCTE35 messages from the TS input when using transcode operation on the EI9001T card Splice Point Operation The VCM is capable of storing up to 10 splice events, which can be inserted up to 13 hours before the event is due. If splicing is disabled all stored pending splice events will be deleted. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-95

132 Getting Started Splice point insertion can be controlled from SCTE104 messages, either in VANC or from the control IP input. Table 3.26 Data Example Multiple Operation SCTE104 Message Structure Comment 0xFF, 0xFF reserved 0x00, 0x27 message size = 39 bytes 0x00 0xAA 0xBB SCTE-104 protocol version AS index message number 0x01, 0x01 DPI PID index (slot 1, channel 1)1 0x00 0x00 0x02 SCTE-35 protocol version timestamp type = zero (no timestamp) number operations...(2) 0x01, 0x01 op ID = splice request data 0x00, 0x0E data length = 14 bytes 0x01 splice insert type - splice start normal 0x12, 0x34, 0x56, 0x78 splice event ID 0x66, 0x99 unique program ID 0x0F, 0xA0 pre-roll time = 4000ms 0x00, 0x64 break duration = 10s 0x01 0x01 0x01 avail num avails expected auto return flag 0x01, 0x0A op ID = insert avail descriptor request data 0x00, 0x05 data length = 5 bytes 0x01 number of avails = 1 0xA1, 0xB2, 0xC3, 0xD4 avail ID = 0xA1B2C3D4 1 The DPI_PID_index value contained within the SCTE-104 message is not a PID. It provides a way of addressing a particular VCM within a multi-module unit to ensure that the SCTE104 messages are received by the specific encoder. It is a 2 byte value. Table 3.27 Bit DPI PID Index Value Description The option card slot number (1 to 6) 7..0 The encoder channel on the option card Note: All option cards referenced in this manual support only 1 channel of video. If the channel is set to 0 or 1 the encoder will have splice points inserted. If the option card slot number or the encoder channel does not exist the Video Processor will return a splice failure message /1553-FGC Uen Y

133 Getting Started It is not possible to insert splice points into the video which are closer than 1 second apart. Any messages received with a splice time within 1 second of another splice point and, which have the same splice_event_id, will be treated as a duplicate of the initial splice request and deleted. Any messages received with a splice time within 1 second of another splice point and, which have a different splice_event_id, will be aligned to the initial splice request. This will result in 2 SCTE35 messages being generated containing the same PTS value but with different splice_event_ids, and 1 splice point inserted into the video, unless the auto return is set to 1 and the duration is populated, in which case the video PID will be conditioned for two splice points SCTE104 over IP The DPI TCP Port on the unit is 5167 by default. This parameter can be accessed on the GUI through Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit How to Configure Splicing To configure splicing: 1. If you have not already done so, create a Transport Stream and a service as described in Chapter 5, Web GUI Control. 2. Go to the Inputs widget of the Service Configuration page and select the Video SCTE 35 Stream from the VCM inputs tree and drag it into the required output service. 3. Select the required source from the Splicing Control drop down box in the Properties widget. Table 3.28 Option Off Splicing Control Options Description No splice operation On VANC message only On VANC On IP SCTE104 messages in VANC will be passed through as SCTE35 messages that can then be added as a component in the output transport stream. No splice points will be inserted in the video bitstream. SCTE104 messages in VANC will trigger the insertion of splice points SCTE104 messages in IP will trigger the insertion of splice points 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-97

134 Getting Started 3.15 How to Control Temperature/Fan Speed Temperatures are reported to the user in degrees Celsius ( C) and degrees Fahrenheit ( F). Host Card Monitoring The die temperature of the main components on the Host card are monitored, and reported to an accuracy of ±2 C. A host card temperature alarm threshold can be set that, if exceeded, causes a System Over Temperature Alarm to be generated. Note: It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted. Option Card Monitoring Option cards monitor the die temperature of their main components, and report these temperatures to an accuracy of ±2 C. If an option card reports die temperatures, it allows an alarm threshold to be defined for each temperature, which if exceeded causes an alarm to be generated. Note: It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted. VCMs The controlling processor monitors the core temperatures of the main components and passes this information back to the host card via the back plane for monitoring. Temperature thresholds can be set to cause a warning or an alarm. The warning level is configurable by the user, whereas the alarm level is hard coded. Note: It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted. Fans The fans fitted to the chassis are speed controllable, providing a limited range of operating conditions. To control temperature/fan speed: 1. Go to the Device Control > Advanced Setup > Base Unit page of the Web GUI. 2. Using the slide bar control, set to Lowest Noise, Quiet, Cool or Best Cooling, as required /1553-FGC Uen Y

135 Getting Started Figure 3.79 Fan Control The internal temperature of the unit will vary according to the fan speed, but the unit will attempt to maintain the unit within safe operating limits. If it cannot do this and the temperature increases above the set alarm thresholds, over temperature warnings or alarms will be raised and appropriate action is needed How to Get and Apply Additional Licenses The unit comes with the option cards and licenses, which were ordered, already installed. All licenses are stored on the host card Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit Access to the web pages is necessary to verify the licenses that are enabled on the unit. Navigate to Support > Licenses. This page displays a tab for each card that contains licenses. Each tab contains the marketing code, number of each license and a description of the feature enabled by the license. Note: Short term licenses are not supported. The number of licenses can be extended and new licenses ordered after the unit has been shipped. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-99

136 Getting Started To get and upload additional licenses, proceed as follows Video Licenses All licenses for the EI9001 and EI9001T option cards are stored on the host card (on the chassis). Therefore, if the same chassis is used and the EI9001/T cards replaced, the licenses are still applicable. The video licenses AVP/SWO/MP2 and AVP/SWO/MP4 are required to be able to configure the profile parameter of the video encoder. Under certain user configurations, the error message shown in Figure 3.80 may be displayed. Figure 3.80 Video License Error Message This message indicates that at least one of the encoder cards is configured (either by default settings or manual configuration) to try to obtain a license that is not available. This can be due to the following: No MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 AVC licenses are loaded on the unit (have not been purchased). All available licenses for that mode have already been allocated to other encoder cards fitted in the chassis. To resolve these issues the required quantity of AVP/SWO/MP2 or AVP/SWO/MP4 licenses needs to be available to match the number of cards fitted in the chassis. This message can be acknowledged and the encoder card should be re-configured to a different coding mode (if a license is available). If no further AVP/SWO/MP2 or AVP/SWO/MP4 licenses are available they should be purchased as necessary Ordering Additional Licenses When ordering additional licenses for existing units the following information is needed: Unique Chip ID of the unit to enable licenses stored on the base chassis. To retrieve the Chip ID, go to Support > Versions and in the Modules widget of the General tab click on the Host tab /1553-FGC Uen Y

137 Getting Started Figure 3.81 Finding the Host Card Chip ID for License Generation. The TOTAL FINAL number of licenses required (including licenses already enabled on the unit) needs to be provided. Based on the above information, a license key file will be generated and provided to the customer Entering License Keys The keys are saved in an XML (e.g. newlicensedetail.xml) ready to be entered onto the unit via the web page. 1. Open Support > Licenses. Click the Browse button to locate the license key file. 2. Click on the Upload button. 3. If licenses are required for both the base chassis and VCM option card then multiple files will be provided which all need to be loaded onto the specific unit. 4. Reboot the unit for the changes to take effect. Note: The front panel CANNOT be used to upload license keys Alarm Monitoring Alarms are reported on the GUI and Front Panel LED indicators. Alarm trap handling is also supported through SNMP. The severity of an alarm can be changed or the alarm can be masked if required. This can be performed on active alarms on the GUI dashboard or on any alarms by browsing to the Support > Device Management page. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-101

138 Getting Started Figure 3.82 Alarm Monitoring 3.18 Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite and is defined in a set of standards (RFC RFC 1067, RFC RFC 1157, RFC 1213, RFC RFC 1452, RFC RFC 1910, RFC 2576, RFC RFC 3418) published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Supported Protocols SNMP versions 1, 2c are supported, primarily for alarm trap handling. The General Ericsson Television MIB is also supported. Note: The unit does not support control via SNMP, all remote control is via HTTP Operation SNMP traps are a way of reporting status information to a control system. The unit s SNMP functionality can be enabled or disabled, with up to five IP addresses assigned for any SNMP Trap message to be sent. The default is , which causes the SNMP traps to be sent to the last SNMP master. The SNMP community name can also be set. The user can control which SNMP traps are generated. The options are: All traps traps sent for all failure alarms, warnings and start messages. Start Msgs, warning critical traps sent for start messages or alarms raised of severity warning to critical. Start Msgs, minor critical traps sent for start messages or alarms raised of severity minor to critical /1553-FGC Uen Y

139 Getting Started Start Msgs, major critical traps sent for start messages or alarms raised of severity major to critical. Start Msgs, critical traps sent for start messages or critical alarms. Start Msgs only traps sent for start messages only. Table 3.29 Parameter SNMP Interface Parameters Description SNMP Read Community SNMP Location SNMP Contact SNMP Trap Community SNMP Trap Destination SNMP Trap Alarm Level The SNMP community name for read access. default = public Textual description of the location of the unit Name of the person responsible for this unit The SNMP community name for read access. default = private The destination IP address for SNMP trap messages. Up to five destinations can be defined, but by default none are assigned Defines what events trigger the generation of an SNMP trap message. The options are: Start Messages Only, i.e. only system start up events. Fail and Start Messages only i.e. start-up events and critical alarms. All traps i.e. start-up events and all alarms and warnings. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 3-103

140 Getting Started BLANK /1553-FGC Uen Y

141 4 Front Panel Control Chapter 4 Contents 4.1 Introduction Using the Front Panel Controls Light Bar Power Switch Mini USB Web Access and Update from Computer through the Mini USB Configuration Handling through USB Loading a Configuration from USB Saving a Configuration to USB Importing Configurations from USB Exporting Configurations to USB Rotary Knob Keypad Confidence Monitor On Key Keyboard Lock Front Panel Display Appearance and General Features Front Panel Menus Main Menu Manage Configuration Menu A/V Encoder Menu Output Menu Alarms Menu Shortcuts Menu Unit Config Menu Advanced Menu EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Module Advanced Menu External Sync Input Option Card ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu List of Figures Figure 4.1 Advanced Video Processor Front Panel Figure 4.2 Front Panel Mini USB Figure 4.3 Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up /1553-FGC Uen Y 4-1

142 Front Panel Control Figure 4.4 Audio Input Monitor Screen Figure 4.5 Main Menu Navigational Overview List of Tables Table 4.1 Ethernet Interface Settings Table 4.2 Keypad Description Table 4.3 Main Menu Options Table 4.4 Manage Configuration Menu Table 4.5 A/V Encoder Menu Table 4.6 Output Menu Table 4.7 Unit Config Menu Table 4.8 Advanced Menu Table 4.9 EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Module Advanced Menu Table 4.10 ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu /1553-FGC Uen Y

143 Front Panel Control 4.1 Introduction This chapter describes the features and options provided by the Front Panel menus for controlling the Advance Video Processor Series. Note: After powering up (see Chapter 3, Getting started), wait for initialization to complete (approximately 1.5 to 3 minutes, depending on the number of options fitted in the chassis) before attempting to use the front panel menus and controls. 4.2 Using the Front Panel Controls The user interface for the Front Panel consists of an ON/OFF power switch, light bar, mini USB, rotary knob alphanumeric keypad, pushbuttons, main display and confidence monitor that are used to set-up, control and monitor the unit. The unit can be controlled through the front panel by the rotary knob and the keypad. In a given state only the illuminated keys are functional. Power Switch Keypad Confidence Monitor Light Bar Mini USB Rotary Knob Main Display Figure 4.1 Advanced Video Processor Front Panel Light Bar The light bar indicates the alarm state of the unit Power Switch The power switch is used for turning the unit On or Off. The switch is recessed to prevent the unit from being accidentally switched off Mini USB The mini USB connector provides an interface for remote web access and update from a computer, and for saving or exporting configurations to, and loading or importing configurations from a USB stick. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-3

144 Front Panel Control Figure 4.2 Front Panel Mini USB Web Access and Update from Computer through the Mini USB The Mini USB port on the front panel of the unit can be used as a virtual IP connector through an USB-to-Ethernet adaptor. A computer connected through an USB-to-Ethernet adaptor to the front panel USB connector can provide the same functions as a computer connected to the control Ethernet interface of the unit. In this way the USB port can be used for unit upgrade and control. To access the unit from a computer through the USB connector, proceed as follows: 1. Connect an USB-to-Ethernet adaptor to the front panel USB connector with a USB cable. 2. Connect one of the Ethernet ports of the control computer to the Ethernet port on the USB-to-Ethernet adaptor through an UTP cable. 3. Set up the Ethernet interface of the control computer connected to the USB-to- Ethernet adaptor as detailed in Table 4.1. Table 4.1 Ethernet Interface Settings Parameter Setting IP Address [2-255] Gateway Address Subnet Mask Note: The USB interface uses the IP address , so this address cannot be assigned to the control computer Configuration Handling through USB Configurations can be loaded or imported from, and saved or exported to a USB stick connected to the front panel USB connector. Note: The USB stick must be pre-formatted to FAT32 file system prior to use. The Unit Config/USB Control/Format USB Stick command on the front panel does not actually format the attached USB stick; it only clears its content and recreates the directory structure required by the unit /1553-FGC Uen Y

145 Front Panel Control Loading a Configuration from USB To load a configuration from the connected USB stick, select Manage Configuration/Load Configuration from USB. Note: The selected configuration is applied but not stored on the unit Saving a Configuration to USB To save the current configuration of the unit to the connected USB stick, select Manage Configuration/Save Configuration to USB. Note: Entries already containing a stored configuration cannot be overwritten. Choose an entry with <empty slot> label to save the configuration Importing Configurations from USB To import all the configurations stored on the USB stick, select Manage Configuration/Import Configuration/Import All Configurations. To choose some configurations on the USB stick to import, select Manage Configuration/Import Configuration/Select Configuration to Import. The selected items are marked with '>', and can be imported by selecting the Import Selected Configurations command. Configurations can also be imported one by one by selecting Manage Configuration/Import Configuration/USB Config <n> Exporting Configurations to USB To export all of the configurations stored on the unit, select Manage Configuration/Export Configuration/Export All Configurations. To choose some configurations on the unit to export, select Manage Configuration/Export Configuration/Select Configuration to Export. The selected items are marked with '>', and can be imported by selecting Export Selected Configurations. Configurations can also be imported one by one by selecting Manage Configuration/Export Configuration/Device Config <n> Rotary Knob The rotary knob is used for scrolling in the menu system, moving the cursor or stepping attribute values. The knob also serves as a push button and performs the same function as the Select key. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-5

146 Front Panel Control Keypad The main keys provided on the keypad are detailed in Table 4.2 Table 4.2 Keypad Description Key Select Cancel Ins Del Alphanumeric Keys Description Used for selecting a menu item or accepting attribute value input. Used for exiting a menu or cancelling attribute value input. Used for creating a link in a menu or inserting a character during text input. Used for deleting an item in a list or deleting a character during parameter input. Used for entering numerical or textual values. Different characters are invoked by multiple presses within a short interval Confidence Monitor On Key The On key on the confidence monitor turns the monitor on or off. By pressing and holding the On key operation related data is shown. The first line displays the total number of hours the monitor has operated, the second line displays the software version. For details on how to configure the settings for the confidence monitor see Chapter 3, Getting Started Keyboard Lock The controls are locked after a time of inactivity. In order to set the key lock time, navigate to Unit Config/Display Setup/Menu Display And Keypad. The keys can be unlocked by pressing the Ins, then the Select keys in this sequence as instructed on the front panel. 4.3 Front Panel Display The parameters of the main display can be configured through the Unit Config/Display Setup menu of the front panel Appearance and General Features The parameters of the main displays for all models of the AVP are similar in content and can be configured through the Unit Config/Display Setup menu of the front panel. When the power-up sequence is complete, a main screen is displayed showing the following features, see Figure /1553-FGC Uen Y

147 Front Panel Control Title Bar Active Area Figure 4.3 Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up Alternately displays the current location within the menu tree and the recently loaded configuration. If the loaded configuration was changed in any way, the '(changed)' string is appended to the name. The active area is used for: Audio Monitor Displaying the IP address and status information about the active streams Displaying the menu system Displaying parameter setting A selected audio input can be monitored. To select an audio input for constant monitoring, navigate to Unit Config/Display Setup/Audio Monitor Input and set the slot and channel parameters Audio Input Monitor On the Audio Input Monitor Screen, see Figure 4.4, all the encoded channels from an option card can be displayed. Figure 4.4 Audio Input Monitor Screen The entire audio input range for an encoder card can be monitored by selecting the AV Encoder/Audio Monitor menu. The rotary knob can be used to switch between Channels 1-8 and Channels 9-16 on each card. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-7

148 Front Panel Control 4.4 Front Panel Menus Main Menu Shortly after power-up the title bar of this screen displays the current location within the menu tree and the recently loaded configuration. The main area of the screen may also display either the current IP Address or Service Name, if one has been set. Figure 4.5 Main Menu Navigational Overview The front panel provides a menu structure which is extended by the installed option cards. Menu navigation is achieved by the front panel controls. The menu is organized in such a way that frequently used items are easily accessible, while all the functionality is still made available through the front panel. The menu items are described in Table 4.3. Table 4.3 Menu Item Main Menu Options Description Manage Configuration Bit Rate Tracking A/V Encoder Output Alarms Shortcuts Saving, loading, exporting, importing configurations Transport Stream Bit Rate settings Audio/Video encoding settings, VCM specific Building a Transport Stream on a specific output Viewing alarms and setting alarm masks User-defined links to menu items 4-8 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

149 Front Panel Control Menu Item Unit Config Advanced Description Device settings Access to full functionality of the AVP and the installed option cards Sub Menus are listed in the following tables Manage Configuration Menu The Manage Configuration Menu is used for saving, loading, exporting and importing configurations. The menu structure is shown in Table 4.4. Table 4.4 Manage Configuration Menu Manage Configuration Load Configuration Delete All Configurations from device Config <n>: <config name> Deletes all the configurations previously saved on the unit. Selects the configuration to load from the configurations saved on the unit. Save Configuration Config <n>: <name> Saves the current configuration to the unit. Only slots labeled <empty slot> can be selected. Other slots are read only. If an individual stored configuration needs to be deleted, select the required memory slot and press the Del key. Load Configuration from USB1 Delete All Configurations from USB Config <n>: <name> Deletes all the configurations stored on the USB stick. Lists the configurations stored on the USB stick connected to the front panel. The selected configuration is loaded and becomes the current configuration, but is not stored in any of the slots in the unit. Save Configuration to USB 1 Config <n>: <name> The list of configurations stored on the unit. The selected configuration is saved to the USB stick connected to the front panel. Import Configuration 1 Import All Configurations Imports all the configurations stored on the USB stick and saves them on the unit. None of the configurations becomes active. Select Configurations to Import Import Selected Configurations USB config <n>: <name> USB Config <n>: <name> Imports the selected configurations and stores them on the unit. None of the configurations becomes active, they are only stored on the unit. The list of configurations stored on the USB stick. The configurations to be imported can be selected by pressing the Select button on the keypad. Imports one particular configuration from a USB stick. The imported configuration does not become active. Export Configuration 1 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-9

150 Front Panel Control Export All Configurations Exports all the configurations stored on the unit to a USB stick. Select Configurations to Export Export Selected Configurations Device Config <n>: <name> Device Config <n>: <name> Exports the selected configurations and stores them on the USB stick attached to the front panel. The list of configurations stored on the USB stick. The configurations to be exported can be selected by pressing the Select button on the keypad. Exports one particular configuration to USB stick. 1 Visible only when a USB drive is detected A/V Encoder Menu The A/V Encoder Menu displays the VCM specific audio/video encoder settings. The menu options are shown in Table 4.5. Table 4.5 A/V Encoder Menu A/V Encoder Video Input Locked Video Bit Rate Video Profile Buffer Mode Source Audio Monitor Audio Module <n> Yes, No. Read only parameter. Indicates whether a video lock is achieved for the SDI streams. For internal streams, its value is always Yes. Bit Rate of the video component encoded by the encoder card. The video profile and level to use for encoding the source. CBR, Seamless, Fast Channel Zap, Capped VBR.. SDI, Bars, Black, Moving Object, Slate 1. External SDI source or internal source to be encoded. Displays the levels for the channels associated with audio modules on the VCM card. To select between the audio modules, turn the rotary knob. For a full list of the menu items in the Audio Module <n> menu Output Menu The Output Menu is used for building a Transport Stream on a specific output. The menu options are shown in Table 4.6. Table 4.6 Output Menu Output IP Output <n> Data Interface Group <m> Network Mode IP Redundancy Mode The IP output is either a physical interface or a bond of physical interfaces. Selects interface group <m> to modify its parameters. Same-Network, Different-Network. If set to Different-Network, the two ports in the group can belong to different subnets. In Different- Network mode only the Active-Active Redundancy mode is supported. Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes the behavior of the spare interfaces. Currently, data output pairs that make up the data interface group are mirrored outputs /1553-FGC Uen Y

151 Front Panel Control Active Interface Line Speed Duplex Mode Default Virtual MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address IGMP mode Selection Physical Data Interface <k> Default MAC Address Link Status Link Up Time TX Packets RX Packets IP Address Add New Transport Stream Add Existing Transport Stream Transport Stream <l> Transport Stream ID <id> Service List Add Service Service <name> Component List Add Component <Component name> on <pid> Elementary Stream PID Read only parameter. In Active - Active redundancy mode both interfaces are active. Auto, 100 Mpbs, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link. Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data are to be transmitted and received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration. Virtual MAC address assigned to the Data Interface Group. The IP address associated with the interface group. The subnet mask associated with the interface group. The gateway address associated with the interface group. IGMP v2, IGMP v3 The physical data interface labeled as Ge <k> of the current data interface group. The hardware address of the Ge <k> interface. Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data interface. The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is established. Read only parameter. Packets transmitted since the link is up. Packets received since the link is up. The IP address of the physical data interface. Creates a new Transport Stream for the current output. Creates a copy of an existing Transport Stream for the current output. The list of the Transport Streams to copy to the current output. Selects the Transport Stream with ID <id> to modify its parameters. The list of services in the current Transport Stream. Adds a new service to the current Transport Stream. Selects the service with <name> already added to the current Transport Stream. List of components in the current service. Adds a new component to the current service. Selects the component with <component name> and <pid> already added to the current service. The elementary stream associated with the component produced by one of the CE VCM modules in the unit. The Packet Identifier that identifies the TS packets carrying the current component. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-11

152 Front Panel Control Bit Rate Weighting Master TS Fixed, Minimum, The weighting associated to the current component. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to changes in the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate defined for the video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much a component is changed when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other than Minimum. Information only master TS for Bit rate tracking Service ID PMT PID PCR PID The unique identifier of the current service within the current Transport Stream. PID assigned to the PMT that describes the current service. The PID of the TS packets that carry the clock reference for the current service. If the service has a component with the Embedded PCR parameter set to On, this field contains the PID of that particular video stream and it is read only. SDT Parameters Service Provider Service Name Service Type BISS Key The name of the service provider as appears in the NIT. The name of the service as appears in the NIT. Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast. Security key for Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS). NIT Service Parameters LCN Current State Change State Transport Stream Bit Rate The Setmode state of the Transport Stream. Read only parameter. Sets the Setmode state of the Transport Stream. The options available depends on the value set for MGP Mode under Advanced/System/MGP Support. The Bit Rate of the Transport Stream. Reserved Bit Rate The Bit Rate of the???. Bit Rate Tracking Mode Auto Enable Auto Disable Syntax Off, Maximise video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the current Transport Stream. If set to true, it automatically re-enables the Transport Streams when all the specified error conditions are cleared. Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm, Any CRITICAL alarm. Disables the output when the set condition is met. The Transport Stream can be set to be re-enabled at the Auto Enable option. DVB, ATSC Program Specific Information Transport Stream ID PAT-PMT A new ID can be assigned to the Transport Stream. On, Off PAT-PMT Parameters /1553-FGC Uen Y

153 Front Panel Control PMT Repetition Period Dolby Digital Descriptor CAT TSTD 100 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms. Specifies how often (in ms) the PMT shall be transmitted. DVB, ATSC, DVB & ATSC On, Off On, Off Service Information Original Network ID NIT On, Off NIT Parameters Network Name Network ID Generate LCN Send Extended NIT - SIRG Insert NIT into PAT SDT IP Bit Rate TS Packets per IP Packet IP Encapsulation FEC Rows FEC Columns FEC Alignment Set Network Name Set network ID. Off, IEC 62216, NorDig v1, DTG Default On, Off. If PSI/SI Level is set to On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT) make sure the Send extended NIT (SIRG) is On so that the Carrier ID is sent. True, False On, Off Specifies the Bit Rate of the IP output and includes the overhead added by IP encapsulation. Read only parameter Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate in one IP packet. UDP, RTP, RTP FEC Column, RTP FEC Column and Row. Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP and RTP is self explanatory and means that the Transport Stream is first encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an IP header is added. If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns and Row is selected one (Column) or two (Column and Row) RTP streams are output in addition to the RTP streams that carry the Transport Stream. The number of rows used in FEC encoding. The number of columns used in FEC encoding. Block Aligned, Non Block Aligned. The aligned method used for Pro MPEG FEC. IP Output Configuration Destination 1 Selects Destination 1. Destination IP Address Destination UDP Port Source IP Address Source UDP Port The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-13

154 Front Panel Control Vlan ID Tag Time To Live Type Of Service TTL value for inclusion in the IP header ToS value for inclusion in the IP header ASI Output <n> (Slot <m>) Selects ASI Output <n> on the ASI option card in slot <m>. If the ASI output is mirrored, then there is only 1 output per card. Add New Transport Stream Transport Stream ID: <id> Service List Add Service Service <name> Component List Add Component <Component name> on pid <pid> Elementary Stream PID Bit Rate Weighting Service ID PMT PID PCR PID Adds a new Transport Stream to the output. Displayed only if no Transport Stream is defined for the ASI output. Selects the Transport Stream with id <id> to modify its parameters. The list of services in the current Transport Stream. Adds a service to the current Transport Stream. Selects the service with <name> already added to the current Transport Stream. Lists the components in the current service. Adds a new component to the current service. Selects the component with <component name> and <pid> already added to the current service. The elementary stream associated with the component produced by one of the VCM modules in the unit. The Packet Identifier that identifies the TS packets carrying the current component. Fixed, Minimum, The weighting associated to the current component. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to changes in the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate defined for the video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much a component is changed when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other than Minimum. The unique identifier of the current service within the current Transport Stream. PID assigned to the PMT that describes the current service. PID of the TS packets that carry the clock reference for the current service. If the service has a component with the Embedded PCR parameter set to On, this field contains the PID of that particular video stream and it is read only. SDT Parameters Service Provider Service Name Service Type BISS Key Current State The name of the service provider as appears in the NIT The name of the service as appears in the NIT.. Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast.. Security key for Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS). The Setmode state of the Transport Stream. Read only parameter /1553-FGC Uen Y

155 Front Panel Control Change State Transport Stream Bit Rate Sets the Setmode state of the Transport Stream. The options available depends on the value set for MGP Mode under Advanced/System/MGP Support. The Bit Rate of the Transport Stream. Reserved Bit Rate The Bit Rate of the???. Bit Rate Tracking Mode Auto Enable Auto Disable Syntax Off, Maximise video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the current Transport Stream. If set to true, it automatically re-enables the Transport Streams when all the specified error conditions are cleared. Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm, Any CRITICAL alarm. Disables the output when the set condition is met. The Transport Stream can be set to be re-enabled at the Auto Enable option. DVB, ATSC Programme Specific Information Transport Stream ID PAT-PMT A new ID can be assigned to the Transport Stream. On, Off PAT-PMT Parameters PMT Repetition Period Dolby Digital Descriptor CAT TSTD 100 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms. Specifies how often (in ms) the PMT shall be transmitted. DVB, ATSC, DVB & ATSC On, Off On, Off Service Information Original Network ID NIT On, Off NIT Parameters Network Name Network ID Generate LCN Send Extended NIT - SIRG Insert NIT into PAT SDT Add Existing Transport Stream Set Network Name Set network ID. Off, IEC 62216, NorDig v1, DTG Default On, Off. If PSI/SI Level is set to On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT) make sure the Send extended NIT (SIRG) is On so that the Carrier ID is sent. True, False On, Off Creates a copy of an existing Transport Stream at the current output. Displayed only if no Transport Stream is defined for the ASI output. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-15

156 Front Panel Control Alarms Menu Shortcuts Menu The Alarms Menu displays the alarm settings available on the unit. The Shortcuts menu displays the shortcuts available on the unit Unit Config Menu The Unit Config Menu displays the device settings. The menu options are shown in Table 4.7. Table 4.7 Unit Config Menu Unit Config Remote Control Setup IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address The IP address of the unit for upgrade or web control. The subnet mask associated to the IP address set. The gateway through which the unit can be accessed. Display Setup Video Monitor Input Displays a list of available sources Video Monitor Parameters Video Monitor Brightness Video Monitor Usage Time Video Monitor Preview Time 0 8 Adjusts the brightness of the monitor Displays the monitor usage time (measured in hours) Duration that the monitor will be active from the time the on button is pressed (measured in seconds) Audio Monitor Input Audio Slot Select Audio Channel Select Audio Module Select Selects the slot from which to monitor a channel on the front panel. Selects the channel from the slot selected in Audio Slot Select and the module set in Audio Module Select for displaying on the front panel. Selects the module from the slot selected in Audio Slot Select. Menu Display and Keypad Keypad Lock Time Keypad LED Brightness Display Test TND Test Carrier ID Setup DVB CID Global Unique Identifier Operator The timeout time in seconds after which the keyboard gets locked. The brightness of the keys in the keypad. Starts a test pattern on the display to verify correct operation. Starts a test on the TND to verify correct operation. Carrier identifier. Displays a unique ID for the carrier ID. Enables selection of an operator /1553-FGC Uen Y

157 Front Panel Control Telephone Number Telephone Extension Latitude Longitude User Information NIT Descriptor Tag Enables entry/editing of a telephone number. Enables entry/editing of a telephone number. Enables selection of latitude. Enables selection of longitude. Enables entry of user information. Enables entry/editing of a NIT descriptor tag. USB Control 1 Format USB Stick Recreates the default directory structure on the USB stick connected to the front panel. 1 Visible only when a USB drive is detected Advanced Menu The Advanced menu allows access to all of the Advanced menus for the installed option cards. Selecting the option card (the parameters of which you wish to edit) from the Slot <n> option will give access to the required menu. If no option card is selected, the System menu is displayed as shown below. Table 4.8 Advanced Menu Advanced Slot <n> See the menu of the installed card: EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Advanced Menu External Sync Input Card ASI Option Card Advanced Menu System Network Configuration Check Duplicate IP Address Enable, Disable. If enabled, the unit checks whether there is another unit with the same IP address within the network by sending out ARP messages. Control Interface Group Network Mode IP Redundancy Mode Autorevert Autorevert Delay Active Interface Line Speed Duplex Mode Same-Network, Different-Network. Read only parameter for the control interface, and is set to Same-Network. Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes how the spare interfaces will behave. For the control port, it is set to Active-Standby and is read only. Auto-revert to Primary, Auto-revert to Secondary. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Determines what to do when connection is lost. The delay in seconds before automatic redundancy switching takes place. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Read only parameter. Displays which interface is active. In Active -Active redundancy mode both interfaces are active. Auto, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link. Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data should be transmitted and 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-17

158 Front Panel Control received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration. Default MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address IGMP Mode Selection Physical Control Port <n> Default MAC Address Link Status Link Up Time TX Packets RX Packets IP Address Virtual MAC address assigned to the Control Interface Group. The IP address associated with the interface group. The subnet mask associated with the interface group. The gateway address associated with the interface group. IGMPv2/IGMPv3. Internet Group Management Protocol selection. The physical control port labelled as Ge <n> of the current control interface group. The hardware address of the Ge <n> interface. Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data interface. The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is established. Read only parameter. The packets transmitted since the link is up. The packets received since the link is up. The IP address of the physical data interface. Data Interface Group <n> Network Mode IP Redundancy Mode Autorevert Autorevert Delay Active Interface Line Speed Duplex Mode Default Virtual MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address IGMP Mode Selection Physical Data Interface <m> Default MAC Address Same-Network, Different-Network. If set to Different-Network, the two ports in the group can belong to different subnets. In Different-Network mode only the Active-Active Redundancy mode is supported. Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes how the spare interfaces will behave. For a data interface group only Active/Active is supported. Auto-revert to Primary, Auto-revert to Secondary. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Determines what to do when connection is lost. The delay in seconds before automatic redundancy switching takes place. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Read only parameter. Displays which interface is active. In Active -Active redundancy mode both interfaces are active. Auto, 100 Mpbs, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link. Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data should be transmitted and received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration. Virtual MAC address assigned to the current Data Interface Group. The IP address associated with the interface group. The subnet mask associated with the interface group. The gateway address associated with the interface group. IGMPv2/IGMPv3. Internet Group Management Protocol selection. The physical data interface labelled as Ge <m> of the current data interface group. The hardware address of the Ge <n> interface /1553-FGC Uen Y

159 Front Panel Control Link Status Link Up Time TX Packets RX Packets IP Address Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data interface. Read only parameter. The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is established. Read only parameter. Packets transmitted since the link is up. Read only parameter. Packets received since the link is up. Read only parameter. The IP address of the physical data interface. Model Build Version Assembly Date Software Version Serial Number Chassis Type PSU A Option PSU B Option Inlet A Inlet B Inlet Mode Number of Usable Slots The time and date when the current unit was assembled. Read only parameter. The version of the software currently installed on the unit. Read only parameter. The serial number of the unit. Read only parameter. The type of the chassis. Read only parameter. The voltage level provided by PSU A. Read only parameter. The voltage level provided by PSU B. Read only parameter. AC, DC, none. The type of the power through inlet A of the current unit. Read only parameter. AC, DC, none. The type of the power supply through inlet B of the current unit. Read only parameter. Supply mode of the inlets. Read only parameter. The number of slots in the current unit. Single PSU units have 6 slots, dual PSU units have 4 or 6 slots. Read only parameter. Base Unit Build Version Host Controller Card Id Software Date Software Version Hardware Version Backplane Version S Number Serial Number The Card Id of the host controller card. Read only parameter. The date the host software was compiled. Read only parameter. The version of the software running on the host controller card. Read only parameter. The hardware version of the host controller card. Read only parameter. The backplane version of the host controller card. Read only parameter. The BOM assembly number of the host card. The S number specifies the available software and firmware features of the card. Read only parameter. The serial number of the host card. Read only parameter. Software/Firmware BSP Software Version Application Software Version Boot FPGA Firmware The software version of the board support package. Read only parameter. The version of the application that runs on the host controller card. Read only parameter. The firmware version of the boot FPGA. Read only parameter. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-19

160 Front Panel Control Version Main FPGA Firmware Version Clocks FPGA Firmware Version The firmware version of the main FPGA. Read only parameter. The firmware version of the clocks FPGA. Read only parameter. Advanced Chip Id The unique identifier of the host controller card. Read only parameter. FPGA Temperature FPGA Warning Temperature FPGA Over Temperature FPGA Temperature The temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA at which the unit issues a warning. The temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA at which the unit issues a critical alarm. The current temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA. PHY0 Temperature PHY0 Warning Temperature PHY0 Over Temperature PHY0 Temperature The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY0 at which the unit issues a warning. The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY0 at which the unit issues a critical alarm. The current temperature in degrees centigrade of Ethernet PHY0. PHY1 Temperature PHY1 Warning Temperature PHY1 Over Temperature PHY1 Temperature Mux SCR Source Unit Name Status of Service Change State IP Input system Compensation What to Do on Reboot TS Source IP Redundancy BISS security level BISS injected ID The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1 at which the unit issues a warning. The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1 at which the unit issues a critical alarm. The current temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1. Internal, Video. The source of the system clock reference used for timing. The name of the current unit for displaying on the web user interface. The Setmode state of the unit. Changes the Setmode state of the unit. The available options depend on the settings in Advanced/System/Base Unit/MGP Support/MGP Mode ms Restore, Offline. Determines whether the streams remain offline after reboot or their Setmode state is to be restored. Non-Transparent, Transparent Security key for Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS). 14 hex digits BISS keys table 1-31 UTC Time UTC Date The UTC time set on the unit. The UTC date set on the unit /1553-FGC Uen Y

161 Front Panel Control SNTP Server POIS Server URL Reflex Version DPI TCP Port Alarm Status The IP address of a time server in the network. Web address of the??? server. Selects the Reflex version to use for statistical multiplexing. The port for the SCTE104 Slice messages to be transmitted. The overall alarm status of the unit. The same as indicated by the light pipe on the front panel. User Authentication Enable User Name Password Fan Speed Fans Speed Control Fans Speed Status Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 4 Fan 5 Voltage Rails Status On, Off. Determines whether authentication is required for controlling the unit. The user name used for authentication if user authentication is enabled. The password used for authentication if user authentication is enabled. Information Only Lowest Noise, Quiet, Cool or Best Cooling. Sets the fan speed to achieve the required operation whilst maintaining a safe operating temperature within the unit. Lists the speed of the respective fans in rpm rpm 4608 rpm 4736 rpm 4736 rpm 4736 rpm Lists the actual voltage or current levels of the respective nominal outputs. 0.9V A 0.9V B 1.0V 1.0V GTP 1.2V GTP 1.2V 1.5V 1.8V 2.5V 2.5V Vcc Aux 3.0V 3.3V 3.6V 5V 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-21

162 Front Panel Control Front Panel Parameters LED Brightness Control Video Monitor Preview Time Video Monitor Usage Time Video Monitor Brightness Key Lock Time Default Screen on Key Lock Default Screen Type TSDT Setup 0-7. The brightness of the keys and the rotary knob. The time in seconds after which the TND is to be turned off automatically. If 0 is given as value, the TND does not turn out automatically. The cumulative time the TND was switched on Sets the brightness of the TND (CMU) display. The time in seconds after which the keyboard gets locked to prevent accidental key presses. When set to on the menu will return to default screen. Set to off to remain on current screen after timeout lock. Classic enables the scrolling status information Alternative disables the scrolling status Transport Stream Description Table setup. Usual Station Code SNG HQ SNG Provider Third Party Control Interface Enable Third Party Control API On/off. Remote Server Logging Remote Server IP Address Alarm Logging ESAM Logging SCTE-35 Logging User Configuration Logging The IP address to which system messages selected for remote logging are sent. A value of disables all remote logging. Off, On. When set to On, all alarm log messages are copied to the remote server. Off, On. When set to On, all ESAM log messages are copied to the remote server. Off, On. When set to On, all SCTE-35 log messages are copied to the remote server. Off, On. When set to On, all user configuration changes are sent to the remove server. Reflex Parameters PCR Port Command port Status Port PCR Exchange Timeout Period Reflex TTL Set Rate Timeout Period The UDP port on the current unit to which PCR Exchange Messages are sent. The UDP port on the current unit to which Set Rate Messages are sent. The UDP port on the multiplexer to which Status Messages are sent from the current unit. The maximum time between PCR Exchange Messages. If exceeded, PCR Exchange Timeout Alarm is triggered. The time to live value to be applied to all Reflex v5 messages transmitted from the current unit. The maximum number of video frames between set rate messages. If exceeded, Set Rate Message Timeout Alarm is triggered. MGP Support Supported MGP Version The MGP version supported by the unit. Read only parameter /1553-FGC Uen Y

163 Front Panel Control MGP Mode Transmission Interval R0 Playout Period S1 Playout Period Control Contact Timeout MSM Destination Port MGP Settings 1 MSM Multicast Address MGP State MGP Spares 2 Spare Device Configuration Spare IP Address Off, Module Level, Unit Level. Determines if MGP is enabled or not, or if it is enabled, then the unit is controlled as a whole or on a module level basis. Period for steady-state transmission of MSM packets in units of ms. Duration of the MSM burst emitted on entering MGP state R0 in units of ms. Duration of the MSM burst emitted on entering MGP state S1 in units of ms. Period of time in ms the system waits before assuming loss of contact with the control system after the control link goes down. UDP port for sending MGP packets. 1 Only available when MGP is enabled The destination IP Address of the MSM packets. The current state of the MGP implementation. 2 Only available when MGP is enabled. Selects a spare device to set up its parameters. The IP address of another unit that is acting as a spare for this unit/service. Vlan Tags Output <n>: Data Port <m> - Data Port <k> Add Vlan tag Vlan ID: <id> Vlan ID (Create) Vlan IP Vlan Netmask Vlan Gateway Selects output <n> for adjusting its VLAN settings. Adds a new VLAN tag to the current output. The ID associated with the VLAN tag. Allows the user to change the ID. Modifies the VLAN ID for the current tag. Assigns an IP address to the VLAN. Specifies the network mask for the current VLAN. Specifies the gateway address for the current VLAN. Vlan Priority Specifies the gateway priority for the current VLAN SNMP System Contact System Name System Location Will this unit be SNMP Polled Time Elapsed before Control assumed Lost Currently in Contact with Control System SNMP Agent Ready SNMP Trap Server Accept Configuration Contact to the team providing support for this unit. The name to identify the current unit. The location where the current unit is installed. True, False. Determines whether the unit is polled for SNMP information or not. The amount of time between sysuptime requests before the connection with the control system is assumed to be down. Determines if a connection has been established with the trap server. True/False. Determines if the SNMP agent is ready. True/False. Configures the Trap Server destinations. Accepts the changes in hardware configuration if there are any. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-23

164 Front Panel Control EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Module Advanced Menu Table 4.9 EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Module Advanced Menu Build Card Id Name Software Version Hardware Version CPLD Version Hardware S Number S Number Card Role Displays a unique number identifying the card type. Displays a text string identifying the card type. The software version loaded onto the card. The hardware version of the card. The version of firmware loaded onto Complex Programmable Logic Devices on the card. Displays the hardware S number Displays the S number. Enables selection of Decode/Encode/Broadcast ABR. Versions Backend Firmware The version of VHDL loaded into the main FPGA. Advanced Chip Id PCR Interval BackEnd FPGA Temperature Temperature Temperature Alarm Threshold Over Temperature Threshold Encoder <a> Sensor <n> Temperature A unique number assigned to this card. Program Clock Reference interval. Backend Field Programmable Gate Array temperature. The current reported temperature of the FPGA temperature sensor. Alarm is raised if the temperature exceeds this threshold. Card will be shut down if the temperature exceeds this threshold. Additional temperature sensors as installed. Sub items as per Backend FPGA Temperature, above. VideoGroup Video 1 Input Video Input Lock Source HD Auto Input Detection Detected Video Standard segmentation Target Segment Duration Target Fragment Length Indicates if the unit is locked to the incoming video stream. Source of the video data to be encoded/transcoded: SDI, Daughter Card, Color Bars, Black, Moving Object, Slate. Only present if the Card Role is ABR: Off, HD 25/50Hz, HD 29.97/59.94Hz. The current detected video standard. Only present if HD Auto Input Detection is not Off. Only present if the Card Role is ABR. Time duration of one segment. Time duration of one fragment. Segments comprise of 1 or more fragments /1553-FGC Uen Y

165 Front Panel Control Video Input Format Display Slate after Sensitivity ~ Sensitivity Delay Output on Video Loss SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the Video Profile used for encoding. Disables or enables delayed slate display upon Video Input Lock loss (see above). Number of seconds until slate is displayed following display of "Output on Video Loss". Same delay used for return to normal. Defines the output required on loss if video at the input connector: Freeze Frame, Black, Color Bars, No PID, Slate. Action On Freeze Frame Detect Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Disables or enables delayed slate display upon frozen video. Number of seconds until the slate is displayed following frozen video. Number of seconds until the slate is removed after recovery unless required for another reason. Freeze Frame and Silence Detect Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Disables or enables delayed slate display upon concurrent frozen video and silent audio. Number of seconds until the slate is displayed following concurrent frozen video and silent audio. Number of seconds until the slate is removed after recovery unless required for another reason. Silent Audio Detect Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Audio Threshold Audio Selection MCTRF Adaptive Pre-processing Horizontal Bandwidth Half Line Removal Disables or enables delayed slate display upon concurrent frozen video and silent audio. Number of seconds until the slate is displayed following concurrent frozen video and silent audio. Number of seconds until the slate is removed after recovery unless required for another reason. Volume below which the selected audio is deemed silent. Audio stream selected for silence detection (if enabled). Off, Default, Strong. Motion Compensated Temporal Filter selection. Available with the AVP/SWO/SD/PREMIUM or AVP/SWO/HD/PREMIUM. On, off. Adaptive filtering selection. Input filter to prevent excessive blocking, if the license enabled. 30 to 100 %. Sets the video horizontal bandwidth filter. On,off. Enables or disables the removal of black half lines at the top of the picture by substituting video data from adjacent lines. The option is available when Video Input Format is set to SD 576i25. logo Upload New Logo File 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-25

166 Front Panel Control Logo file Logo insertion A fixed logo position? The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be uploaded by selecting the Upload option. On, off. Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can be selected under Logo file. On, off. Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying the logo on the video. On means use the position as contained in the logo file. Off allows the user to select the X,Y location of the logo. The X position of the logo The position relative to left of the screen 0 (number of pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if a fixed logo position is set to Off. The Y position of the logo The position relative to top of screen 0 (number of video lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if a fixed logo position is set to Off. Upload New Slate File Slate File HD to SD Video Down-conversion Default Aspect Ratio Conversion Use Input AFD Action on AFD lost Action on AFD code 0000 The file to use as a Slate. The selected file can be uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Enables selection of slate file to be uploaded. Control over conversion from HD to SD pictures. Anamorphic, Center cut, Letterbox. True, false. Convert as anamorphic, Convert as specified in Default. Convert as anamorphic, Convert as specified in Default. VBI Extraction Descriptor Control VBI Descriptor Mode VBI Data Descriptor Insertion VBI Teletext Descriptor Insertion Teletext Descriptor Insertion Proprietary Descriptor Insertion Standard, Legacy, Philips, User. Controls the descriptor mode to be used for the VBI PID. Used in conjunction with the Teletext packetization parameter. Off, on. Off, on. Off, on. Off, on. Aspect Ratio (AR) Signalling Video Index Off, On (Default), On (User). Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether Video Index can be used as source of AR info). Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index (11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in Hz) User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video Index. Video Index Field 1 10 to 22. Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1. Video Index Field 2 10 to 22. Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2. SMPTE 2016 AFD Sustain On, off. Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a source for AR info. Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after Timeout. Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input /1553-FGC Uen Y

167 Front Panel Control Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code indefinitely. Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to default, i.e. code Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD off. AFD Sustain Timeout 0 to 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 120. Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero means drop to default immediately on loss. AFD Action on Reserved Codes Pass Thru, Code as Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved AFD codes are received at the input. Pass Thru: Passes code through unchanged. Code as 0000: Changes code to Closed Captions Closed Captions Source Off, SPMTE 334. Timecode TC Mode TC External Source TC Dropframes Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel on Loss, Internal. Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in, either Off, external source or internally generated. Also sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or freewheel). Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI VITC. Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select the first source present in order of the drop down list. Off, On, Auto. Broadcaster ID Reception Timeout Insertion Timeout Broadcaster ID Mode Default Servicename Broadcaster ID Source Broadcaster ID Enables entry/editing of reception timeout. Enables entry/editing of insertion timeout. Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only. Enables entry/editing of service name. Displays broadcaster ID source. Displays broadcaster ID. Generic ANC Generic ANC Extraction Max ANC Bit Rate Teletext Teletext Source On, off. Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI stream or not as per SMPTE to 2000 kbps. The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output. DVB syntax only. Off, VBI lines. Teletext Packetisation Normal (ETS ) - Data on Teletext Component, Legacy (ETS ) - Data on VBI Component. Controls how the Teletext data is packetized in to a component data stream. Min # Teletext Packets PTS on Teletext 0 to 3. Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data. Off, on. Controls whether a PTS value is included in the output Teletext 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-27

168 Front Panel Control packets. Teletext Descriptor Page List Teletext Descriptor Page Teletext Page Type Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional Information Page, Programme Schedule Page, Heading Impaired Subtitle Page. The page type of the Teletext descriptor. Teletext Page Number Enables the page number for the page to be set. Teletext Page Language The language set for the Teletext descriptor (82 languages). VBI Line Control Field 1 VBI Line 6 VBI Line 7 VBI Line 8 VBI Line 9 VBI Line 10 VBI Line 11 VBI Line 12 VBI Line 13 VBI Line 14 VBI Line 15 VBI Line 16 VBI Line 17 VBI Line 18 VBI Line 19 VBI Line 20 VBI Line 21 VBI Line 22 Field 2 VBI Line 272 VBI Line 273 VBI Line 274 VBI Line 275 VBI Line 276 VBI Line /1553-FGC Uen Y

169 Front Panel Control VBI Line 278 VBI Line 279 VBI Line 280 VBI Line 281 VBI Line 282 VBI Line 283 VBI Line 284 VBI Line 285 Field 1 VBI Line 6 VBI Line 7 VBI Line 8 VBI Line 9 VBI Line 10 VBI Line 11 VBI Line 12 VBI Line 13 VBI Line 14 VBI Line 15 VBI Line 16 VBI Line 17 VBI Line 18 VBI Line 19 VBI Line 20 VBI Line 21 VBI Line 22 VBI Line 23 Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, VPS, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples. Off, WSS, WSS-Auto. Field 2 VBI Line 318 VBI Line 319 VBI Line 320 VBI Line 321 VBI Line 322 Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-29

170 Front Panel Control VBI Line 323 VBI Line 324 VBI Line 325 VBI Line 326 VBI Line 327 VBI Line 328 VBI Line 329 VBI Line 330 VBI Line 331 VBI Line 332 VBI Line 333 VBI Line 334 VBI Line 335 VBI Line 336 Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples VBI in Picture VBI in Picture Video Main Video Encode Profile SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit SD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile Main level 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High level 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the allowed bit rate range. Resolution 352 x 576, 480 x 576, 528 x 576, 544 x 576, 640 x 576, 704 x 576, 720 x 576, 352 x 480, 480 x 480, 528 x 480, 544 x 480, 640 x 480, 704 x 480, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, 1920 x Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the encoded video. The available options depend on the values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile /1553-FGC Uen Y

171 Front Panel Control Buffer Mode Video Bit Rate CBR, Seamless, Fast Channel Zap, Capped VBR. Sets a buffer mode to adapt to changing bit rates and ensure interruption is not caused in the output stream. The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile. Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only. Look Ahead Aspect Ratio GOP Length 25/29.97Hz GOP Length 50/59.94Hz GOP Length GOP Structure Closed GOPs Scene Cut Detection Delay Stills Detection Premium Functionality Inloop Filter SEI Encapsulation Mode 16:9, 4:3. Does not affect the video encoding but rather indicates what the desired aspect ratio for the decoded picture (not the pixel). If no other mechanism such as WSS in the VBI is used, the video output image will use this aspect ratio. 4 to 250. Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bit-stream. Only present if HD Auto Input Detection is not Off. 4 to 250. Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bit-stream. Only present if HD Auto Input Detection is not Off. 4 to 250. Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bit-stream. Only present if HD Auto Input Detection is Off. IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP. Sets the number of B frames between reference frames. IBBBBBBBP can only be used for 720p video format encoded with a H.264 video profile. Off, On. Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in which the predicted frames can have their reference from outside the group. On, Off. When enabled, minimizes the negative effect the scene changes have on the bit rate by inserting an I-Frame when a change is detected. It also affects the GOP length. Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only parameter. Off, On. Detects if the video is a still picture, and adjusts the encoded video bit rate accordingly when operating in VBR mode. Off, On. Enable premium functions. License controlled feature. High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto. Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can increase picture sharpness. Combined, Mediaroom. Sets the SEI messages in combined mode where all the SEI messages are combines into one NAL unit or into Mediaroom mode compliance where each SEI message has its own NAL start. Splicing Splicing Control Splice Null Insertion Audio Splicing Off, On VANC Message Only, On VANC, On IP. Enables splice points to be set in the video stream upon reception of a SCTE 104 message and determines the insertion point. To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license (AVP/SWO/DPI) is needed. Off, On. Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35 messages into the output stream if no messages have been sent for 500ms. Off, On. Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that the video splice occurs. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-31

172 Front Panel Control AS Index Control DPI PID Index Control Don't Care, Use 1, Use Only available when Splicing Control is set to On VANC Message Only. If set to Don t Care, the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output regardless of the source Automation System. If set to Use 1, the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output only for incoming SCTE 104 whose AS Index matches the setting in AS Index 1. If set to Use 1 + 2, the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output only for incoming SCTE 104 messages whose AS Index matches either the setting in AS Index 1 or the setting in AS Index 2. Don't Care, Use 1, Use Determines how many values of DPI PID Index are compared against the incoming SCTE 104 message. Available only when Splicing Control is set to On VANC Message Only. AS Index 1 0 to 255. The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 or Use AS Index 2 0 to 255. The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use DPI PID Index 1 0 to 255. The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to Use 1 or Use DPI PID Index 2 0 to 255. The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to Use Splice Status Scte104 Messages In Scte104 Message Error Scte 35 Messages Out Pending Splices. Splice Event Info Splice <n> Splice Type Out of Network Unique Program ID Event ID Time to splice (H) Time to splice (M) Time to splice (S) Time to splice (F) Stream Output Embedded PCR Copyright Original PES Packet Per Off, On, On (Picture Header). Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video. If it is set to other than Off, the PCR PID field of a service will become read only and will contain the PID of the current component. Off, On. Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header. Off, On. Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header. GOP, Picture. Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is used /1553-FGC Uen Y

173 Front Panel Control AU Information Ctrl AR Signalling Output Control TC Output Location Off, RAI, RAI and AU Info. Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation Field for video Access Units (AU). This can be: Random Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI (AU info), Time Code (TC) and Additional Info (Encoding info and BroadcasterID). Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data. Controls what Aspect Ratio signaling will be put into video user_data. AFD sources are: SMPTE 2016, Video Index, WSS- AFD/WSS, user set Aspect Ratio. Bar Data is only SMPTE SeqHdr, SeqAndPicHdr, Off, SEIMsg. Determines the locations used to transmit Time code information in the stream. Time code can be carried by the sequence header, the sequence and picture headers for MPEG-2 or a SEI message for H.264. Reflex Reflex Configuration Enable Reflex Off, On. License controlled. Media SetMode Reflex destinations Both destination Mux Multicast Address Main Mux Source IP Address Spare Mux Source IP Address Enc Multicast Address Tracking Encoder Source IP Address TS Source IP Address Tracking Encoder Source IP Addr Tracking Encoder Control IP Addr Tracking Encoder Module ID Video PID PCR PID Reflex Transport Stream ID Internal Reflex Component Parameters Max Seamless Bit Rate Interval Reflex Group ID Reflex Status 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-33

174 Front Panel Control Second Video PIP Audio Module Advanced Received Reflex Msg Device Rx Counter Device Tx Counter Socket Rx Counter Socket Tx Counter PCR Excg Rx Counter PCR Excg Tx Counter Set Rate Src IP Addr PCR Exchange Src IP Addr SCR diff to be applied to ClocksFPGA AC-3 PMT / Descriptor Syntax Audio <n> Input Format Source Output On Audio Loss Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby E, AAC. Sets the input format used by the audio encoder. Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8. Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 khz test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI embedded audio stream. No PID, Silence. Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for encode silence. NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the output Transport Stream. Downmix Parameters Downmix Type Downmix metadata override Downmix metadata reversion mode Center mix level Surround mix level Use Preferred Stereo Downmix if Available Lo/Ro downmix, Lt/Rt downmix. Specifies the downmix type.. Off, on. Specifies the downmix override. If available, maintain last received metatdata values, otherwise use fixed settings, Use fixed settings. Specifies the downmix metadata reversion mode (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db). Specifies the center mix level (-3.0 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Specifies the surround mix level. Off, on. Enables the preferred stereo downmix, if available /1553-FGC Uen Y

175 Front Panel Control Audio Status Audio Locked Downmix Active Level (L) Level (R) PCM Bypass Switchout Active Input Buffer Level Bit Rate Dolby Digital Sample Rate Coding Mode Resync Count Bad RC Packets Delay Audio Loudness Status Integrated Loudness Short Term Loudness Current Adjustment Operation Mode drchighcut drclowboost Encode Coding Standard Bit Rate Coding Mode MPEG-1 Layer 2, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, AAC-LC, HE-AAC, Passthru, Audio Description Service. 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512. Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. 1/0 (Left input), 1/0 (Right input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround). Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Metadata Controls Coding Mode Metadata source type Metadata override type Metadata reversion mode type Metadata preset type Embedded PCR Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-35

176 Front Panel Control AU Information Ctrl Off, AU Info. Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Passthrough Channel Mode Bit Depth Channel Identification Encapsulation TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) MPEG 2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS. Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex. Off, On. Turns noise shaping on or off. PNS (Perceptual Noise Substitution) SBR Signalling Explicit, Implicit. Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled. Automatic Loudness Control Operating Mode Target Level Time Period Peak Limit Maximum Boost Maximum Attenuation Preset Reset Statistics Off, Measure, Measure + ALC, Measure + ALC + LTLC. -40 to 0 (LKFS (LU). The desired Loudness level for the channel. 5 to 120 minutes. This controls the responsiveness of the long term audio loudness level correction. A smaller number will result in the audio being adjusted more dynamically. A larger value will give a slower less noticeable adjustment. -20 to 0 dbfs. This controls a hard clipping limiter for the audio level. This adjustment is based on the absolute peak level measured in dbfs. The peak limiter only operates in Measure + ALC and Measure + ALC + LTLC modes. If this value is set to 0 no limiting is performed 0 to 10 db. This control determines the maximum amount of gain that the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts. This only applies when the operating mode is Measure + ALC + LTLC. 0 to 10 db. This control determines the maximum amount of attenuation that the ALC and the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artefacts. Subtle, Standard, Strong. The available options are Subtle, Standard and Strong. This setting controls the aggressiveness of the corrections performed by the Short Term ALC algorithm. It controls how quickly the correction takes place and the strength of the correction. True, false. This can be used to reset the statistics that have been collected in the Audio Algorithm. Due to the slower update nature of the web interface the apparent change would be to the measurement of the Integrated Loudness only. Advanced Lip Sync Offset Gain -500 to 500 ms. Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. -6 to 6dB. Sets the gain in db for the audio stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

177 Front Panel Control Language Language (Left) Language (Right) The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1) mode. M1L2 dual mono M1L2 dual mono User Defined Language 1 User Defined Language 2 Audio Stream Type MPEG Version Copyright Original De-emphasis Main Audio, Clean Effects, Hearing Impaired, Visual Impaired. MPEG 1, MPEG 2. Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be signaled. Off, On. Indicates if the material is copyright protected. Off, On. Indicates if source is the original or a copy Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17. To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to encoding. Audio description Action on control track Loss Action when silence detected Silence Threshold Silence Period Audio Status Coding Mode Bit Rate Dolby Digital Sample Rate Indicates the selected audio encoding status. Indicates the selected audio bit rate. Indicates the Dolby Digital audio encoding sample rate in Hz. Dolby Metadata Presets Dolby Metadata Preset <n> Preset name Dialogue Normalization Level Bitstream Mode Line mode compression profile type RF mode compression profile type Center mix level Name of the preset (for user information). -31 to -1 db. Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment required to achieve the set level. Main audio service: complete main, music and effects, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: hearing impaired, Associated service: dialogue, Associated service: commentary, Associated service: emergency, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover. Flags the type of service in the bitstream. None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech. Alters the dynamic range for line output. None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech. This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall level is raised by 11dB (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db). Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-37

178 Front Panel Control Surround mix level Dolby Surround mode Audio production information exists Mixing Level Room Type Copyright flag Original bitstream flag Enable extended bitstream information Preferred downmix mode (-3.0 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Surround downmix level for the front left and right channels when consumer has no surround speakers. Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded. Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt). Off, On. This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters exist within the bit-stream. 80 to 111 db. Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue level during the final audio mixing session. Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor, Small room flat monitor. Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. Off, On. Indicates if the material is copyright protected. Off, On. Indicates if source is the original or a copy. Off, On. Flags if additional information is available for downmixing. Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro downmmix preferred. Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder. Mix level type (+3.0 db), (+1.5 db), (0 db), (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to 'Center mix level'. Lt/Rt surround mix level Lo/Ro center mix level Lo/Ro surround mix level Dolby Surround EX mode A/D converter type Digital de-emphasis DC high pass filter enable Bandwidth low-pass filter enable Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable Surround attenuation enable (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Indicates the required level reduction of the surround channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to Surround mix level' (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center mix level' (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level' (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Flags if the stream has been encoded in Surround Ex. Only used if surround channels are present. Standard, HDCD. Indicates type of A/D conversion used. Off, Auto, On. To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have preemphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to encoding. Off, On. Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach 100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore must be clipped. Off, On. Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded. Off, On. Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should only be switched off if it is known that there are no frequencies above 120 Hz. Off, On. Attenuate surround channels by 3 db before encoding. Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels for the surround channels, and this can be used to compensate /1553-FGC Uen Y

179 Front Panel Control Surround phase shift enable Off, On. Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing a 'Lt/Rt' downmix. Metadata Status Audio Node Input Metadata Status Dialogue Normalization Type Coding Mode LFE channel enable Bitstream Mode Line mode compression profile RF mode compression profile Line mode. RF mode. Center mix level Surround mix level Dolby Surround mode Audio production information exists Mixing Level Type Room Type Copyright flag Original bitstream flag Preferred downmix mode Lt/Rt center mix level Lt/Rt surround mix level Lo/Ro center mix level Lo/Ro surround mix level Lt/Rt center. Lt/Rt surround. Lo/Ro center. Lo/Ro surround. Dolby Surround EX mode A/D converter type DC high pass filter enable Bandwidth low-pass filter enable Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable Surround attenuation enable Surround phase shift enable Output Metadata Status Dialogue Normalization Type 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-39

180 Front Panel Control Coding Mode LFE channel enable Bitstream Mode Line mode compression profile RF mode compression profile Line mode. RF mode. Center mix level Surround mix level Dolby Surround mode Audio production information exists Mixing Level Type Room Type Copyright flag Original bitstream flag Preferred downmix type Lt/Rt center mix level Lt/Rt center. Lt/Rt surround mix level Lt/Rt surround. Lo/Ro center mix level Lo/Ro surround mix level Lo/Ro center. Lo/Ro surround. Video Input Port ioporttype iodirection ioportindex Audio Input Port 1 ioporttype iodirection ioportindex Dolby Surround EX mode A/D converter type DC high pass filter enable Bandwidth low-pass filter enable Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable Surround attenuation enable Surround phase shift enable /1553-FGC Uen Y

181 Front Panel Control Audio Input Port 2 ioporttype iodirection ioportindex External Sync Input Option Card The External Sync Input Option Card has no configurable parameters ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu The front panel provides full access to the ASI option card's capabilities. The advanced menu is listed in the table below. Table 4.10 ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu Build ASI IO Option Card Id Name Software Version Hardware Version The card identifier number. The name of the card. The software version loaded onto the card. The hardware version of the card. Advanced FPGA Temperature Temperature Temperature Alarm Threshold Over Temperature Threshold Field Programmable Gate Array temperature. The measured temperature of the FPGA. The maximum operating temperature alarm value. The overtemperature alarm value. ASI Output Streams ASI Output <n> Output Enabled Advanced Byte Mode Output Good Average Average Interpacket time Good Values Force Dump Output Mode Mirrored, Independent. Specifies whether the two outputs output the same Transport Stream or they operate independently. If set to Mirrored, only one output will be accessible. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-41

182 Front Panel Control ASI Input Streams ASI Input 1 Packet Size Bit Rate ASI Input 2 Packet Size Bit Rate ASI Input Port 1 Port Type Direction Index ASI Input Port 2 Port Type Direction Index Outputs ASI Output <n> Transport Streams Transport Stream Status of Service Bit Rate Reserved Bit Rate Auto Enable Auto Disable Syntax Programme Specific Information Transport Stream ID PAT/PMT PAT/PMT Parameters PMT Repetition Period Dolby Digital Descriptor CAT TSDT /1553-FGC Uen Y

183 Front Panel Control Service Information Original Network ID NIT NIT Parameters SDT ireflexreferenceslist servicelist Service ID PMT PID PCR PID SDT Parameters Provider Service Name Service Type BISS Key ComponentList Intputs ASI Input <n> Transport Streams 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 4-43

184 Front Panel Control BLANK /1553-FGC Uen Y

185 5 Web GUI Control Chapter 5 Contents 5.1 Using the Web Graphical User Interface Appearance and General Features Header Navigation Area Widgets Footer Supported Actions and Features Pages Dashboard Page Dashboard Widgets Outputs Widget Bit Rate Utilization widget Device Information Widget Alarm Monitor Widget Using the Dashboard Page Accessing the Properties of Transport Streams, Services or Components Associated with an Output Checking the Bit Rates of the Different Components in a Transport Stream Checking the Severity of Alarms Accepting Hardware Configuration Changes Stored Configurations Page Stored Configuration Page Widgets Stored Configurations Widget Configuration Workbench Widget Using the Stored Configuration Page Storing the Current Configuration Restoring a Configuration Exporting a Configuration Importing a Configuration Device Configuration Page Quick Setup Tab Configurations Items Widget Properties Widget Advanced Setup Tab Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget Properties Widget /1553-FGC Uen Y 5-1

186 Web GUI Control Using the Device Configuration Page Customizing the Quick Setup menu Configuring Option Cards Using the Device Configuration Page ASI Option Card External Sync Input Option Card EI9001(T) Option Card Configuring Base Unit LDAP User Authentication Service Configuration Page Service Configuration Page Widgets Inputs Widget Outputs Widget Properties Widget Using the Service Configuration Page Adding a Transport Stream to an Output Adding a Service to a Transport Stream Adding a Component to a Transport Stream Deleting Transport Streams, Services or Components Manually Changing the Setmode State of a Transport Stream Copying Transport Streams, Services or Components Moving Transport Streams, Services or Components Cloning Transport Streams Disabling a Transport Stream if Audio or Video Lock is Lost Disabling a Transport Stream if a Critical Alarm or an Upstream Critical Alarm is Raised Restoring a Transport Stream if the Auto Disable Condition is not Met Reserving Bandwidth for Transport Streams Providing More Space for Configuration Items in the Properties Widget Configuring Option Cards Using the Service Configuration Page EI9001 and EI9001T CE-HEVC Configuring Transport Streams Transport Stream Configuration External PSIP Data Insertion Internal PSIP Data Insertion ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE ) VLAN Tagging Support Page General Tab Import and Export Widget Log Files Widget Version Tab Licenses Tab Device Management Tab List of Figures Figure 5.1 Main Components of the GUI Figure 5.2 Header Figure 5.3 Navigation Area Figure 5.4 Example of a Widget /1553-FGC Uen Y

187 Web GUI Control Figure 5.5 Example of an Accordion Panel Figure 5.6 Footer Figure 5.7 Dashboard Page Figure 5.8 Outputs Widget Figure 5.9 Bit Rate Utilization Widget Figure 5.10 Device Information Widget Figure 5.11 Alarm Monitor Widget Figure 5.12 Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream Accordion Panel Figure 5.13 Stored Configurations Page Figure 5.14 Stored Configuration Widget Figure 5.15 Configuration Workbench Widget Figure 5.16 Quick Setup Tab Figure 5.17 Configuration Items Widget Figure 5.18 Properties Widget Figure 5.19 Advanced Setup Tab Figure 5.20 Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget Figure 5.21 Properties Widget Figure 5.22 Remote Authentication and HTTP Server Option Properties Figure 5.23 Service Configuration Video Page Figure 5.24 Inputs Widget Figure 5.25 Outputs Widget Figure 5.26 Properties Widget Figure 5.27 Add Service Menu Figure 5.28 Deleting a Service Figure 5.29 Dragging a Transport Stream or Service Figure 5.30 Setting External PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI Figure 5.31 Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI Figure 5.32 Support Page > General Tab Figure 5.33 Support Page > Versions Tab Figure 5.34 Support Page > Licenses Tab Figure 5.35 Support Page > Device Management Tab List of Tables Table 5.1 Setmode State Color Codes Table 5.2 Stored Configuration Parameters Table 5.3 ASI Output Configuration Parameters Table 5.4 LDAP Authentication Configuration Parameters Table 5.5 Video Input Parameters Table 5.6 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters Table 5.7 Aspect Ratio Parameters Table 5.8 Main Video Encoding Parameters Table 5.9 Secondary Video Encoding Parameters Table 5.10 Restrictions on Secondary Video Component Coding Standard Table 5.11 PIP Video Encoding Parameters Table 5.12 Video Output Parameters Table 5.13 Video Component Parameters Table 5.14 Audio Input Parameters Table 5.15 Audio Encoding Standards Table 5.16 MPEG-1 Layer 2 Parameters /1553-FGC Uen Y 5-3

188 Web GUI Control Table 5.17 Dolby Digital Parameters Table 5.18 AAC-LC Parameters Table 5.19 HE-AAC Parameters Table 5.20 LPCM Pass-thru Parameters Table 5.21 Dolby E Pass-thru Parameters Table 5.22 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus Pass-thru Parameters Table 5.23 Audio Description Service Parameters Table 5.24 Automatic Loudness Control Parameters Table 5.25 Audio Component Parameters Table 5.26 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters Table 5.27 Splicing Parameters Table 5.28 Slicing Component Parameters Table 5.29 Teletext Parameters Table 5.30 Teletext Component Parameters Table 5.31 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters Table 5.32 ANC component Parameters Table 5.33 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters Table 5.34 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters Table 5.35 Video Encoding Parameters Table 5.36 Output Entropy Encoding Table 5.37 Video Output Parameters Table 5.38 Video Component Parameters Table 5.39 Available Multichannel Encoding Profiles/Levels Table 5.40 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters Table 5.41 ARC Parameters Table 5.42 Audio Input Parameters Table 5.43 Audio Encoding Standards Table 5.44 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters Table 5.45 Dolby Digital Parameters Table 5.46 AAC-LC Parameters Table 5.47 HE-AAC Parameters Table 5.48 Pass-thru Parameters Table 5.49 Audio Description Service Parameters Table 5.50 Audio Component Parameters Table 5.51 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters Table 5.52 Splicing Parameters Table 5.53 Slicing Component Parameters Table 5.54 Teletext Parameters Table 5.55 Teletext Component Parameters Table 5.56 Ancillary Data Parameters Table 5.57 ANC Component Parameters Table 5.58 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters Table 5.59 General Transport Stream Settings Table 5.60 Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams Table 5.61 Service Settings Table 5.62 FEC Parameters Table 5.63 Column FEC Table 5.64 Column and Row FEC Table 5.65 VLAN Creation Options Table 5.66 VLAN Tag Sharing Options /1553-FGC Uen Y

189 Web GUI Control 5.1 Using the Web Graphical User Interface The AVP 4000 is designed to be configured and controlled by its own web graphical user interface (GUI). The Graphical User Interface uses widget based architecture. This section describes the functions and elements of the GUI Appearance and General Features The appearance and the main components of the Graphical User Interface are shown in Figure 5.1. Pages Tabs Alarm Status Bar Widgets Figure 5.1 Main Components of the GUI Header The header contains the Company Logo, the Model Name and the Unit Name, the Alarm Status Bar, the Output Status Indicators, and the name of the recently loaded configuration, if any. Figure 5.2 Header 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-5

190 Web GUI Control The unit can be easily identified by the Unit Name when browsing remotely. The name can be changed by double clicking on it. The color of the Alarm Status Bar indicates the highest actual alarm severity. The bar is red in case of an alarm with critical severity, orange if an alarm or warning with any severity other than critical and no alarm with critical severity is issued, and green otherwise Navigation Area The unit is controlled through five different web pages, each of them responsible for a well-defined control task. The pages can be accessed through the top menu in the Navigation area. Where appropriate, control tasks are further broken down into smaller subtasks. Each subtask has its own tab. Figure 5.3 Navigation Area Widgets The area below the tabs serves as a taskbar with two buttons on it. The Apply All button allows the user to commit the changes made to any of the parameters on the displayed page or tab. With the Discard All button the changes can be revoked and the state prior to the modifications can be recalled. Modified parameters are highlighted in orange. If the user first modifies some parameters and then tries to navigate away from the page or tab, a warning dialog is displayed. The buttons do not appear on every page. The information next to the buttons displays the number of running tasks and the processing status of them. Widgets are containers that allow the user to perform specific actions or display relevant information. Widget can be resized by dragging the splitters between them. By double clicking on the splitters the widgets can be collapsed to provide more room for neighboring widgets. Double clicking on a splitter again redisplays the previously hidden element. Figure 5.4 Example of a Widget 5-6 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

191 Web GUI Control Where relevant, objects can be manipulated by drag and drop within or between the widgets. Note: Avoid sudden mouse movements while dragging and dropping Accordion Panels Accordion panels are separate areas within widgets which can be collapsed and expanded by clicking on the small arrow on the top left hand of the panel. Figure 5.5 Example of an Accordion Panel Footer The footer on the page displays copyright information and contains a link through which Ericsson can be contacted. Moreover, the color of the footer indicates the status of the link to the unit being controlled through the web user interface. Orange color indicates that the link to the unit is down; navy blue indicates that the link is up. Figure 5.6 Footer Supported Actions and Features Drag and Drop The web GUI supports drag and drop, for example in the Configuration > Services page, to enables you to quickly copy services and profiles. Additionally, when selecting services and profiles, the web GUI supports Shift-Click operation to enables you to select multiple adjacent items, and Ctrl-Click operation when selecting multiple non-adjacent items. Drop-Down Menus Some web GUI pages provide drop-down menus to enables you to select from the available options. Right-Click/Context Menus Some web GUI pages provide right-click menus for speedier configuration. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-7

192 Web GUI Control Parameter Highlighting When you modify service and profile properties, any changes you make will be highlighted as orange text. These changes will not be carried out until they are confirmed, by clicking the Apply All green button. Web Page Resizing and Collapsing To enable you to view just the information that you need, the panes displayed on some web pages may be resized by dragging the pane boundary, or collapsed by clicking on the symbol in the pane boundary. If your monitor screen width is less than 1300 pixels, panes may be collapsed automatically Pages The control options of the unit are grouped into five categories. Each of the categories is represented by a page. They are as follows: Dashboard Stored Configurations Device Configuration Service Configuration Support Each page is described in the following sections and the descriptions are followed by tasks that can be performed on these pages. 5.2 Dashboard Page The Dashboard page provides detailed information about the device and the Transport Streams. Figure 5.7 Dashboard Page 5-8 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

193 Web GUI Control Dashboard Widgets Outputs Widget The Outputs widget lists the items within the Transport Streams set up for the different outputs. If you want to quickly edit the properties of an item (other than the output itself), select it by clicking on its name with the left mouse button, then either select the Edit Properties option from the Actions menu, or right click on the item and select the same option from the context menu. You will be directed to the Service Configuration page with the respective item selected in the Outputs widget there. Figure 5.8 Outputs Widget Bit Rate Utilization widget The Bit Rate Utilization widget provides status information about the different Transport Streams by color coding them according to the legend shown at the bottom of the Transport Stream Rates accordion panel. (For the meaning of the respective states and colors refer to Bit Rate Tracking.) Moreover, the useful and total bit rates of each Transport Stream are also shown. Click on a Transport Stream here and a pie chart will be displayed in the Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream accordion panel with the bit rates of the individual services and components. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-9

194 Web GUI Control Figure 5.9 Bit Rate Utilization Widget Device Information Widget The Device Information widget provides information on the unit, the option cards and the network configuration. If there is a configuration mismatch in one of the slots, an alarm is raised and displayed in the Alarm Monitor widget. In this case, the Accept Hardware Configuration button is shown below the slot information. By clicking on the button, the current configuration can be accepted. After accepting the hardware configuration, the alarm is ceased /1553-FGC Uen Y

195 Web GUI Control Figure 5.10 Device Information Widget Alarm Monitor Widget The Alarm Monitor widget displays the current alarms and an alarm history sorted by severity. The alarms can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the arrow next to their name. Figure 5.11 Alarm Monitor Widget Using the Dashboard Page This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Dashboard page. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-11

196 Web GUI Control Accessing the Properties of Transport Streams, Services or Components Associated with an Output To directly access the properties of a Transport Stream, service or component from the Dashboard, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component whose parameters you want to access. 2. Right click on the selected item, and choose Edit Properties from the context menu. 3. The view will change to the Service Configuration page with the item selected in the Outputs widget. The Setmode state is reflected how the Transport Streams are color coded in the Transport Stream Rates accordion panel of the Bit Rate Utilization widget. The color codes are shown in Table 5.1. Table 5.1 Setmode State Color Codes State Online Offline Preview Retire Color green grey light green orange Checking the Bit Rates of the Different Components in a Transport Stream To check the bit rates of services and components in a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Transport Stream Rates accordion panel of the Bit Rate Utilization widget, click on the Transport Stream whose components you want to check. 2. The bit rates are shown in a table in the Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream accordion panel. The bit rates of the components are also shown if the mouse is hovered over a component in the pie chart /1553-FGC Uen Y

197 Web GUI Control Figure 5.12 Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream Accordion Panel Checking the Severity of Alarms To set the severity of any of the current alarms or any alarms raised since power up, do the following: 1. On the Current or History tab in the Alarm Monitor widget, click on the arrow next to the alarm whose severity you want to modify. 2. In the Severity drop down list, set the required severity level Accepting Hardware Configuration Changes When the persistent store is cleared, the hardware configuration settings are also deleted. After the unit is rebooted an alarm will be raised to signify that the hardware configuration has been changed. This is normal and does not indicate any malfunction. To clear the alarm, do the following: 1. In the Option Slot Summary accordion of the Device Configuration widget, click on the Accept Hardware Configuration. 2. The respective alarms are cleared. 5.3 Stored Configurations Page The Stored Configuration page allows saving the current configuration to or restoring a stored configuration from the unit. To load or save a configuration through the front panel, select Manage Configuration. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-13

198 Web GUI Control Figure 5.13 Stored Configurations Page Stored Configuration Page Widgets This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Stored Configurations page Stored Configurations Widget The Stored Configurations widget lists 64 slots to which configurations can be saved or from which configurations can be restored. If you click on an entry, the corresponding information is shown in the Configuration Workbench widget. Figure 5.14 Stored Configuration Widget /1553-FGC Uen Y

199 Web GUI Control Configuration Workbench Widget The Configuration Workbench widget displays the information about the slot selected in the Stored Configurations widget. Moreover, it lets the user overwrite, restore, delete or export the configuration in the selected slot. Figure 5.15 Configuration Workbench Widget Note: The format of the files exported through the Stored Configurations page is not compatible with the format of the configurations saved on the Support page Using the Stored Configuration Page This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Stored Configuration Page Storing the Current Configuration The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. Configurations can be saved at any time. To save the current configuration, do the following: 1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the slot you want to use for storing the configuration. If the slot is not empty, it will be overwritten. 2. In the Name field in the Configuration Workbench widget, enter a name for the configuration. 3. You can also add a description in the Description field if you wish. The description can help identifying the configuration in the future. 4. Click on the Save Config button within the Configuration Workbench widget. 5. A confirmation dialog will appear. Choose Yes to save the configuration in the selected slot. Once stored the configuration is available to be recalled and used at any time. The table below describes each main action associated with the stored configurations. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-15

200 Web GUI Control Table 5.2 Parameter Restore Save Config Delete Browse Import Export Stored Configuration Parameters Description Restores the configuration from the selected stored onto the unit. Select required stored number and press Restore Saves the current unit configuration into the selected store location. Select required store number, enter Name and Description and press Save Config Delete contents, name and description of selected store. Select required store number and press Delete Selection of a file stored on the external computer on which the browser session is being run. Used in conjunction with Import. Imports a configuration from file to selected store location. Browse to required file and select Import. This does not affect unit configuration. The file being imported must be in the same format (ie exported from the stored configurations function rather than the save-load XML To export the selected configuration to a file, move the mouse pointer over the link, right click and select Save target as... or Save link as..., dependent on the browser you are using. You will then be prompted for a filename and a place to store the file. Give the file a.xml extension. Update Properties Refreshes the contents of the list and the workbench from the unit Restoring a Configuration The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. Configurations can be restored at any time. To restore a previously stored configuration, do the following: 1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to restore. 2. The Configuration Workbench widget will display the properties of the selected stored configuration. 3. To restore the configuration, click the Restore button in the Configuration Workbench widget Exporting a Configuration The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. The content of any of the slots can be exported. Exported configurations from a previous version of the unit can be fed to the Configuration Converter Tool and converted to the current version. To export a previously stored configuration, do the following: 1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to restore. 2. The Configuration Workbench widget will display the properties of the selected stored configuration. 3. To export the configuration, click the Export button in the Configuration Workbench widget. 4. In the popup window, select the Save file option. 5. The location of the downloaded file will depend on your browser settings /1553-FGC Uen Y

201 Web GUI Control Note: The format of files exported from a Stored Configurations page is not compatible with the files saved on the General tab of the Support page. Similarly files saved on the Support page cannot be imported into stored configurations Importing a Configuration The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. The content of any of the slots can be exported. Exported configurations from a previous version of the unit can be fed to the Configuration Converter Tool and converted to the current version. To import a converted configuration, do the following: 1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the slot you want to use to store the imported configuration. 2. Click on the Browse button within the Configuration Workbench widget. 3. In the popup window, browse to the file you want to import, and click Open. 4. The file name will be populated into the text box next to the Browse button. 5. Click on the Import button. 6. Answer Yes to the confirmation message. Note: The format of files exported from the Stored Configurations page is not compatible with the files saved on the General tab of the Support page. Similarly files saved on the Support page cannot be imported into stored configurations. 5.4 Device Configuration Page The Device Configuration page provides setup options for the device and provides access to the following tabs: Quick Setup Tab Advanced Setup Tab Quick Setup Tab The Quick Setup tab provides access to the most commonly used parameters. The list of parameters displayed here can be customized and even exported. The tab contains the Configuration Items, the Properties, and the Configuration Change Log widgets. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-17

202 Web GUI Control Figure 5.16 Quick Setup Tab Configurations Items Widget The Configuration Items widget displays the Quick Setup menu as a tree. The tree contains the most commonly used parameters. These include default parameters as well as the parameters added by the user. Figure 5.17 Configuration Items Widget For information on how to add your own parameters to the tree, go to Properties Widget The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected in the Configuration Items widget. When a value of a property is changed its label is highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change is committed or abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on the taskbar, respectively /1553-FGC Uen Y

203 Web GUI Control Figure 5.18 Properties Widget Advanced Setup Tab The Advanced Setup tab provides access to all configuration options of the unit and consists of the Advanced Video Processor Settings and the Properties widgets. Figure 5.19 Advanced Setup Tab Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget The Advanced Video Processor Settings widget displays a tree view of all configuration items available on the unit organized into different folders for easier navigation. The properties of the selected node (if any) are displayed in the Properties widget. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-19

204 Web GUI Control Figure 5.20 Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget Properties Widget The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget. When a value of a property is changed, its label is highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change is committed or abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on the taskbar, respectively. Fan speed may be controlled by adjusting the slider to the appropriate setting. Figure 5.21 Properties Widget /1553-FGC Uen Y

205 Web GUI Control Using the Device Configuration Page This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Device Configuration page Customizing the Quick Setup menu The Configuration Items widget displays the Quick Setup menu as a tree. The tree contains the most commonly used parameters. These include default parameters as well as the parameters added by the user. To add your own parameters to the tree, do the following: 1. Open the Customize Items dialog by selecting Actions > Customize Items. 2. In the Configuration Items widget of the Customize Items dialog, select the Quick Setup Items node, and select Actions > Add Folder. 3. Double click on the newly created node, and rename it to a more descriptive name. 4. Scroll down to the item you want to add to your custom list in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget. 5. By holding down the left mouse button, drag the item over the new folder in the Configuration Items widget. 6. Add the item to the new folder by releasing the mouse button. The item cannot be added to the Quick Setup Items node. Any valid drop position is indicated by the dragging rectangle changing into green. 7. Repeat the process for any additional items you want to add. You can create as many folders as you wish or you can use any previously created one. The created folders can be reordered by the drag and drop technique used for adding the item. The added items can also be relocated through drag and drop. To delete a folder or an item, select it then choose Action > Remove Item. 8. When ready, click Save to save the changes. The new items are added to the Quick Setup menu. Note: The list of added items can be exported by selecting Action > Export and can be imported on another unit by Action > Import. The Settings widget of the Customize Items dialog displays all the options available to be set regardless of the visibility of the individual items. (Normally, some items might be hidden depending on the settings selected for other parameters.) When such an item is added to the Configuration Items list and the list is saved, the item will only show up on the Quick Setup list if the other parameters controlling its visibility are changed to the correct value. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-21

206 Web GUI Control Configuring Option Cards Using the Device Configuration Page This section gives the tables of parameters available for configuring the option cards using the Device Configuration Web Page ASI Option Card The ASI Option module provides ASI outputs for the transmission of MPEG-2 Transport Streams. When an ASI option module is fitted in a base chassis, the host detects its presence and adds the option to configure a Transport Stream to be output over ASI ASI Output Configuration The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - ASI IO Option Card > ASI IO Option Card > ASI Output Streams. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/ASI/ASI Output Streams menu on the front panel. Table 5.3 ASI Output Configuration Parameters Parameter Values Description Output Mode Mirrored, Independent Specifies whether the two outputs output the same Transport Stream or they operate independently. If set to Mirrored, only one output will be accessible External Sync Input Option Card The External Sync Input Option Card has no configurable parameters. To configure the external sync input to be used as the clock source, from the web interface, browse to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and under Base Unit set the MUX SCR Source to External. Alternatively, on the front panel use the External option under Advanced/System/Base Unit/MUX SCR Source EI9001(T) Option Card It is recommended that the configuration of the EI9001 and EI9001T cards is done through the Service Configuration Page Configuring Base Unit LDAP User Authentication This section describes the options for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) that can be used to authenticate a user before full access is granted to the AVP via the Web GUI through the parameters available via the page Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options /1553-FGC Uen Y

207 Web GUI Control Figure 5.22 Remote Authentication and HTTP Server Option Properties When authenticated, the user retains access to the AVP for that browser session. If the session is closed, the user must re-authenticate. The AVP does not offer different levels of access: once a user is authenticated, all functionality is available to that user. Table 5.4 LDAP Authentication Configuration Parameters Parameter Values Description Authentication Off, Basic, LDAP Test, LDAP Authentication Off: No user authentication is performed Basic: the username and password presented on this page are used to access the AVP web UI LDAP Test: a short-term configuration of LDAP used to check the settings. The settings will be applied for 2 minutes. The user will be asked for username and password and the AVP will attempt to authenticate these details against the LDAP server. The results are printed on this page. After the test, this setting will be turned to Off. LDAP Authentication: user access to the web UI is controlled through user authentication against the configured LDAP server. Disable HTTP Access (HTTPS is always On) LDAP Host IP Address LDAP Bind Dn LDAP Bind Password Off, On Off: Both HTTP and HTTPS access to the web UI is available on the control interface. On: Only HTTPS access is available on the control interface. HTTPS uses a self-signed certificate and this cannot be changed. The LDAP server s IP address. The AVP does not support DNS. The BIND distinguished name. This information must be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server. The password for binding to the LDAP server. This information must be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-23

208 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description LDAP Base Dn LDAP Entry Filter The root distinguished name used to query the LDAP server. This information must be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server. Filter detail for the LDAP sever. This information must be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server. Start TLS Off, On Enables TLS (transport layer security). Off: Communication between the AVP and the LDAP server will be in clear text. On: Communication between the AVP and the LDAP server will be encrypted. This may result in a slower response from the AVP. Default LDAP Authentication Behaviour Positive Authentication, Negative Authentication If the LDAP server is out of contact for any reason, the behavior of user authentication can be selected to either reject the user (Negative Authentication), or accept the user and permit the user to operate the web UI (Positive Authentication). All activity is logged. Note: When LDAP Authentication is active, there is no special administrator access. If Negative Authentication is selected, and the LDAP server is unavailable, or mistakes have been made on entering the parameters for the LDAP server, the AVP WILL BE LOCKED FOR ALL USERS. Ericsson Customer Services must be contacted to assist on regaining access. It is strongly recommended to use the LDAP Test Authentication setting to check parameter entry and LDAP server access, before committing to the LDAP Authentication setting. See Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to Configure User Authentication. 5.5 Service Configuration Page The Service Configuration page provides setup options for the outputs of the device. Figure 5.23 Service Configuration Video Page /1553-FGC Uen Y

209 Web GUI Control Service Configuration Page Widgets Inputs Widget The Inputs widget shows the available components sorted by input. Any component on this list can be added to the outputs provided that there is a valid license to do so or the number of times a component can be reused has not been exceeded. Figure 5.24 Inputs Widget Outputs Widget The Outputs widget lists the inputs and outputs of the device, respectively. The Edit menu of the Outputs widget provides Copy, Cut and Paste commands to copy or move Transport Streams, services, and components. Components can be dragged and dropped from the Inputs widget to the services listed in the Outputs widget, and can also be dragged and dropped within the Outputs widget. Drag and drop moves the item, Ctrl + drag and drop copies the item. Items cannot be dropped arbitrarily: components can only be dropped on services, services on Transport Streams, and Transport Streams on outputs. A valid drop location is indicated by a green rectangle. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-25

210 Web GUI Control Figure 5.25 Outputs Widget Properties Widget The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected either in the Inputs or in the Outputs widget. When a value of a property is changed, its label is highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change is committed or abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on the taskbar, respectively. Depending on which item is selected in the Inputs and Outputs widget, the properties are displayed in different accordion panels in the Properties widget. Figure 5.26 Properties Widget Note: If a component is selected in the Outputs widget, its source is also highlighted in the Inputs widget and the other way around. This makes it easy to identify corresponding components /1553-FGC Uen Y

211 Web GUI Control Using the Service Configuration Page This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Service Configuration page Adding a Transport Stream to an Output To add a Transport Stream to an output, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to. 2. Right click on the selected output. 3. Select Add Transport Stream from the context menu. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to. 2. Click Action > Add Transport Stream. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to. 2. Right click on the selected output and choose Add Transport Stream from the context menu. Note: Outputs other than the IP outputs cannot have more Transport Streams associated to them Adding a Service to a Transport Stream To add a service to a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to. 2. Right click on the selected Transport Stream. 3. Select Add Service from the context menu. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to. 2. Click Action > Add Service. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to. 2. Right click on the selected Transport Stream, and choose Add Service from the context menu. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-27

212 Web GUI Control Figure 5.27 Add Service Menu Adding a Component to a Transport Stream To add a component to a service, do the following: 1. In the Inputs widget select the component you want to add to a service in the Outputs widget. 2. Drag the component over the desired service in the Outputs widget. Note: To select more components to add, press and hold the< Ctrl key then click on the appropriate components in the Inputs widget. To select consecutive items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last item Deleting Transport Streams, Services or Components To delete a Transport Stream, service or component, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want to delete. 2. Press the Del key. 3. Answer Yes to the confirmation message. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want to delete. 2. Click Action > Delete Selected. OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want to delete /1553-FGC Uen Y

213 Web GUI Control 2. Right click on the selected item, and choose Delete Selected from the context menu. Figure 5.28 Deleting a Service Note: Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last item Manually Changing the Setmode State of a Transport Stream To change the Setmode state of a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream for which you want to change the Setmode state. 2. In the Properties widget, click on the Online or Offline button Copying Transport Streams, Services or Components To copy a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want copy. 2. Drag the selected Transport Stream, service or component over another output (when copying a Transport Stream), another Transport Stream (when copying a service) or another service (when copying a component). OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want copy. 2. Select Edit > Copy from the widget menu bar. 3. Select the output (when copying a Transport Stream), the Transport Stream (when copying a service) or the service (when copying a component) you want to copy the selected item to. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-29

214 Web GUI Control 4. Select Edit > Paste from the widget menu bar. Note: To select more Transport Streams, services or components, press and hold the Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last item Moving Transport Streams, Services or Components To move a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want move. 2. While holding down the Ctrl key, drag the selected Transport Stream, service or component over another output (when moving a Transport Stream), another Transport Stream (when moving a service) or another service (when moving a component). Figure 5.29 Dragging a Transport Stream or Service OR 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you want to move. 2. Select Edit > Cut from the widget menu bar. 3. Select the output (when moving a Transport Stream), the Transport Stream (when moving a service) or the service (when moving a component) you want to move the selected item to. 4. Select Edit > Paste from the widget menu bar. Note: To select more Transport Streams, services or components, press and hold the Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last item /1553-FGC Uen Y

215 Web GUI Control Cloning Transport Streams Transport Stream cloning allows the user to create a mirror of an existing Transport Stream. Mirrored Transport Streams are only references to the original one. Thus, any change in the original Transport Stream will be automatically applied in the mirrored Transport Stream. Note: No external Transport Streams, services, or components will show up under a mirrored Transport Stream in the Outputs widget of the Service Configuration page. Furthermore, when a mirrored Transport Stream is selected, the Properties widget will display a link to the original one, and will not display any parameters. Although the content of the mirrored and the original Transport Stream is the same, the physical output streams will not be identical bit-by-bit. This is due to the mechanism the Transport Streams are played out through the different outputs. To create a clone of an existing Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to clone. 2. Select Copy from the Edit menu on the menu bar of the Outputs widget. 3. Select the output you want to insert the clone to. 4. Choose Edit > Paste as Mirror. The Transport Stream will be pasted as a mirror at the selected Transport Stream Disabling a Transport Stream if Audio or Video Lock is Lost To disable the output when the input lock is lost for a component in a Transport Stream, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to disable when the lock of any of its components is lost. 2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Disable to Audio Lost, Video Lost, or Audio or Video Lost depending on what shall trigger turning the output off. 3. In the Outputs widget, select the video component whose lock state shall influence the Transport Stream output. 4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab, and set the Output On Video Loss to No PID. 5. In the Outputs widget, select the audio component whose lock state shall influence the Transport Stream output. 6. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab, and set the Output On Audio Loss to No PID. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-31

216 Web GUI Control Disabling a Transport Stream if a Critical Alarm or an Upstream Critical Alarm is Raised An upstream CRITICAL alarm is an alarm raised by a module that has direct influence on the Transport Stream. To disable the output when a critical alarm or an upstream CRITICAL alarm is raised, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to disable when a CRITICAL alarm or an upstream CRITICAL alarm is raised. 2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Disable to Any Critical Alarm or Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm. When a transport stream has been auto-disabled due to an ongoing alarm condition, any attempt to manually put the transport stream online will be rejected and an error message will be displayed Restoring a Transport Stream if the Auto Disable Condition is not Met To restore the output when the Auto Disable condition is cleared, do the following: 1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream whose Online state you want to restore. 2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Enable to true Reserving Bandwidth for Transport Streams Bandwidth reservation allows the user to reserve a configurable amount of bandwidth in the output Transport Streams. To specify the amount of bandwidth to reserve, do the following: 1. Select a Transport Stream in the Outputs widget. 2. In the Properties widget, set the Reserved Bit Rate to the required value Providing More Space for Configuration Items in the Properties Widget When a service has many components of different types, the Properties widget might get crowded with accordion panels that belong to the different components. To preserve space, some of the components (based on their types) can be hidden. To show or hide a component type, do the following: 1. Select a Transport Stream in the Outputs widget. 2. In the Properties widget, choose View > Visibility Control > Show x or View > Visibility Control > Hide y, where x and y is the type you want to show or hide Configuring Option Cards Using the Service Configuration Page This section gives the tables of parameters available for configuring the option cards using the Service Configuration Web Page /1553-FGC Uen Y

217 Web GUI Control EI9001 and EI9001T Video and VBI Stream Configuration Video Input The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the front panel menus. Table 5.5 Video Input Parameters Parameter Values Description Video Input Lock Yes, No Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified through the parameters below. Read only parameter. Source SDI The video will be sourced from the SDI/HD-SDI input on the rear panel. HD Auto Input Detection Detected Video Format Video Input Format Display Slate after Sensitivity Delay Daughter Card (i.e. IP input to the Transcoder) VCM in slot (N-1) Color Bars Black Moving Object Slate Off, HD 25/50Hz, HD 29.97/59.94Hz HD 1080i25, HD 720p50, HD 1080i29.97, HD 720p59.94 SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97 Off, On The input Transport Stream to the chassis, via IP, is routed to the Transcoder Card 1. It is possible to use the input presented to the card to also be used on the card in the next higher slot number. An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used as the video source. An internally generated black test pattern will be used as the video source. An internally generated moving object test pattern will be used as the video source. The full Slate uploaded by the user will be used as the video source. Automatic detection and configuration of video encoding according to the incoming video format for HD video only. For incoming SD video, select Off. Shows the video format of incoming video as detected by the AVP Read only parameter and only present if HD Auto Input Detection is active. Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the Video Profile used for encoding. Disables or enables delayed action upon Video Input Lock Loss (see first entry above). The delayed action is always to display a slate, which must have been loaded (see Slate File entry below). The immediate action is that defined below in Output on Video Loss, but Freeze Frame is recommended when using the delayed slate display. Sensitivity Delay 3 to 60 seconds Only present if the parameter above is set to On. Video input lock must have been lost for approximately that duration before the slate is automatically displayed. The same delay is applied when regaining lock before removing the slate. Output On Video Loss Freeze Frame Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-33

218 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Adaptive Preprocessing Black Color Bars No PID Slate On, Off Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input. Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input. The video PID no longer transmitted. SI is not updated. Switches to the full Slate uploaded by the user. Input filter to prevent excessive blocking, if the license enabled. MCTRF Off, Default, Strong. Available with the AVP/SWO/SD/PREMIUM or AVP/SWO/HD/PREMIUM. Horizontal Bandwidth 30 to 100% Sets the video horizontal bandwidth filter. Half Line Removal Off, On Enables or disables the removal of black half lines at the top of the picture by substituting video data from adjacent lines. The option is available when Video Input Format is set to SD 576i25. Logo Logo file The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Logo insertion Off, On Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can be selected under Logo file. A fixed logo position? On, Off Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying the logo on the video. If On, the position of the logo is fixed according to the position held within the logo file. If Off, the position of the logo is determined by the coordinates entered in the X and Y position boxes. The X position of the logo The Y position of the logo The position relative to left of the screen 0 (number of pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if a fixed logo position is set to Off. The position relative to top of screen 0 (number of video lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if a fixed logo position is set to Off. Slate Slate File The file to use as a Slate. The selected file can be uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Advanced Slate Display Options Freeze Frame Detect Off, On Disables or enables delayed slate display upon detection of frozen video frames. The feature uses hysteresis delays defined next. Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery seconds seconds The video component must be frozen for approximately this number of seconds for the slate to be triggered by this feature. A specific alarm is also raised while a slate is displayed for this reason (see section ). The Freeze Frame condition is removed after this number of seconds with active video. Please note: the slate may remain on display for other reasons /1553-FGC Uen Y

219 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Freeze Frame and Silence Detect Detect Detect Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Silent Audio Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Detect Detect Detect Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Time Threshold Before Slate Time Threshold Before Recovery Audio Threshold -100 dbfs to dbfs The selected audio component will be deemed silent if all of its channel have a volume level below this threshold. Audio Selection Audio Stream 1 to 16 Audio component on which to perform silence detection (applicable to Freeze Frame and Silence and Silent Audio detection), if possible: silence detection is not available for pass-through components. 1 Only available for E9001T licensed with AVP/SWO/TRANS. Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel. Table 5.6 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters Parameter Values Description Timecode TC Mode TC External Source Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel on Loss, Internal Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI VITC Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in, either Off, external source or internally generated. Also sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or freewheel). Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select the first source present in order of the drop down list. VBI Line Control Manual, RX8 Selects if the VBI line control is set by the user, or determined automatically by the RX8 decoder (EI9001T card only). TC Dropframes Off, On, Auto Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external source, or to ON for internal source. Field 1 VBI Line 9 - VBI Line 22 Off, VITC, Closed Captions, Monochrome Samples Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, Closed Caption for closed caption information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-35

220 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description VBI Line 6 - VBI Line 22 Off, VITS, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line) input streams. VBI Line 23 Off, WSS, WSS-AFD Specifies the content of VBI line 23 for 576i (625 line) input streams. Field 2 VBI Line VBI Line 285 VBI Line VBI Line 335 Off, VITC, Closed Captions, Monochrome Samples Off, VITS, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, Closed Caption for closed caption information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams. Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and Teletext System B for Teletext. Aspect Ratio Conversion The following parameters are available on the ARC tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected on the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Input/Video Aspect Ratio (AR) Conversion menu on the front panel. Table 5.7 Aspect Ratio Parameters Parameter Values Description Use Input AFD Off, On If set to On, AFD codes present on the input will be used to control the aspect ratio conversion. If set to Off, the Default Aspect Ratio Conversion will always be used. Default Aspect Ratio Conversion Video Index 1 Anamorphic, Center Cut, Letterbox Off, On (Default), On (User) Specifies what aspect ratio conversion will be done if not using the AFD codes present on the input. Video Index Field to 22 2 Specifies which line contains the video index in field to 22 3 Video Index Field to Specifies which line contains the video index in field to SMPTE 2016 Default Input Aspect Ratio Off, On 4:3, 16:9 WSS-AFD Configure using VBI lines section Read-only, informative text. Action on AFD lost Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000 out. Convert as specified in Default and put AFD code out. Specifies what aspect ratio conversion is performed when AFD is not present on the input /1553-FGC Uen Y

221 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Action on AFD Code 0000 AFD Sustain Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000 out. Convert as specified in Default and put AFD code out. Maintain previously received AFD code indefinitely. Maintain previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to default, i.e. code Maintain previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD off. Specifies what aspect ratio conversion is performed if the AFD code on the input is code 0000, which is a reserved code. Specifies what AFD is signaled on the output when the AFD is no longer present on the input. AFD Sustain Timeout 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120 Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. 0 means drop to default immediately on loss. 1 Only applicable for SD input. 2 Only applicable for 576i25 input. 3 Only applicable for 480i2997 input. Video Encoding The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel. Table 5.8 Main Video Encoding Parameters Parameter Values Description Profile SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit SD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile Main level 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High level 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the allowed bit rate range. Resolution 352 x 576, 480 x 576, 528 x 576, 544 x 576, 640 x 576, 704 x 576, 720 x 576, 352 x 480, 480 x 480, 528 x 480, 544 x 480, 640 x 480, 704 x 480, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, 1920 x 1080 Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the encoded video. The available options depend on the values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile. Buffer Mode CBR Constant Bit Rate operation. Seamless Sets a mode in which a change in video bit rate parameter does not cause an interruption in the output stream. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-37

222 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Video Bit Rate Maximum VBR Minimum VBR Fast Channel Zap Capped VBR The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile. Range as allowed by the Video profile. 2 Mbps to 15 Mbps Range as allowed by the Video profile. 2 Mbps to 15 Mbps Allows the encoding buffer to be controlled to ensure a fix channel Zap time, whatever the bit rate value is. Set the mode to Capped VBR where the video bit rate changes depending on the complexity of the encoded pictures. Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only. In Capped VBR mode, this is the maximum Video Bit rate that the encoder can possibly output. The video bit rate out of the encoder can reach this value when the video material is very complex. In Capped VBR mode, this is the minimum Video Bit rate that the encoder can possibly output. The video bit rate out of the encoder can reach this value when the video material is very easy. Min. Seamless Bit rate Range as allowed by the Video Profile. In Seamless mode, this is the minimum Video Bit rate that the encoder can possibly output. Lookahead On, Off In Fast Channel Zap mode, this allows lookahead to be turned off. If turned off, there may be a reduction in picture quality. Aspect Ratio 4:3, 16:9, Follow Input Signaling of the picture aspect ratio. This setting does not affect the video processing. The downstream decoder will use this setting in the absence of other information (e.g. WSS in VBI). GOP Length 4 to 250 Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream. GOP Structure IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP, Auto Sets the number of B frames between reference frames. IBBBBBBBP is only available for 720p video format Closed GOPs Off, On Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in which the predicted frames can have their reference from outside the group. Scene Cut Detection On, Off When enabled, minimizes the negative effect the scene changes have on the bit rate by inserting an I-Frame when a change is detected. It also affects the GOP length. Delay Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only parameter. Target Quality Percent, from 30 to 100 In Seamless or Capped VBR modes, this gives an indication to the encoder on how to trade off the quality of the picture against bitrate. Higher quality will require a higher bit rate. Buffer Delay Milliseconds In Seamless, Fast Channel Zap and Capped VBR modes, this sets the delay of the video buffer. Lookahead Delay Milliseconds In Seamless mode this allows additional delay to be added to the encoding path to allow for remote Reflex operation. Stills Detection On, Off In Seamless mode, This allows the detection of a still picture to be signalled to the MUX in Reflex operation, to allow a bit rate saving. Premium Functionality On, Off Displays premium functionality features, when licensed /1553-FGC Uen Y

223 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Stills Detection Off, On Detects if the video is a still picture, and adjusts the encoded video bit rate accordingly when operating in VBR mode. Film Mode* Off, On Sets encoding parameters that give better image quality for film like sources. Available only for frame rates of or Hz when the resolution is set to other than SIF. Inloop Filter # High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can increase picture sharpness. SEI Encapsulation Mode # Combined, Mediaroom Sets the SEI messages in combined mode where all the SEI messages are combines into one NAL unit or into Mediaroom mode compliance where each SEI message has its own NAL start. * Only applicable when the video profile is set to MPEG-2. # Only applicable when the video profile is set to H.264. Only applicable when the video profile is set to MPEG-2 and the frame rate is Hz or Hz. Second Video Encoding The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Video/Second Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel. Table 5.9 Secondary Video Encoding Parameters Parameter Values Description Profile Profile Off, SD MPEG-2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit, SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit, SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit, Sets the encoder profile. The profile will affect the allowed bit-rate range. The secondary video encode will be of the same coding standard as the primary video encode. Resolution 720 x 576, 720 x 480 Read Only. Indicates the horizontal and vertical resolution of the secondary encoded video. This is fixed, and dependent on the main encoded video component for frame rate. Buffer Mode CBR Read Only. The second video is run at Constant Bit Rate in order to align the timing with the Main Video. Video Bit Rate The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile. Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only. Aspect Ratio 4:3, 16:9, Follow Input Signaling of the picture aspect ratio. This setting does not affect the video processing. The downstream decoder will use this setting in the absence of other information (e.g. WSS in VBI). GOP Length 4 to 250 Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream. GOP Structure IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, Auto Sets the number of B frames between reference frames. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-39

224 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Closed GOPs Off, On Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in which the predicted frames can have their reference from outside the group. Delay Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only parameter. Inloop Filter High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can increase picture sharpness. SEI Encapsulation Mode 2 Combined, Mediaroom Sets the SEI messages in combined mode where all the SEI messages are combines into one NAL unit or into Mediaroom mode compliance where each SEI message has its own NAL start. 1 Only applicable when the video profile is set to MPEG-2. 2 Only applicable when the video profile is set to H.264. Specific Notes on Second Video The Main Video and the Second Video (this also applies to the PiP Component) originate from the same input; therefore they naturally share the timing information: They have the same clock reference (PCR) value in the stream, whether they use embedded PCR or a separate PCR component. Their timing (PTS) are aligned, and it is therefore possible to share audio components from the same card. Restrictions on the Second Video Compared to the Main Video The Second Video supports SD encoding only and does not support HD encoding resolutions. The codec for the secondary video component is restricted to that detailed in the table below. Table 5.10 Restrictions on Secondary Video Component Coding Standard Primary Video Component Coding Standard Secondary Video Component Coding Standard SD MPEG-2 Off, SD MPEG-2, SD H.264 SD H.264 Off, SD H.264 HD MPEG-2 Off, SD MPEG-2 HD H.264 Off, SD H.264 The Second Video component (this also applies to the PiP component) cannot be added to the same service as the Main Video component. It can be only be added to a separate service. The Second Video can be turned Off by setting the Video profile to Off. The Second Video only supports CBR, and therefore does not support VBR and Reflex. The Premium License does not apply to the Second Video /1553-FGC Uen Y

225 Web GUI Control PIP Video Encoding Output The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output menu on the front panel. Table 5.11 PIP Video Encoding Parameters Parameter Values Description Profile Resolution Off, PIP H.264 Baseline Profile Level 1.3 4:2:0 8 bit PIP H.264 Main Profile Level 1.3 4:2:0 8 bit 96x96, 128x96, 192x x288, 352x240 (SIF)* Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the allowed bit rate range. Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the encoded video. The available options depend on the values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile. Buffer Mode CBR Pip is always set to Constant Bit Rate operation. Video Bit Rate The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile. Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video component. Aspect Ratio 4:3, 16:9, Follow Input Signaling of the picture aspect ratio. This setting does not affect the video processing. The downstream decoder will use this setting in the absence of other information (e.g. WSS in VBI). GOP Length 4 to 250 Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream. GOP Structure IP, IBP, IBBP,Auto Sets the number of B frames between reference frames. For the Baseline profile, the only GOP structure selectable is IP. Delay SEI Encapsulation Mode Combined, Mediaroom Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only parameter. Sets the SEI messages in combined mode where all the SEI messages are combines into one NAL unit or into Mediaroom mode compliance where each SEI message has its own NAL start. * Only applicable to 480i29.97, 1080i29.97 and 720p59.94 video inputs. Video Output The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output menu on the front panel. Table 5.12 Video Output Parameters Parameter Values Description Embedded PCR Off, On, On (Picture Header) Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video. If it is set to other than Off, the PCR PID field of a service will become read only and will contain the PID of the current component. Copyright Off, On Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-41

226 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Original Off, On Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header. PES Packet Per 1 GOP, Picture Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is used. AU Information Ctrl Off, RAI, RAI and AU Info Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation Field for video Access Units (AU). This can be: Random Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI (AU info), Time Code (TC) and Additional Info (Encoding info and BroadcasterID). AR Signaling Sequence Hdr, Picture Hdr, Seq and Pic Hdrs In MPEG-2 encoding, signaling of the aspect ratio can be Location 1 in the sequence header, picture header or both. Closed Captions 3 Off, ATSC Insert closed captions into the video bitstream. TC Output Location 2 Off, SEI Determines the locations used to transmit Time code information in the stream. Time code can be carried by the sequence header, the sequence and picture headers for MPEG-2 or a SEI message for H Only present if encoding in MPEG-2. 2 Only present if encoding in H Only present for input sources at frame rates 29.97, frames per second. Video Component The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front panel. Table 5.13 Video Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20 Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. Source PID Monitoring None, Monitor, Monitor & Redundancy Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID can be enabled, and can be set to cause a redundancy switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by Ericsson control software. Only used for IP sources Audio Stream Configuration Audio Input The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Audio Module/Audio <n>/input menu on the front panel /1553-FGC Uen Y

227 Web GUI Control Table 5.14 Audio Input Parameters Parameter Values Description Input Format Input Source Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby E, AAC Off, Mute, Test Tone -18dB, Test Tone -20dB, Embedded 1 to 8 Sets the input format used by the audio encoder. Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes a 1 khz test tone at the given amplitude (referenced to full scale), Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI embedded audio stream. Output On Audio Loss No PID, Silence Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for encode silence. NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the output Transport Stream. Downmix Parameters Downmix Type Lo/Ro downmix, Lt/Rt downmix Specifies the downmix type. Downmix metadata override Downmix metadata reversion mode Off, on. If available, maintain last received metatdata values, otherwise use fixed settings, Use fixed settings. Specifies the downmix override. Specifies the downmix metadata reversion mode. Center mix level (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db). Specifies the center mix level. Surround mix level (-3.0 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db). Specifies the surround mix level. Use preferred stereo downmix if available. Audio Status Off, on Enables the preferred stereo downmix, if available. Audio Locked No, Yes Specifies audio signal is locked. Downmix active No, Yes Specifies the downmix is active. Downmix active Lo/Ro downmix, Lt/Rt downmix Specifies the downmix type. Level (L) 0 Specifies the left channel level. Level (R) 0 Specifies the right channel level. PCM Bypass Active No, Yes Specifies if PCM Bypass is active. Only valid for Dolby E decoding. Switchout Active No, Yes Specifies if switchout is active. Only valid for Dolby E decoding. Input Buffer Level 0 Specifies input buffer level. Input Bitrate 0 Specifies input bit rate (in kbps). Dolby Digital Sample Rate 0 Specifies Dolby Digital sample rate in (Hz). Only valid for Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding. Input Coding Mode N/A,??? Specifies if input coding mode is selected. Resync Count 0 Specifies the resync count. Bad RC Packets 0 Specifies the number of bad timing packets received by the audio processor. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-43

228 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Delay 1000 Specifies the delay??? (in ms). Operation Mode Line out mode,??? Specifies if operation mode. drchighcut 0.0 Specifies drchighcut. drclowboost 0.0 Specifies drclowboost. Audio Encoding The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Audio Module/Audio <n>/encode menu on the front panel. Table 5.15 Audio Encoding Standards Parameter Options Description Coding Standard MPEG Layer 2 MPEG Layer 2 Encode (more than two channel pairs require the AVP/SWO/M1L2 license). Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus AAC-LC HE-AAC Pass-thru Audio Description Service Dolby Digital encode, requires AVP/SWO/DOLBYAC3 license. Dolby Digital Plus encode, requires AVP/SWO/DOLBY/PLUS license. AAC-LC encoding, requires AVP/SWO/AAC license. HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2 encoding, requires AVP/SWO/AAC license. Pass-thru of the input. MPEG-1 Layer II encode of a mono audio track that describes action in the video plus a control track. Table 5.16 MPEG-1 Layer 2 Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384 Bit Rate of the audio stream. Coding Mode 1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio (8 Channels) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

229 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Language The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1) mode. Language (Left) The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1) mode. Language (Right) User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the right channel when in dual mono (1+1) mode. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in any of the language fields. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in any of the language fields. MPEG Version MPEG-1, MPEG-2 Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be signaled. Copyright Off, On Indicates if the material is copyright protected. Original Off, On Indicates if source is the original or a copy. De-emphasis Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17 To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to encoding. Audio Encoder Status Audio Encoder Status Coding Mode Encode Bit Rate Dolby Digital Encode Sample Rate N/A Indicates the selected encoding status. Indicates the selected encoding status Indicates the Dolby Digital encoding sample rate in Hz. Table 5.17 Dolby Digital Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. Coding Mode Metadata Controls Coding Mode 1/0 (Left input), 1/0 (Right input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Off, On Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if present). Metadata source type Embedded/Decoded Auto Selects where live metadata comes from. Metadata override type Metadata Reversion Mode None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm Last Used, Preset Defines which metadata parameters to override. Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live metadata. Metadata preset type 1 to 8 Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected for Metadata Reversion Mode. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-45

230 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.18 AAC-LC Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. Coding Mode 1/0 (Left input), 1/0 (Right input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Encapsulation MPEG-2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex. TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) Advanced Off, On Turns noise shaping on or off. Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.19 HE-AAC Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode /1553-FGC Uen Y

231 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Coding Mode 1/0 (Left input), 1/0 (Right input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Encapsulation MPEG-2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex. TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) Off, On Turns noise shaping on or off. SBR Signalling Explicit, Implicit Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.20 LPCM Pass-thru Parameters Parameter Values Description Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Ctrl Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Channel Mode 2 channel (stereo / dual mono) LPCM pass-thru will always pass thru both channels present in the incoming AES3 stream. Bit Depth 16-bit, 20-bit, 24-bit Select the expected bit depth of the audio words. This will affect the outgoing elementary stream bit rate. Channel Identification User defined channel identification number of the first audio channel in the outgoing SMPTE 302M stream saes3 data header. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language A selection of languages from across the world. The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors. Audio Stream Type Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired; Visual Impaired Intended use of the audio. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-47

232 Web GUI Control Table 5.21 Dolby E Pass-thru Parameters Parameter Values Description Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Ctrl Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Bit Depth 16-bit, 20-bit, 24-bit Select the expected bit depth of the audio words. This will affect the outgoing elementary stream bit rate. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Language A selection of languages from across the world. The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors. Audio Stream Type Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired; Visual Impaired Intended use of the audio. Table 5.22 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus Pass-thru Parameters Parameter Values Description Input Bit rate 16 to 640 kbps in discrete steps as defined by Dolby Bit rate of the incoming audio. The outgoing audio shall retain the same bit rate. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Ctrl Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Language A selection of languages from across the world. The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors. Audio Stream Type Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired; Visual Impaired Intended use of the audio. Table 5.23 Audio Description Service Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 64 Bit Rate of the audio stream. Coding Mode 1/0 (Left input) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

233 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Language A selection of languages from across the world. The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors. Audio Stream Type Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired; Visual Impaired Intended use of the audio. MPEG Version MPEG-1; MPEG-2 Standard to be used for the output compressed audio. Copyright Off; On Set the copyright bits in the MPEG headers. Original Off; On Set the original bits in the MPEG headers. De-emphasis Off; 50/15us; CCITT J.17 Set de-emphasis as applied to the audio, in the MPEG headers. Does not apply the appropriate pre-emphasis. Action on control track loss Action when silence is detected No action; Bit rate saving No action; Bit rate saving If Bit rate Saving is selected, there shall be no emitted elementary stream for Audio Description if the control track is not received. If Bit rate Saving is selected, there shall be no emitted elementary stream for Audio Description if silence is detected on the incoming audio track. Silence Threshold Decibels, -90 to -1, dbfs Threshold of incoming audio track, which, if below the threshold will be determined to be silence. Silence Period Time, seconds, Duration of silence as determined by the threshold, needed before Action when Silence is Detected will take place. Table 5.24 Automatic Loudness Control Parameters Parameter Values Description Operating Mode Off ALC is not in use. Measure Measure + ALC Measure + ALC + LTLC Long and short measurements are taken and displayed in the status but no audio adjustments are made. Measurements are taken and corrections are made for short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above the Target level. Measurements are taken and corrections are made for short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above the Target level. Corrections are also made over the longer term to adjust the channel loudness level to that of the Target Level. In this mode manual gain adjustment from the codec page is disabled. Target Level -40 to 0 (LKFS (LU) The desired Loudness level for the channel. Time Period 5 to 120 minutes This controls the responsiveness of the long term audio loudness level correction. A smaller number will result in the audio being adjusted more dynamically. A larger value will give a slower less noticeable adjustment. Peak Limit -20 to 0 dbfs This controls a hard clipping limiter for the audio level. This adjustment is based on the absolute peak level measured in dbfs. The peak limiter only operates in Measure + ALC and Measure + ALC + LTLC modes. If this value is set to 0 no limiting is performed 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-49

234 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Maximum Boost 0 to 10 db This control determines the maximum amount of gain that the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts. This only applies when the operating mode is Measure + ALC + LTLC Maximum Attenuation 0 to 10 db This control determines the maximum amount of attenuation that the ALC and the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts Preset Subtle, Standard, Strong The available options are Subtle, Standard and Strong. This setting controls the aggressiveness of the corrections performed by the Short Term ALC algorithm. It controls how quickly the correction takes place and the strength of the correction Reset Statistics True, false This can be used to reset the statistics that have been collected in the Audio Algorithm. Due to the slower update nature of the web interface the apparent change would be to the measurement of the Integrated Loudness only The reference target level Override dialnorm metadata Line out mode RF mode; Portable mode -14dB; Portable mode -1dB; Portable mode -8dB Off, on Sets the reference target level for downstream decoders. For Dolby encoding, the dialnorm parameter can be overridden with the Target Level. This is recommended practise. Audio Component The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.25 Audio Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 16 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only. Exclude from PMT False If set to True, this component will not be referenced in the PMT, and its bit rate is excluded from bit rate calculations. Source PID Monitoring None; Monitor; Monitor & Redundancy Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID can be enabled, and can be set to cause a redundancy switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by Ericsson control software. Only used for IP sources /1553-FGC Uen Y

235 Web GUI Control Dolby Metadata Presets Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - EI9001 >EI9001 > Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify. Alternatively, the settings can be reached through the front panel under Advanced/EI9001/Audio Module/Dolby Metadata Presets. Any of these presets can then be applied to any audio channel encoding audio in the Dolby Digital format. The table lists the parameters for each preset. Table 5.26 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters Parameter Values Description Preset name Dialogue normalization level Name of the preset (for user information) -31 to -1 db Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment required to achieve the set level. Bitstream mode Line mode compression profile RF mode compression profile Main audio service: complete main, music and effects, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: hearing impaired, Associated service: dialogue, Associated service: commentary, Associated service: emergency, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech Flags the type of service in the bitstream. Alters the dynamic range for line output. This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall level is raised by 11dB. Center mix level (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db) Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only. Surround mix level (-3.0 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) Surround downmix level for the front left and right channels when consumer has no surround speakers. Dolby Surround mode Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt) Audio production information exists Off, On This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters exist within the bit-stream. Mixing level 80 to 111 db Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue level during the final audio mixing session. Room type Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor, Small room flat monitor Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. Copyright flag Off, On Indicates if the material is copyright protected Original bitstream flag Off, On Indicates if source is the original or a copy Enable extended bitstream information Preferred downmix mode Lt/Rt center mix level Off, On Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro downmmix preferred (+3.0 db), (+1.5 db), (0 db), (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) Flags if additional information is available for downmixing. Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder. Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to 'Center mix level'. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-51

236 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Lt/Rt surround mix level Lo/Ro center mix level Lo/Ro surround mix level Dolby Surround EX mode (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) Indicates the required level reduction of the surround channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to Surround mix level'. Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center mix level' Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'. Flags if the stream has been encoded in Surround Ex. Only used if surround channels are present. A/D converter type Standard, HDCD Indicates type of A/D conversion used. Bandwidth low-pass filter enable Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable Surround attenuation enable Surround phase shift enable Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded. Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should only be switched off if it is known that there are no frequencies above 120 Hz. Attenuate surround channels by 3 db before encoding. Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels for the surround channels, and this can be used to compensate. Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing a 'Lt/Rt' downmix Splicing Stream Configuration Splicing Table 5.27 Splicing Parameters The following parameters are available on the Splicing tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front panel. Parameter Values Description Splicing Control Off, On VANC Message Only, On VANC, On IP Enables splice points to be set in the video stream upon reception of a SCTE 104 message and determines the insertion point. To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license (AVP/SWO/DPI) is needed. Splice Null Insertion Off, On Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35 messages into the output stream if no messages have been sent for 500ms. Audio Splicing Off, On Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that the video splice occurs /1553-FGC Uen Y

237 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description AS Index Control Don't Care, Use 1, Use Only available when Splicing Control is set to On VANC Message Only. If set to Don t Care the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output regardless of the source Automation System. If set to Use 1 the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output only for incoming SCTE 104 whose AS Index matches the setting in AS Index 1. If set to Use the AVP 4000 will create SCTE 35 output only for incoming SCTE 104 messages whose AS Index matches either the setting in AS Index 1 or the setting in AS Index 2. DPI PID Index Control Don't Care, Use 1, Use Determines how many values of DPI PID Index are compared against the incoming SCTE 104 message. Available only when Splicing Control is set to On VANC Message Only. AS Index 1 0 to 255 The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 or Use AS Index 2 0 to 255 The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use DPI PID Index 1 0 to 255 The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to Use 1 or Use DPI PID Index 2 0 to 255 The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to Use SCTE 104 Encode Input Stream Channel None Only available if triggering splicing based on contact closure through a GPI card. Splicing Component The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.28 Slicing Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only Teletext Stream Configuration This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext. Teletext This section gives the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is transmitted. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-53

238 Web GUI Control Table 5.29 Teletext Parameters The following parameters are available on the Teletext tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction/Teletext menu on the front panel. Parameter Values Description Teletext Source Teletext Packetisation Off, OP-47 (Max 300 kb/s), VANC Teletext, VBI Lines Normal (ETS ) - Data on Teletext Component, Legacy (ETS ) - Data on VBI Component Controls the source from where Teletext is extracted, including encapsulation method, where appropriate. Controls how the Teletext data is packetized in to a component data stream. SMPTE2031 Max. No. Teletext 3, 7, 11, 15, 36 Defines the maximum number of Teletext lines inserted. Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext Source. SMPTE2031 Teletext Present Yes, No Displays whether Teletext is found in the SDI stream. Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext Source. Read only parameter. Min # Teletext Packets 0 to 3 Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data. PTS On Teletext Off, On Controls whether a PTS value is included in the output Teletext packets. Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page Teletext Page Type Teletext Page Number Teletext Page Language Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional Information Page, Programme Schedule Page, Heading Impaired Subtitle Page List of languages The page type of the Teletext descriptor. The page number for the page to be set. The language set for the Teletext descriptor. Teletext Component This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying Teletext data. The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.30 Teletext Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only /1553-FGC Uen Y

239 Web GUI Control VBI and ANC Stream Configuration This section describes the parameters available for setting up VBI and ANC streams. VBI and Ancillary Data This section gives the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is extracted and how the data is transmitted. The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/EI9001/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel. Table 5.31 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters Parameter Values Description Description Control VBI Descriptor Mode Standard, Legacy, Philips, User The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate is Hz) VBI Data Descriptor Insertion VBI Teletext Descriptor Insertion Off, On Off, On Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User. Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User. Teletext Descriptor Insertion Off, On Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User. Proprietary Descriptor Insertion Closed Captions Off, On Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User. Closed Captions Source Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334 The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is Hz. Timecode TC Mode TC External Source Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel on Loss, Internal Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI VITC Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in, either Off, external source or internally generated. Also sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or freewheel). Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select the first source present in order of the drop down list. TC Dropframes Off, On, Auto Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external source, or to ON for internal source. Broadcaster ID Reception Timeout Insertion Timeout Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input (RP207). Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-55

240 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Broadcaster ID Mode Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID. Default Servicename The default service name to be used. Broadcaster ID Source No, Input, Default Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input, the default or is invalid. Broadcaster ID The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the output stream. Generic ANC Generic ANC Extraction Off, On Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI stream or not as per SMPTE Max ANC Bit Rate 100 to 2000 kbps The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output. Field 1 VBI Line 9 - VBI Line 22 VBI Line 6 - VBI Line 22 Off, VITC, Closed Captions, Monochrome Samples Off, VITS, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, Closed Caption for closed caption information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams. Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line) input streams. VBI Line 23 Off, WSS, WSS-AFD Specifies the content of VBI line 23 for 576i (625 line) input streams. Field 2 VBI Line VBI Line 285 VBI Line VBI Line 335 Off, VITC, Closed Captions, Monochrome Samples Off, VITS, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B, Monochrome Samples Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, Closed Caption for closed caption information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams. Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and Teletext System B for Teletext. VBI Line Control Manual; RX8 If transcoding IP input, the RX8 decoder can determine VBI types on VBI lines automatically. It is also possible to set this manually. ANC Component This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying ancillary data. The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel /1553-FGC Uen Y

241 Web GUI Control Table 5.32 ANC component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only PCR Stream Configuration The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream. The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/Slot <m> Video 1 PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel. Table 5.33 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters Parameters Values Description PID The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the program clock reference values. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only parameter CE-HEVC Video and VBI Stream Configuration Video Input and Pre-Processing The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel. Table 5.34 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters Parameter Values Description Video Input Lock Yes, No Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified through the parameters below. Read only parameter. Source SDI The video will be sourced from the HD-SDI input on the rear panel. Color Bars Black An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used as the video source. An internally generated black test pattern will be used as the video source. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-57

242 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Input Detection Detected Video Standard Video Input Format Moving Object Slate Color Bars with text overlay Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and Configure Not Detected, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97, HD 1080p50, HD 1080p59.94, HD 2160p50, HD 2160p59.94, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97, HD 1080p50, HD 1080p59.94, HD 2160p50 Interleaved, HD 2160p59.94 Interleaved, HD 2160p50 Quad, HD 2160p59.94 Quad An internally generated moving object test pattern will be used as the video source. A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video source. The Color Bars source overlaid with the Ident Text. Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be automatically detected or what actions to take if a change is detected in the Input Video Format. The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only parameter. Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the video format used for encoding. A change in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the Video Profile used for encoding. Output On Video Loss Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input. Text overlay is not supported in this release. Black, Black with text overlay Slate with text overlay Color Bars, Bars with text overlay No PID Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input. Text overlay is not supported in this release. Switches to pre-configured text overlay on loss of video. Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input. Text overlay is not supported in this release. The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not updated. Ident Text Overlay text to display on top of images. Upload New Logo File Browse, Upload Browse to and upload the file to be used for the logo. Logo insertion Off, On Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can be selected under Logo file. Logo file The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be uploaded by selecting the Upload option. A fixed logo position? On, Off Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying the logo on the video. Not supported in this release. The X position of the logo The Y position of the logo The position relative to left of the screen 0.. (number of pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this release. The position relative to top of screen 0.. (number of video lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this release. Upload New Slate File Browse, Upload Browse to and upload the file to be used for the slate /1553-FGC Uen Y

243 Web GUI Control Video Encoding The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel. Table 5.35 Video Encoding Parameters Parameter Values Description Video Profile Profile for HD input Profile Off, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit, HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit, UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit Profile Off, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the allowed bit rate range. The profile to set when an SD input is detected on the SDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile cannot be set manually. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-59

244 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Profile for 3G input Profile for UHD input Profile Off, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit Profile Off, UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit The profile to set when a 3G input is detected on the SDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile cannot be set manually. The profile to set when an UHD input is detected on the SDI inputs. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile cannot be set manually. Resolution 1280 x 720, 1920 x 1080, 3840 x 2160 Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the encoded video. The available options depend on the values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile. Signalling Options SDR (BT.709), UHD SDR (BT.2020), HDR HLG10 (HDR in VUI), HDR HLG10 (SDR in VUI), HDR PQ10 The HDR signalling option to be used. Video Bit Rate The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile. Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only. Buffer Mode CBR Constant Bit Rate operation. Low Delay Mega Low Delay Super Low Delay Reduced encode delay achieved by removing pre-processing functions. Bit Rate, GOP structure and GOP length impact the delay. The IP GOP structure will give low delay, but with reduced quality. Encode delay reduced further by removing frame-sync in pre-processing. Bit Rate, GOP structure and GOP length impact the delay. The IP GOP structure will provide lower latency than Low Delay. Only available for HEVC and a single channel: The lowest delay is achieved by removing GOP structure concepts and concentrating on striping of P Frames or complete I Frames. This selection will provide the best latency delay performance. No ANC stream processing is available in this mode. Aspect Ratio 16:9, 4:3 Does not affect the video encoding but rather indicates what the desired aspect ratio for the decoded picture (not the pixel). If no other mechanism such as WSS in the VBI is used, the video output image will use this aspect ratio /1553-FGC Uen Y

245 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description GOP Length 4 to 250 Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bit-stream. This setting is not available when Buffer Mode is set to Super Low Delay. GOP Structure IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP Sets the number of B frames between reference frames. IBBBBBBBP can only be used for 720p video format encoded with a H.264 video profile. When Buffer Mode is set to Super Low Delay, GOP Structure is limited to All P or I Frame only. Closed GOPs Off, On Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in which the predicted frames can have their reference from outside the group. This setting has no effect when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected. Delay Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only parameter. Output Entropy Encoding is automatically used, depending on what coding standard and bit rate is selected. Table 5.36 Output Entropy Encoding Coding Standard Bit Rate Entropy Encoding HEVC single channel Any bit rate CABAC HEVC multichannel Any bit rate CABAC H264 single channel Less than 50 Mbps CABAC HEVC single channel More than 50 Mbps CAVLC H264 multichannel Any bit rate CAVLC Video Output The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output menu on the front panel. Table 5.37 Video Output Parameters Parameter Values Description Embedded PCR Off, On Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video. If it is set to other than Off, the PCR PID field of a service will become read only and will contain the PID of the current component. Copyright Off, On Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header. Original Off, On Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header. AR Signalling Output Control Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data Controls which source is used for embedding aspect ratio signalling into user data. If set to Off, no aspect ratio data will be resent in the output. AFD sources are: SMPTE 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-61

246 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description 2016, Video Index, WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect Ratio. Bar Data is only SMPTE This setting is not available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected. TC Output Location Off, SEI Message Defines how timecode is put into the output video stream. This setting is not available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected. Closed Captions Off, ATSC (default) Controls if Closed Captions are included in the output stream. This setting is not available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected. Video Component The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front panel. Table 5.38 Video Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 16 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20 Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. Master TS Off, On Sets the master Transport Stream for the component. Source PID Monitoring None, Monitor, Monitor & Redundancy Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID from an IP input can be enabled, and can be set to cause a redundancy switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by Ericsson control software. Not supported in this release. Multichannel Restrictions The first channel must always be set to encode. If this is set to OFF, then it will not be possible to encode any video stream. If there are to be mixed frame rates, the highest frame rate of all channels must be present on channel 1. It is not possible to mix 25 Hz and Hz on the same card. It is not possible to mix 50 Hz and Hz on the same card. GOP Structure There is no restriction across the channels. Each channel may have a different GOP structure. Bit Rate There is no restriction across the channels. Each channel may have a different bit rate. If two or more channels are in use the bit rate for each channel may not exceed 30 Mbps /1553-FGC Uen Y

247 Web GUI Control Number of Channels Per Card: It is only possible to encode one UHD stream. It is only possible to encode three 1080p streams. It is possible to encode up to four 720p/1080i streams. In Super Low Delay mode, it is only possible to encode one channel of HEVC video (any resolution). In Super Low Delay mode, it is not possible to encode H.264 video. Notes: First Release (release 9.29): The same video format must be present across all channels in this first release. In subsequent releases (release TBD): If the first channel is configured to 720p or 1080p, channels 2-3 may be configured to be either 720p or 1080i. If the first channel is configured to 1080i, channels 2-3 may only be configured to be 1080i. Available Encoding Profiles/Levels When Using Multiple Channels When using multiple channels, the available encoding profiles/levels are dictated by the profile/level selected on channel 1. The profiles/levels for channels 2 to 4 must come from the same group, as shown in the table below. Table 5.39 Available Multichannel Encoding Profiles/Levels Ch 1 Profile/Level Available Profile/Level for Ch 2-4 H.264 HD Off HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit, HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit. H.264 3G Off HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 H.264 HIgh Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-63

248 Web GUI Control Ch 1 Profile/Level Available Profile/Level for Ch 2-4 HEVC HD HEVC 3G Off HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit. Off HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit. Note: If channel 1 is set to Off, then no channels will be able to encode. Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE- HEVC/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel. Note: These setting are not available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected. Table 5.40 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters Parameter Values Description Closed Captions Closed Captions Source Timecode TC Mode Off, SMPTE334 Off; External, Zero on Loss; External, Freewheel on Loss; Internal The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is Hz. Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in, either Off, external source or internally generated. Also sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or freewheel). TC External Source ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select the first source present in order of the drop down list. TC Dropframes Off, On, Auto Only displayed when Hz family is selected on Input tab. Auto configures to external source, or to ON for internal source. Table 5.41 ARC Parameters Parameter Values Description Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling SMPTE2016 Off (Default), On Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a source for AR info /1553-FGC Uen Y

249 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description AFD Sustain Maintain previously received AFD code indefinitely Maintain previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to default, i.e. code 1000 Maintain previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD off Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input. Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code indefinitely. Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to default, i.e. code Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD off. AFD Sustain Timeout 0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120 Control how long in frames previous AFD code is maintained. Zero means drop to default immediately on loss. Input Detection The CE-HEVC VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection, with the exception of "Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config" Audio Stream Configuration Audio Input The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Audio Module/Audio <n>/input menu on the front panel. Table 5.42 Audio Input Parameters Parameter Values Description Input Format Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, Dolby E, AAC Sets the input format used by the audio encoder. Input Source Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1-4 Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 khz test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI embedded audio stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital inputs. Output On Audio Loss No PID, Silence Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for encode silence. NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the output Transport Stream. Source Switchout Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1-4 Specifies which input to output to the reference output on the 15-way D-type audio connector. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-65

250 Web GUI Control Audio Encoding The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Audio Module/Audio <n>/encode menu on the front panel. Note: When Super Low Delay is selected, LPCM Pass-thru or Dolby E Passthru is available. Table 5.43 Audio Encoding Standards Parameter Options Description Coding Standard MPEG Layer 2 MPEG Layer 2 Encode (More than two channel pairs require the CE/SWO/VP/M1L2 license) Dolby Digital AAC-LC HE-AAC Pass-thru Audio Description Service Dolby Digital encode, requires CE/SWO/VP/DOLBYAC3 license. AAC-LC encoding, requires CE/SWO/VP/AAC license. HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2 encoding, requires CE/SWO/VP/AAC license. Pass-thru of the input MPEG-1 Layer II encode of a mono audio track that describes action in the video plus a control track. Table 5.44 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384 Bit Rate of the audio stream Coding Mode 1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio (8 Cannels) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1) mode. Language (Left) The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1) mode. Language (Right) User Language 1 The language of the right channel when in dual mono (1+1) mode. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in any of the language fields /1553-FGC Uen Y

251 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description User Language 2 A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in any of the language fields. MPEG Version MPEG1, MPEG2 Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be signaled. Copyright Off, On Indicates if the material is copyright protected. Original Off, On Indicates if source is the original or a copy De-emphasis Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17 To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to encoding. Table 5.45 Dolby Digital Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. Coding Mode Metadata Controls Coding Mode Metadata source type Metadata override type Metadata Reversion Mode 1/0 (Left input), 1/0 (Right input), 1/0 (L+R)/2, 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Off, On Embedded/Decoded Auto, Serial Port (Program 1 to 8) None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm Last Used, Preset Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if present). Selects where live metadata comes from. Defines which metadata parameters to override. Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live metadata. Metadata preset type 1 to 8 Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected for Metadata Reversion Mode. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-67

252 Web GUI Control Table 5.46 AAC-LC Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. Coding Mode 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Encapsulation MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex. TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) Advanced Off, On Turns noise shaping on or off. Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.47 HE-AAC Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 16, 24, 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256 Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend on the selected coding mode. Coding Mode 2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Encapsulation MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex. TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping) Off, On Turns noise shaping on or off. SBR Signalling Explicit, Implicit Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization /1553-FGC Uen Y

253 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.48 Pass-thru Parameters Parameter Values Description Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio. Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. Table 5.49 Audio Description Service Parameters Parameter Values Description Bit Rate 64 Bit Rate of the audio stream. Coding Mode 1/0 (Left input) Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding. Embedded PCR On, Off Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES. Au Information Cont Off, AU Info Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI TR Only AU_PTS is present for audio Advanced Lip Sync Offset -500 to 500 ms Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V synchronization. Gain -6 to 6dB Sets the gain in db for the audio stream. Language User Language 1 User Language 2 The language of the stream. A custom three-character language code when User Language 1 is set in the Language field. A custom three-character language code when User Language 2 is set in the Language field. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-69

254 Web GUI Control Audio Component The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.50 Audio Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only. Dolby Metadata Presets Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - CE-HEVC >CE-HEVC > Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify. Alternatively, the settings can be reached through the front panel under Advanced/CE-x/Audio Module/Dolby Metadata Presets. Any of these presets can then be applied to any audio channel encoding audio in the Dolby Digital format. The table lists the parameters for each preset. Table 5.51 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters Parameter Values Description Preset name Dialogue normalization level Name of the preset (for user information) -31 to -1 db Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment required to achieve the set level. Bitstream mode Line mode compression profile RF mode compression profile Main audio service: complete main, music and effects, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: hearing impaired, Associated service: dialogue, Associated service: commentary, Associated service: emergency, Associated service: visually impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, Speech Flags the type of service in the bitstream. Alters the dynamic range for line output. This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall level is raised by 11dB. Center mix level (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db) Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only. Surround mix level (-3.0 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) Surround downmix level for the front left and right channels when consumer has no surround speakers. Dolby Surround mode Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt) Audio production information exists Off, On This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters exist within the bit-stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

255 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Mixing level 80 to 111 db Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue level during the final audio mixing session. Room type Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor, Small room flat monitor Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session. Copyright flag Off, On Indicates if the material is copyright protected Original bitstream flag Off, On Indicates if source is the original or a copy Enable extended bitstream information Preferred downmix mode Lt/Rt center mix level Lt/Rt surround mix level Lo/Ro center mix level Lo/Ro surround mix level Dolby Surround EX mode Off, On Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro downmmix preferred (+3.0 db), (+1.5 db), (0 db), (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) (-1.5 db), (-3.0 db), (-4.5 db), (-6.0 db), 0 (-inf db) Flags if additional information is available for downmixing. Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder. Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to 'Center mix level'. Indicates the required level reduction of the surround channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to Surround mix level'. Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center mix level' Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'. Flags if the stream has been encoded in Surround Ex. Only used if surround channels are present. A/D converter type Standard, HDCD Indicates type of A/D conversion used. Digital de-emphasis Off, Auto, On To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to encoding. DC high pass filter enable Bandwidth low-pass filter enable Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable Surround attenuation enable Surround phase shift enable Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach 100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore must be clipped. Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded. Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should only be switched off if it is known that there are no frequencies above 120 Hz. Attenuate surround channels by 3 db before encoding. Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels for the surround channels, and this can be used to compensate. Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing a 'Lt/Rt' downmix. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-71

256 Web GUI Control Splicing Stream Configuration Splicing Table 5.52 Splicing Parameters The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Splicing tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front panel. Parameter Values Description Splicing Control Off, On VANC Message Only On VANC Message only does not insert splice point, but converts the SCTE 104 message to SCTE 35 message in the output. To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license (CE/SWO/DPI) is needed. Splice Null Insertion Off, On Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35 messages into the output stream if no messages have been sent for 500ms. Audio Splicing Off, On Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that the video splice occurs. Splicing Component The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.53 Slicing Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 32 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For splicing stream, this is Fixed and read only Teletext Stream Configuration This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext. Teletext This section describes the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is transmitted /1553-FGC Uen Y

257 Web GUI Control Table 5.54 Teletext Parameters The parameters listed are available on the Teletext tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE- HEVC/videoGroup/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction/Teletext menu on the front panel. Parameter Values Description Teletext Source Off, OP-47 (Max 300kbps), VANC Teletext Controls the source from where Teletext is extracted, including encapsulation method where appropriate. Min # Teletext Packets 0 to 3 Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data. Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page Teletext Page Type Teletext Page Number Teletext Page Language Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional Information Page, Programme Schedule Page, Heading Impaired Subtitle Page. List of languages The page type of the Teletext descriptor. The page number for the page to be set. The language set for the Teletext descriptor. Teletext Component This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying Teletext data. The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.55 Teletext Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 16 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm ANC Stream Configuration This section describes the parameters available for setting up ANC streams. Note: No ANC stream processing is available if the video buffer mode Super Low Delay is selected Ancillary Data This section describes the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is extracted and how the data is transmitted. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-73

258 Web GUI Control The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE- HEVC/videoGroup/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel. Table 5.56 Ancillary Data Parameters Parameter Values Description Description Control VBI Descriptor Mode Standard, Legacy, Philips, User The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate is Hz) Closed Captions Closed Captions Source Off, VBI lines, SMPTE 334 The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is Hz. Timecode TC Mode Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel on Loss, Internal Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in, either Off, external source or internally generated. Also sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or freewheel). TC External Source ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select the first source present in order of the drop down list. TC Dropframes Off, On, Auto Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external source, or to ON for internal source. Generic ANC Generic ANC Extraction Off, On Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI stream or not as per SMPTE Max ANC Bit Rate 100 to 2000 kbps The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output. ANC Component This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying ancillary data. The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/<component name> menu on the front panel. Table 5.57 ANC Component Parameters Parameter Values Description PID 16 to 8190 Sets the packet identifier associated with the component. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Specifies the weight associated to the component in the Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed and read only /1553-FGC Uen Y

259 Web GUI Control PCR Stream Configuration The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream. The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/transport Stream ID: <n>/service List/<service name>/component List/Slot <m> Video 1 PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel. Table 5.58 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters Parameters Values Description PID The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the program clock reference values. Bit Rate Weighting Fixed Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only parameter Configuring Transport Streams The section describes the parameters available for Transport Stream configuration Transport Stream Configuration The Transport Streams generated by the unit are fully compliant with the MPEG-2 Transport Stream specification (ISO/IEC ), and consists of services that carry one or more components. The unit can form up to 24 output Transport Streams and output them through the Transport Stream output interfaces. A total of 256 services can be allocated between the output Transport Streams. Each service can contain a maximum of 16 elementary streams. The elementary streams that make up a service can be selected from the elementary streams available from the option cards. The only restriction is that the elementary streams in a service must all reference the same 27 MHz clock. An elementary stream can be included in up to four services. Only one video elementary stream can be assigned to a service, and the audio delay of audio services should be matched to that video. Only one PCR can be associated with a service. Settings for IP and non-ip output Transport Streams differ slightly. The following three sections define the general Transport Stream settings, the settings that are related to the IP output, and the settings for the various services within the IP or non-ip output Transport Streams. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-75

260 Web GUI Control General Transport Stream Settings The general Transport Stream parameters are available in the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page if a Transport Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same settings are also available through the front panel under Output/<interface name>/<transport Stream name>. Table 5.59 General Transport Stream Settings Parameter Values Description Status of Service Online, Offline, Preview, Retire Determines the output (Setmode) state of the Transport Stream. Bit rate 0.01 to 216 Mbps Bit rate of the emission transport stream. Reserved Bit rate -216 to +216 Mbps Reserve bit rate in the transport stream that will not be consumed by services or components. Auto Enable True; False Automatically resume emission of the TS if the event causing automatic disable has cleared. Auto Disable Never; Audio Lost; Video Lost; Audio or Video Lost; Any CRITICAL alarm Automatically stop emission of the TS in the event of the selected event. Syntax ATSC; DVB Which syntax to be used in the TS, descriptors and tables. External Generation Off External generation of PSI tables, ATSC only. Program Specific Information Transport Stream ID 1 to ID of the transport stream as it appears in the NIT. PAT/PMT On; Off Generate PAT and PMT if selected. CAT Off; On Conditional Access Table generation. TSTD Off; On Generation of the TSTD table. Selection only available for DVB syntax. PAT/PMT Parameters PMT Repetition Period 100; 400; 500 milliseconds How often to transmit the PMT Dolby Digital Descriptor DVB; ATSC; DVB & ATSC Format of the Dolby Digital Descriptor in the PMT, if present. Selection only available for DVB syntax. Service Information Original Network ID 1 to ID of the originating network. Selection only available for DVB syntax. NIT Off; On Network Identification Table. Selection only available for DVB syntax. TDT Off; On Time and Date Table. Selection only available for DVB syntax. EIT Off; On Event Information Table generation. Selection only available for DVB syntax. SDT Off; On Service Description Table. NIT Parameters Network Name string Free field string for the Network name to be sent in the NIT /1553-FGC Uen Y

261 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Network ID 1 to Identity of the network. LCN Off; IEC 62216; NorDig v1; DTG default Logical Channel Number. Send extended NIT (SIRG) Insert NIT into PAT Off; On Yes; No PSIP Information ATSC Syntax Only. MGT Off; On Master Guide Table generation. STT Off; On System Time Table generation. (T/C)VCT EIT Terrestrial / Cable Virtual Channel Table generation. Event Information Table generation. STT Parameters GPS UTC Offset seconds Time in seconds. Daylight Saving Off; On Daylight Savings Time to be considered. (T/C) VCT Parameters Delivery Terrestrial; Cable Delivery mode. Modulation Mode 8 VSB; 16 VSB Modulation mode of transmission. Carrier Frequency Hz Carrier frequency of transmission. EIT Parameters EIT Base PID 16 to 8190 PID of the first EIT. Number of EITs 0 to 4 Number of tables in the SI Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams The IP related Transport Stream parameters are available in the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page if an IP output Transport Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. Table 5.60 Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams Parameter Values Description IP Bit Rate TS Packets per IP Packet Specifies the bit rate of the IP output and includes the overhead added by IP encapsulation. Read only parameter. 1 to 7 Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate in one IP packet. IP Encapsulation Number of Rows Number of Columns UDP, RTP, RTP FEC Column, RTP FEC Column and Row Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP and RTP is self explanatory and means that the Transport Stream is first encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an IP header is added. If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns and Row is selected one (Column) or two (Column and Row) RTP streams are output in addition to the RTP streams that carry the Transport Stream. The number of rows used in FEC encoding. The number of columns used in FEC encoding. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-77

262 Web GUI Control Parameter Values Description Alignment Block Aligned, Non Block Aligned The aligned method used for ProMPEG FEC. MGP Settings 1 1 Only available in MGP Module Level mode and if the unit is not controlled by Ericsson control software MSM Multicast Address MGP State IP v4 multicast address R0 Not In Service, S0 Not in Service, S1 Activated Spare, R1 On air Destination for MGP Status Messages. Transport streams sharing this value belong to the same media bundle and are switched on or off together. State of the bundle the transport stream belongs to. Read only. IP Configuration/Destination 1 Destination IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream Destination UDP Port 0 to The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream Source IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream Source MAC Address Read only parameter, not yet supported. Source UDP Port 0 to The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream Vlan Header Disabled, Enabled. Vlan ID Tag Vlan Tag The VLAN tag to use for the current IP stream. Vlan Priority 0 to 7 The priority to be used by the switches to prioritize different services. Time To Live 0 to 240 TTL value for inclusion in the IP header Type Of Service 0 to 255 ToS value for inclusion in the IP header Actual source IP address, calculated by a rule Actual source MAC address, calculated by a rule MGP Settings 1 aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd The source IP address. Read only parameter The source MAC address. Read only parameter. Spare IP Address IP v4 address Address used as source for MGP Status Message IP packets, generally the IP address assigned to an output interface of a peer (backup) unit. Service Settings The service parameters are available in the Properties widget on the Service Configuration page if a service is selected in the Outputs widget. The same settings are also available through the front panel under Output/<IP interface name>/<transport Stream name>/service List/<service name> /1553-FGC Uen Y

263 Web GUI Control Table 5.61 Service Settings Parameter Values Description Service ID PMT PID 16 to 8190 The PID assigned to the Program Map Table for the service. PCR PID 16 to 8190 The PID of the packetized elementary stream that transmits the PCR for the current service. BISS Key None, (Hidden) selected Key The assigned security keys for the for Basic Interoperable Scrambling System presets. SDT Parameters Provider Name Service Type Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast The name of the service provider. The service name as it appears in the PMT. The type of service as transmitted in the PMT. BISS Key None, (Hidden) selected Key The assigned security keys for the for Basic Interoperable Scrambling System presets. Error Monitoring Continuity Count Error Threshold Continuity Count Error Sampling Window Maximum Valid PID Missing Period 1 to 1000 occurrences Number of Continuity Count errors detected on the incoming IP stream above which an alarm will be raised. 1 to 60 seconds Time window in which the continuity count errors on the IP input are counted. 1 to 10 seconds Time threshold over which an alarm will be raised if a PID is missing from the IP input. (T/C) VCT Parameters Short Name String Short description of the service. Long Name String Long description of the service. Major Channel Number Minor Channel Number 1 to 99 PSIP major channel number. 1 to 99 PSIP minor channel number. Service Type Digital TV; Digital TV (H.264); Digital Radio; Data Broadcast Type of service. Does not affect encoding. Source ID 0 to Source ID. Hidden Hide Guide Yes; No Yes; No External PSIP Data Insertion The External Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Data Insertion feature allows the user to insert MPEG Program Specific Information (PSI) and ATSC PSIP data generated by a Triveni Digital GuideBuilder TM equipment into any of the internally created transport streams. The feature requires the AVP/SWO/PSIP license to be installed on the unit. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-79

264 Web GUI Control The PSI information includes the following MPEG tables: Program Association Table (PAT) Program Map Table (PMT) The PSIP data can include the following ATSC tables: Master Guide Table (MGT) Rating Region Table (RRT) System Time Table (STT) Event Information Table (EIT) External Text Table (ETT) Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (TVCT) Cable Virtual Channel Table (CVCT) The tables to be included have to be set up on the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment. For the configuration of the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder refer to its user manual. Note: In general, all tables generated by Triveni Digital GuideBuilder will be included in the output Operation To set up PSIP data insertion, follow the steps below. 1. On the Service Configuration page, create the Transport Stream you want to add the external PSIP information to. 2. Add the required services and components, and adjust the Transport Stream and component settings. 3. In the Outputs widget, select the transport stream you want to add the PSIP data to. In the Properties widget, set Syntax to ATSC and the External Generation to On - Triveni. The PSIP accordion panel is now displayed. 4. In the PSIP accordion panel, set the TCP Port to the port through which your unit will communicate with the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment. The default port used by Triveni Digital GuideBuilder is Set the Maximum PSIP bit rate as required. The more tables that are generated by the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder, the higher the data rate. Note: Once the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder has been set up and a communication link between the Triveni and your unit is established, the actual bit rate will be updated in the Real PSIP Bit Rate field. 6. If you want to generate STT, then set the STT Table Insertion option to On /1553-FGC Uen Y

265 Web GUI Control Note: The STT table itself is generated by the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder, and the generated table is updated with the UTC time on the AVP 4100 ATSC Integrated System unit. UTC time can be configured by drilling down to Encoder > Base Unit in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the Advanced tab of the Device Configuration page, and setting the correct UTC time and date in the UTC Time and UTC Date fields in the Properties widget. A time server can be set up in the SNTP Server field.. 7. In the Minimum PID and Maximum PID fields, set the PID range for the generated PSIP tables. 8. Configure the Triveni Digital GuideBuilder equipment as described in its user manual. Make sure you apply the same transport stream and communication settings as you did on the AVP 4100 ATSC Integrated System unit, otherwise the embedded information will not reflect the structure of the internally created transport stream. Figure 5.30 Setting External PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI Internal PSIP Data Insertion The Internal Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Data Insertion feature allows the user to insert internally generated MPEG Program Specific Information (PSI) and ATSC PSIP data into any of the internally created Transport Streams. The PSI information includes the following MPEG tables: Program Association Table (PAT) Program Map Table (PMT) 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-81

266 Web GUI Control Operation The internally generated PSIP data includes the following ATSC tables: Conditional Access Table (CAT) Master Guide Table (MGT) System Time Table (STT) Terrestrial/Cable Virtual Channel Table (T/C)VTC Event Information Table (EIT) To set up PSIP data insertion, follow the steps below. 1. On the Service Configuration page, create the Transport Stream you want to add the internal PSIP information to. 2. Add the required services and components, and adjust the Transport Stream and component settings. 3. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add the PSIP data to. In the Properties widget, set Syntax to ATSC and the External Generation to Off. The Program Specific Information and the PSIP Information accordion panels are now displayed. Note: If external table generation is enabled, the unit does not produce tables internally. 4. By setting a table On, the appropriate parameters are displayed. To configure PSIP data, set PAT/PMT to On. Set PMT Repetition Period as required. The default value is 500 ms. 5. Conditional Access Table can be activated by setting CAT parameter to On. 6. By setting STT On, GPS UTC Offset and Daylight Saving can be configured. 7. By setting (T/C)VTC On, the following parameters can be configured: Delivery (Terrestrial/Cable), Major Channel Number, Modulation Mode, Carrier Frequency. 8. By turning EIT On, EIT Base PID and the number of the Event information Tables can be set /1553-FGC Uen Y

267 Web GUI Control Figure 5.31 Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE ) FEC Parameters Table 5.62 FEC Parameters FEC is set up on a per-transport Stream basis. The following description applies to the graphical user interface. If the user has the appropriate license installed to use FEC then below are the parameters which can be set (with itemised lists of available values where appropriate). Parameter Values Description IP Encapsulation UDP UDP encapsulation of TS packets RTP RTP/FEC Column RTP/FEC Column and Row RTP encapsulation of TS packets UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP Packets with added onedimensional FEC UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP Packets with added twodimensional FEC Number of Rows 4-20 An integer between 4 and 20. See FEC constraints section for allowable ranges. Number of Columns 1-20 An integer between 1 and 20. See FEC constraints section for allowable ranges. Alignment Block Aligned Non Block Aligned 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-83

268 Web GUI Control If the user does not have a license to use FEC then the available IP Encapsulation options become UDP, RTP, RTP/FEC Column (No License) and RTP/FEC Column and Row (No License). If either of the (No License) options is selected then IP Encapsulation will be set to RTP and FEC will not be enabled. If subsequently the license is enabled for FEC then the (No License) suffix will be removed from the displayed valued of IP Encapsulation Constraints on FEC Parameters To promote interoperability and simplify implementation, limits are specified for values of the L (number of columns) and D (number of rows) parameters. ProMPEG FEC requires equipment manufacturers to support all combinations of values of L and D within these limits. The specified limits are: Columns Only: (L x D <= 100) and (1 <= L <= 20) and (4 <= D <= 20) Rows and Columns: (L x D <= 100) and (4 <= L <= 20) and (4 <= D <= 20) Background Forward Error Correction or FEC, enables packets lost during transmission over IP networks to be recovered by adding extra information to the transmitted data. The particular type of FEC used on the unit is that specified by SMPTE /2. The key features of ProMPEG FEC are: Open standard FEC scheme. Increased robustness of transmission. Increases network reach through FEC on high loss links. Highly configurable depending on bandwidth vs. robustness. FEC transmitted separately to media stream. Independent of video compression standard (MPEG-2, MPEG-4). ProMPEG FEC can help to solve the problems caused by missing packets. It is an open standard for protection of contribution broadcast real-time transmissions over IP networks by facilitating real-time lost packet recovery at the receive units. It permits flexible configurations for optimization requirements. The scheme uses an RTP layer which adds timing information for sequence correction. FEC packets are transmitted in separate IP packets. The FEC packets are calculated by arranging the media packets into a matrix. The matrix size defined by columns (L) and rows (D).FEC packets are calculated along columns and rows using the XOR function. FEC can be 1D (Column Only) or 2D (Column and Row) /1553-FGC Uen Y

269 Web GUI Control Media and FEC packets are transmitted on separate IP streams with the Column FEC stream offset from media stream and have a UDP port number which is the media port number +2. The Row FEC stream is offset from Media stream and has UDP port number which is the media port number +4. This arrangement means that non-enabled FEC receivers can simply ignore FEC streams and decode the media packets. The FEC data stream is off-set from the media stream to protect against burst error loss and jitter. At the receiver, lost packets recovered using the FEC data packets. The Column FEC protects against burst errors and the Row FEC protects against random errors. ProMPEG FEC recovers lost packets using column and (optionally) row FEC packets using the XOR function on the remaining packets. Depending on the distribution and severity of the pack loss not all errors are recoverable. Overhead The overhead which results from ProMPEG FEC transmitting extra packets depends on whether column or column and row FEC is selected and how many columns and rows there are. (Note that L = number of columns, D = number of rows.) Table 5.63 Column FEC Overhead (L + (D x L)) / (D x L) = 1 / D + 1 Worst case 4 rows = 25% Best case 20 rows = 5% Table 5.64 Column and Row FEC Overhead (L + (D x L)) / (D x L) = 1 / D + 1 Worst case 4 rows = 25% Best case 20 rows = 5% Block Alignment FEC offers two methods of block alignment (also referred to as FEC linearisation) for use when generating FEC packets: Non Block Aligned and Block Aligned. Both are guaranteed of being able to correct L errors, sometimes more. The Block Aligned method can however correct 2L+2 errors; this never happens with Non- Block Aligned. Non-Block Aligned can in theory have a lower latency at the decoder if it can be guaranteed that the mode of operation will never change. Block Aligned linearization is dealt with in Annex B of the ProMPEG Code of Practice. In Block Aligned column FEC packets are sent every D th frame and the L Column FEC packets are played out every D slot. They are therefore evenly spread over the D*L matrix period. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-85

270 Web GUI Control VLAN Tagging VLAN Creation Non Block Aligned linearization is dealt with in Annex A of the ProMPEG Code of Practice. In Non Block Aligned the matrix is skewed for the column calculation. The L column FEC packets are played out at the end of every column plus a constant. For square matrices (diamonds) where L = D then these column packets will emerge at regular intervals. For rectangular diamonds they will not. In the case of a 4 column by 20 row matrix the 4 FEC packets will emerge within 16 slots, followed by a gap of 64 slots before the next 4. It therefore produces a less linear spread of packets. Receivers which do not have FEC capability can simply ignore the FEC packets and just make use of the media packets. VLAN tagging can be used to segregate IP packets from data interfaces. A VLAN is created by specifying the VLAN ID, IP address and the Netmask. All Transport Streams which are tagged to this VLAN use the VLAN IP address as its source IP address. Hence the VLAN and VLAN ID must be created before it can be used to tag a Transport Stream. To create VLANs, on the Advanced Setup tab of Device Configuration page navigate to the Encoder > Vlan Tags folder, select the output you want to assign the VLAN tag to, and click Add in the Properties pane. Alternatively, on the front panel navigate to Advanced/System/Vlan Tags and set up the VLANs as required. The available options are listed in the following table. Table 5.65 VLAN Creation Options Parameter Values Description Vlan ID (Create) New VLAN ID to create. Vlan IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx VLAN IP Address (VLAN tagged Transport Stream will have this as its source IP address). Vlan Netmask yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy VLAN Netmask. Vlan Gateway zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz VLAN gateway address for the current VLAN. Note: The VLAN Id and its IP address must be unique across all Ethernet interfaces. VLAN Tag Sharing Once the VLANs are created, they can be assigned to IP Transport Streams. To do that, navigate to Service Configuration page, and create a Transport Stream for the appropriate IP output. Then, click on the newly created Transport Stream, and in the Properties widget select the required VLAN tag. VLANs can also be assigned to Transport Streams in the Outputs/IP Output <m>/data Interface Group <n>/transport Stream ID: <id>/destination List/Destination <k>/vlan Tag front panel menu. The following options can be set: /1553-FGC Uen Y

271 Web GUI Control Table 5.66 VLAN Tag Sharing Options Parameter Values Description Vlan Tag None, existing VLAN tag Disables VLAN tagging or assigns the selected VLAN tag to the current Transport Stream. Vlan Priority 0-7 Priority that can be used to support QoS. It is also possible to group multiple Transport Streams under the same VLAN. To do this, assign the same VLAN tag to all of them. Note: On the web user interface, VLANs can be managed through the Service Configuration page by clicking on the Manage button next to the Vlan Tag parameter. VLAN Deletion A VLAN can be deleted by changing the VLAN Tag parameter under the Transport Stream to None. If a VLAN tag used by any Transport Stream is deleted, the VLAN Tag parameter is set to None in the respective Transport Streams. 5.6 Support Page The Support page provides information and access to functions that help in maintenance tasks. The page consists of the following tabs: General tab Versions tab Licenses tab Device Management tab General Tab The General tab contains the Import and Export and the Log Files widgets. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-87

272 Web GUI Control Figure 5.32 Support Page > General Tab Import and Export Widget The Import and Export widget lets the user import and export the current configuration in different formats. Moreover, it enables the user to upgrade the encoder through the Upgrade Encoder accordion panel. Note: The format of the files saved through the Support page is not compatible with the format of the configurations exported on the Stored Configurations page Log Files Widget The Log Files widget provides a way to export message logs, basic version information and error messages for debug purposes Version Tab The Version tab displays detailed version information. The information is organized into panel tabs. By clicking a tab in the Build widget, the very same tab is displayed in the Host and Modules widgets. In case of a version mismatch on the host or on any of the option cards, it is clearly indicated in the System tab and on the tab corresponding to the failing slot /1553-FGC Uen Y

273 Web GUI Control Figure 5.33 Support Page > Versions Tab Licenses Tab The Licenses tab allows for license key file management. License key files can be uploaded in the Licenses widget. Installed and unavailable licenses for each option slot are listed in separate sections. Figure 5.34 Support Page > Licenses Tab 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 5-89

274 Web GUI Control Device Management Tab The Device Management tab allows the user to reset the device. Figure 5.35 Support Page > Device Management Tab On delivery all store locations are empty. When the user has configured the unit with a complete set of parameters the configuration can be saved to a store location /1553-FGC Uen Y

275 6 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Chapter 6 Contents 6.1 Introduction to Transport Streams IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets MPEG Layer RTP Layer UDP Layer IP Layer Ethernet Layer IP Overhead VCM Video Encoding Functionality Overview Functional Description for VCMs Video Compression Functionality Test Patterns Impairment Reduction VCM Video Operating Modes Seamless Mode Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Mode Fast Channel Zap Capped VBR Operation Target Quality VCM Audio Functionality HD-SDI Input SDI Input IP Input VPS Audio Control Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data Ancillary Data Closed Captions Time Code OP AFD Generic ANC VBI Data VBI Lines VBI Data /1553-FGC Uen Y 6-1

276 Advanced Video Processing and Networking VBI Data on a Separate PID Timing Logo and Full Slate Logo Insertion on AVP Logo Format Logo Upload Full Slate Advanced Slate Display Options for the EI9001 and EI9001T Data Network Redundancy Redundancy Data Routing Packet Processing Handling Processed Packets Setmode Overview Operation States Offline Mode Retire Mode Preview Mode Takeover Mode Online Mode Configuring Setmode Configuring Setmode on Unit Level Configuring Setmode on Media Level SNTP Overview SNTP Time Server Simple Network Management Protocol Supported Protocols Operation XPO User Access User Authentication IP Source PID Monitoring and Redundancy Selecting PIDs for Monitoring Configuring Thresholds for PID Monitoring Error Monitoring Limitations List of Figures Figure 6.1 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets Figure 6.2 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets Figure 6.3 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets Figure 6.4 VCM Functional Diagram Figure 6.5 Capped Bit Rate Fluctuation Based on Quality Figure 6.6 Target Quality/Demand Percentage Figure 6.7 Uploading the Logo File Figure 6.8 Slate Sensitivity Delay Settings Figure 6.9 Slate Detection Settings Figure 6.10 Audio Selection Settings /1553-FGC Uen Y

277 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.11 Data Network Redundancy Figure 6.12 Video Components Tab Figure 6.13 Audio Components Tab Figure 6.14 Service Properties List of Tables Table 6.1 IP Overhead Table 6.2 VCM Compression Profiles and Levels Table 6.3 Test Patterns Table 6.4 AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-processing Parameters Table 6.5 Handling of VPS Data Table 6.6 VBI Data Types Table 6.7 SNMP Interface Parameters /1553-FGC Uen Y 6-3

278 Advanced Video Processing and Networking BLANK 6-4 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

279 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.1 Introduction to Transport Streams IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams An MPEG Transport Stream has the following format. 1 to 7 MPEG Transport Stream Packets RTP Header (optional) UDP (User Datagram Protocol) IP (Internet Protocol) Ethernet (IEEE 802) Figure 6.1 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets Between one and seven MPEG Transport Stream packets are carried in a UDP packet. The UDP packet may optionally also contain an Real Time Protocol (RTP) header, which adds additional information such as a sequence number and a timestamp, which can help in the detection of packet loss across a network. The RTP header is 12 bytes long. The UDP header is 8 bytes long. The network layer protocol is IPV4, which adds a 20 byte header to every packet. The physical link layer is Ethernet at either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets The mapping of MPEG-2 TS packets into IP data frames is done according to the protocol stack shown in the following illustration. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-5

280 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.2 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets MPEG Layer The MPEG-2/DVB layer is specified in ISO/IEC IS Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio. The main functionality of this layer is to transform MPTS (Multi-Program Transport Streams) into a number of SPTS (Single-Program Transport Streams). A Transport Stream carrying multiple programs is in this way split into a number of mini Transport Streams, each carrying a single program. This ensures that the video can be passed through limited bandwidth links such as ADSL further down the transmission path RTP Layer The RTP layer is optional, and will add an 8 byte RTP header to the new packet. This header contains a sequence number and a time stamp /1553-FGC Uen Y

281 Advanced Video Processing and Networking UDP Layer The UDP layer is according to RFC768 User Datagram Protocol. The user can control the target UDP port number for the MPEG-2 stream. A configurable number of 188 byte long MPEG-2 TS packets are mapped straight into an UDP frame with no additional overhead. The MTU for Ethernet is usually 1500 bytes. This limits the number of MPEG-2 TS packets per UDP frame to lie within 1 to 7. The following illustration shows the mapping of MPEG-2 Transport Streams into UDP packets. Figure 6.3 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets IP Layer The IP layer is according to RFC791 Internet Protocol Specification. The user is allowed access to the following IP header fields: IP source address, IP destination address, Time-To-Live field, Type-Of-Service field. Performing static mapping between class-d IP addresses and the corresponding Ethernet multicast MAC addresses supports limited IP Multicasting (Type 1) Ethernet Layer The data link layer is Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3/802.3u (auto sensing 10/100 Mbps, Twisted Pair, RJ-45 connector) IP Overhead The IP overhead calculation when mapping MPEG-2 TS packets into IP frames is shown in Table /1553-FGC Uen Y 6-7

282 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Table 6.1 IP Overhead Item Overhead factor Comments MPEG-2 TS 1.0 UDP 1324/1316 = UDP header=8 bytes IP 1344/1324 = IP header=20 bytes Ethernet 1358/1344 = Eth header=14 bytes Total overhead factor becomes: x x = or 3.1% overhead. Note: The number of MPEG-2 TS packets one can map down into each UDP frame is variable (between 1 and 7). Usually 7 is used for minimum overhead. This is also used in the above calculation. 6.2 VCM Video Encoding Functionality Overview The VCMs process the video input signal into a compressed encoded bit stream in accordance with the appropriate specification (ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG-2 specification (ISO/IEC 13818) or JPEG 2000 specification (ITU-T Rec. T.802 or ISO/IEC )) Functional Description for VCMs Figure 6.4 VCM Functional Diagram The 3G/HD/SD-SDI Video Input can be configured to accept either 25 Hz or Hz video. The Pre-processor has a video frame re-synchronizer which allows the video frame rate to be locked to the Unit 27 MHz clock, or to a 27 MHz clock locked to an external sync input if an External Sync Input option card (AVP/HWO/EXTSYNC) is fitted. If the unit is configured to be locked to video, then the frame re-synchronizer is inactive. The Pre-processor can perform horizontal and vertical scaling and bandwidth filtering on the video prior to passing it on to the Video Encoder. It can also generate a test pattern or repeat the last frame received if the video input is not valid. The Video Encoder processes the video from the Pre-processor into a compressed encoded bit-stream in accordance with the relevant specification. It can produce a constant bit rate (CBR) output, which can be set in the range 1 Mbps to 200 Mbps depending upon encoder and profile /1553-FGC Uen Y

283 Advanced Video Processing and Networking The Video Encoder can be configured for CBR, Fast Channel Zap, Capped VBR or a Seamless buffer mode. CBR is the recommended buffer mode for optimum video quality, while the Low Delay buffer modes give the lowest video encoding delay, where video quality may be impacted. In non seamless buffer modes, the compressed video output will glitch if the video bit rate is changed. Seamless mode is used for Reflex operation and the video output will not glitch when the video bit rate is changed Video Compression Functionality Table 6.2 summarizes the compression profiles and levels. The availability of each depends upon the type of VCM and the available licenses. Table 6.2 VCM Compression Profiles and Levels Profile and Level HD H.264 HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit HD MPEG-2 HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High level 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit SD MPEG-2 SD MPEG-2 Main Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit SD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile Main level 4:2:2 8 bit Test Patterns The video pre-processor can generate the test patterns shown in Table /1553-FGC Uen Y 6-9

284 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Table 6.3 Test Patterns Test Pattern Black Color bars Moving object Slate Notes: On loss of video the VCM can be configured to produce one of the test patterns or turn off the video component Impairment Reduction If the PID is removed from the output, a Transport Stream analyzer device will report the removed PID as a ghost PID, because the reference to it is still transmitted in the Program Map Table of the MPEG Program Specific Information. The video pre-processor provides a range of configurable tools to improve subjective quality. For H.264 encoding, the perceived image quality is further enhanced by utilizing a de-blocking filter in the feedback loop, which is also configurable. Table 6.4 AVP 4000 Video Input and Pre-processing Parameters Parameter Optimum PSNR Setting Optimum Visual Setting Adaptive Pre-Processing Filter OFF ON The APF is especially useful in low bit rate MPEG-2 encoding to prevent excessive blocking, due to the lack of an in-loop deblocking filter within the standard, unlike in H.264. However, the APF may also benefit H.264 encoding at low bit rates. MCTRF OFF Default This filter is designed to be able to remove random input noise (such as thermal camera noise) without blurring motion that may be present in the source video. Horizontal Bandwidth 100% (Pass-thru) 90% Half-line Removal (PAL) OFF ON Profile Always use High Profile for H.264 H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 (SD) H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 (HD) Resolution Full i.e. 1080i:1920x p: 1280x720 PAL: 720x576 NTSC: 720x480 Full, although in very low bit rate scenarios you can set a lower horizontal resolution to avoid excessive blocking at the expense of increased softness. Typically dictated by customer requirements /1553-FGC Uen Y

285 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.3 VCM Video Operating Modes Note: The output of the VCM may contain a discontinuity when the operating mode (profile, buffer mode etc.) is changed Seamless Mode In Seamless buffer mode, a change in the video bit rate will result in no glitches in the encoded video. As a tradeoff for the glitch free output video the video quality will be somewhat reduced. Any audio configuration is supported when the video is configured for seamless buffer mode. When operating in a non-seamless mode the output of the module may be discontinuous when the bit rate is changed Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Mode The module supports a Constant Bit Rate mode (standard delay). Any audio configuration is supported when the video is configured for CBR buffer mode Fast Channel Zap The user can configure the encoder buffer to control the channel change (zap time) on the decoded output. This mode can also be used to reduce the end to end delay by setting the Look-ahead to Off. However, picture quality may be affected. This is targeted for IPTV operation. For that reason, Fast Channel Zap is supported in H.264 video profiles only and not MPEG-2 profiles Capped VBR Operation The module supports a Capped VBR buffer mode. The encoder will automatically tune its bit rate within a range specified by the user depending on the picture complexity. The Target Quality is typically set to 75%, this controls the weighting algorithm for the picture complexity. A value of 50% will reduce the overall bit rate for difficult video content and a value of 90% will increase the bit rate for easy video contents. In Capped VBR mode, the encoder detects the incoming picture and estimates the number of bits required to encode that picture. Difficult content requires more bits and is therefore encoded at a higher bit rate. Easy content requires fewer bits and is therefore encoded at a lower bit rate. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-11

286 Advanced Video Processing and Networking The two extremes of picture quality are defined as follows: White noise, where the bit rate estimate will always exceed the maximum bit rate and the encoder will therefore output the maximum bit rate Black video where the floor for the bit rate value will be the minimum bit rate Target Quality Figure 6.5 Capped Bit Rate Fluctuation Based on Quality The Target Quality configuration does not set the average bit rate, it only biases the bit rate towards a direction. For example, a lower target quality will require a lower bit rate for a demanded content. Average demand percentage MP2 SD MP2 HD H264 SD H264 HD Equivalent -0.4 target quality Figure 6.6 Target Quality/Demand Percentage /1553-FGC Uen Y

287 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.4 VCM Audio Functionality The VCMs support a wide variety of input audio signals, and can encode them in various formats or pass them as they are received (Pass-thru mode). Any audio input can be associated with the video being processed, and the audio encoding delay will be matched to the video encoding delay so that audio/video synchronization (lipsync) is maintained. All audio components are configurable on a per channel basis. Parameters include the source of the audio, its encoding configuration and output PID HD-SDI Input The VCM can receive four groups of audio streams embedded in the HD serial digital interface (HD-SDI) feed. Each group contains two channel pairs. Hence the HD-SDI feed can carry up to a maximum of 2 x 4 = 8 pairs, or 16 mono channels. Each group has an associated Data Identifier (DID). The DIDs are set to the SMPTE 299M defaults for audio group 1 to group 4: Group 1 = 0x2E7 Group 2 = 0x1E6 Group 3 = 0x1E5 Group 4 = 0x2E4 The DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream. They are fixed at the SMPTE 299M defaults SDI Input The VCM can receive four groups of audio streams embedded in the serial digital interface (SDI) feed. Each group contains two channel pairs. Hence the SDI feed can carry up to a maximum of 2 x 4 = 8 pairs, or 16 mono channels. Each group has an associated Data Identifier (DID). The DIDs are set to the SMPTE 272M defaults for audio group 1 to group 4: Group 1 = 0x2FF Group 2 = 0x1FD Group 3 = 0x1FB Group 4 = 0x2F9 The DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream. They are fixed at the SMPTE 272M defaults. DID 1F4 is reserved for EDH error packets. Refer to the SMPTE 272M specification for more details. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-13

288 Advanced Video Processing and Networking IP Input The VCM can transcode or pass-thru up to four audio streams contained within an input transport stream. Each stream comprises two channel pairs of compressed audio data, most often compressed by a single encode instance upstream of the AVP VPS Audio Control The unit enables extraction of VPS data from the incoming video VBI and signals the audio control as shown in Table 6.5. The control of audio switching via VPS is enabled when VPS is selected as a VBI input on line 16 and the encoded profile of the video component is set to SD MPEG-2. Note: When the GUI setting, for VPS to control the audio coding, is active, the output of VPS on the separate VBI PID is not supported. Table 6.5 Handling of VPS Data VPS Signaling User Parameters Codec VPS Stereo Mode VPS Dual Channel Mode Mpeg2 HE-AAC / AAC AC3 DON T KNOW n/a n/a USE CONFIG MONO n/a n/a MONO LEFT NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ Bit 5 Signalled* Not Signalled JOINT STEREO STEREO Bit 6 Signalled* Not Signalled JOINT STEREO STEREO STEREO Bit 7 Signalled* Not Signalled n/a JOINT STEREO STEREO NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ Bit 8 Signalled* Not Signalled JOINT STEREO STEREO Stereo STEREO Joint Stereo JOINT STEREO Bit 5 Signalled* Not Signalled DUAL_MONO MONO LEFT DUAL SOUND n/a Bit 6 Bit 7 Signalled* Not Signalled Signalled* Not Signalled DUAL_MONO MONO LEFT DUAL_MONO MONO LEFT NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ NOT SUPPORTEDⁿ Bit 8 Signalled* Not Signalled DUAL_MONO MONO LEFT /1553-FGC Uen Y

289 Advanced Video Processing and Networking VPS Signaling User Parameters Codec VPS Stereo Mode VPS Dual Channel Mode Mpeg2 HE-AAC / AAC AC3 Single Dual MONO LEFT DUAL MONO n A bit is signaled when it is set to 0. This is due to the fact that bits 5-8 are usually set to 1 to indicate an unenhanced VPS. * If a codec is not supported then the codec will always use the configured coding mode. 6.5 Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data The video stream ingested through the SDI/HD-SDI input on the VCM can carry additional data associated with the video stream. These data are either inserted in the horizontal or vertical blanking region (ANC) or in the non-active television lines (VBI) Ancillary Data There are two positions in the video stream where ANC packets are allowed. The first is the horizontal blanking interval of the video line, called the horizontal ANC space (HANC). The second is the active portion of the video lines in the vertical blanking interval, called the vertical ANC space (VANC). HANC and VANC of the SDI signal can carry specific ancillary (ANC) data. The encoder then can be set up to extract and repacketize the data carried in the HANC or VANC based on the ANC data type Closed Captions Time Code OP-47 Closed Caption data and any user data embedded in the SDI/HD-SDI according to SMPTE 334, is extracted and inserted into the picture user data of the video stream in accordance with ATSC A/72 part 1. Information regarding the closed captions is carried in PSI as per ATSC A/72 part 2. Time code is extracted from HANC of the incoming video and carried in the Transport Stream adaptation layer as described in Annex E of ETSI TS (AU_information). Teletext subtitles can be extracted from ANC in accordance with OP-47 and carried in a teletext PID. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-15

290 Advanced Video Processing and Networking AFD Generic ANC As part of the ANC Data, Active Format Description codes can also be transmitted. These codes provide information to video devices about where in the coded picture the active video is. The codes are defined by ETSI TS V1.7.1 Annex B, ATSC A/53 Part 4 and SMPTE Active Format Descriptor (AFD) uses three bits of video index to define the video format. This information is encoded into user data and can then be used by a Decoder for wide-screen switching. Up to 2 Mbps of generic data can be extracted from ANC of the incoming video and encapsulated in accordance with SMPTE 2038 (Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream) VBI Data VBI Lines VBI Data The extraction of VBI types can be enabled or disabled individually. The video line from which the VBI is extracted can also be configured. The default is set according to the relevant standard for the VBI type. Up to 8 VBI lines per field can be extracted. Unless otherwise stated, all VBI data are formed into one VBI Transport Stream packet that conforms to ETSI EN or SCTE 127. Data can be extracted from the vertical blanking interval of the incoming video stream, processed, and then included in the output Transport Stream. The following table summarizes the VBI data types supported by the VCM module. Table 6.6 VBI Data Types Component Video Index Closed Captions Monochrome Samples Teletext Aspect Ratio Signaling Comments It is possible to extract video index and another VBI type from the same line. Via line 21 & 284 (CEA-608C). Up to 3 lines can be extracted per frame. Up to 18 lines can be extracted per field. WSS/WSS-AFD VBI Data on a Separate PID The VBI data is packetized into MPEG-2 PES packets according to ETSI ETS for teletext and ETSI EN or SCTE 127 for all other VBI data types. Closed caption data and aspect ratio signaling can also be inserted into the compressed video elementary stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

291 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Timing The VCM aligns the VBI data and the compressed video frames, i.e. it uses the same PTS for the video and the VBI data if they are from the same frame. 6.6 Logo and Full Slate Logo Insertion on AVP Logo Format Logo Upload The AVP 4000 supports the insertion of one on screen logo per video input. The logo is uploaded from the web interface. The logo format supported is OSD type 6. A bitmap image can be converted offline using the logo utility that converts the logo from bitmap format into OSD format. The encoder supports logo for a full resolution screen; however, there is a limit for storing the OSD6 logo file and the limit is 2 Mbyte. It is recommended to first configure the video services and then upload the logo file. The logo can be uploaded from the web interface as follows: 1. Navigate to the Input tab of the Video component. 2. Navigate to the location of the Logo file (for example logo.osd) and press the Upload button. Figure 6.7 Uploading the Logo File 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-17

292 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Full Slate The AVP 4000 allows the user to upload a full video slate (similar format to the Logo file) which will be displayed on the full screen before being encoded. The Slate can be selected as a Source, for testing purposes, or as an apology slate when the video source is lost on the incoming SDI input. The Slate is the same format as a Logo file and can be created using the Logo creator utility. Only OSD files of type OSD6 are supported on the AVP Note: The encoder supports Full Slate for a full resolution screen; however, there is a limit for storing the OSD6 Slate file and the limit is 3 Mbyte Advanced Slate Display Options for the EI9001 and EI9001T On EI9001/EI9001T Cards, the slate can also be displayed automatically when certain options are enabled on the Video Component Input tab. Unless otherwise specified, the following instructions assume each of these features are enabled in isolation, although they may of course be combined with logical consequences Display Slate after Sensitivity Delay This feature monitors the Video Input Lock also displayed on this tab. The selection made in Output on Video Loss governs the immediate response of the encoder to the loss of lock. Sensitivity Delay defines a hysteresis for slate display. The delay is relative to the loss of lock but with a variance of +/-2 seconds. If for example, Output on Video Loss is set to Freeze Frame, upon loss of lock, after the encoding delay, the output video will freeze, and Sensitivity Delay seconds later, +/-2 seconds, the slate will be output, unless the lock was reacquired in the meantime. The same Sensitivity Delay provides hysteresis for slate removal /1553-FGC Uen Y

293 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.8 Slate Sensitivity Delay Settings Lock loss generates alarms whether this feature is enabled or not. When it is enabled, a fail over to slate will suppress further alarms from the next options, even if these are enabled Option Detect under Action On > Freeze Frame This feature functions in a similar way to the one above. The condition which starts the hysteresis is the detection of a still picture. A natural still will not trigger the condition, only a succession of identical frames. The hysteresis is defined by two delays Time Threshold Before Slate and Time Threshold Before Recovery. Timing is approximate: +/-3 seconds. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-19

294 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.9 Slate Detection Settings If the slate has been triggered, an alarm referring to this condition (frozen video) is raised, unless the slate has also been triggered by one of the other two Action On features, in which case only the alarm referring to both frozen video and silent audio is raised Option Detect under Action On > Silent Audio This feature monitors a single audio component belonging to the service. It can only detect silence in streams that are transcoded, since pass-through streams are not decoded. The selection is made by stream number which bears no relationship with PIDs or other service metadata. It is recommended to check that the expected component has been selected by hovering over it in the Outputs pane with the mouse /1553-FGC Uen Y

295 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.10 Audio Selection Settings Silence is detected when all channels in the audio component have a volume lower than the value set in the Audio Threshold box. The hysteresis is defined by two delays Time Threshold Before Slate and Time Threshold Before Recovery. Timing is approximate: +/-3 seconds. If the slate has been triggered, an alarm referring to this condition (silent audio) is raised, unless the slate has also been triggered by one of the other two Action On features, in which case only the alarm referring to both frozen video and silent audio is raised Option Detect under Action On > Freeze Frame and Silence The other two options can be enabled at the same time and they operate independently, either condition triggering the slate as soon as their time thresholds are satisfied. Enabling detection in Action On > Freeze Frame and Silence however, requires that both conditions coexist for the duration of the Time Threshold Before Slate before the slate is output. Conversely, if only one condition (or none) persists for the duration of the Time Threshold before Recovery, then the slate is removed (unless other options are enabled and in slate triggering conditions). Timing is approximate: +/-3 seconds. If the slate has been triggered by this option, then the video component is frozen and the selected audio component is silent, so the combined alarm is always raised. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-21

296 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.7 Data Network Redundancy Redundancy Note: Both outputs of a pair are active at the same time; therefore the use of primary and secondary ports is meaningless in this configuration. The four Ethernet data ports operate as two redundant pairs. Data 1 and 2 (Ge 1 with Ge 2) are inputs and Data 3 and 4 (Ge 3 with Ge 4) are outputs. When an output Transport Stream is defined, it is assigned by the user to Data 3 and 4. Both ports are independent of each other i.e. the IP address, MAC address, subnet mask and default gateway can have different settings. Both ports are active at the same time and transmit the same data. If both ports are configured to be on the same subnet, only one port will respond to ICMP messages. Figure 6.11 Data Network Redundancy The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions. 6.8 Data Routing Packet Processing Every received packet is examined and based on a routing table, determines where the packet should be routed, or whether the packet should be dropped. The only received packets that need to be processed are: ARP ICMP /1553-FGC Uen Y

297 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Reflex PCR Exchange Messages (UDP) The only possible destinations for received packets are: The Reflex PCR Exchange Message Handler The Host Processor Handling Processed Packets Packets are routed or dropped based on the following fields: MAC destination address Source IP address and mask Destination IP address and mask EtherType (to allow filtering of ARP ICMP STP etc) UDP and TCP Destination UDP Port Number 6.9 Setmode Overview The Setmode function enables the switch of the operation states of the services or of the whole device Operation States Offline Mode Retire Mode Preview Mode The Setmode function is available on two levels: media and unit level. The function provides five states on both of the levels. In offline mode, the entity does not enable the emissions and the input related alarms. In retire mode, the entity coordinates its going offline with a stand-by entity taking over the media transmission. In preview mode, the entity attempts to transmit a Transport Stream, but not the associated emissions. This mode can be used for monitoring an output or for preconfiguring a unit or Transport Stream output for fast redundancy switching. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-23

298 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Takeover Mode Online Mode Takeover mode is applied only for entities requiring external synchronization. The device waits for the correct synchronization in this state, and transmits only when the synchronization is correct. In online mode, the entity transmits a Transport Stream output and other emissions for online operations. The input related alarms are enabled. Note: The redundancy switch coordination is supported by the Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP). If MGP is disabled, retire, preview and takeover modes are not available. The following setmode transitions are not supported: offline to retire, retire to preview, and preview to retire Configuring Setmode To set up Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP), browse to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup, select MGP Support and set the MGP Mode parameter in the Properties widget. When using the front panel menu, select Advanced/System/MGP Support/MGP Mode. In off state, only offline or online mode can be set for both the unit and the media. In module level state, only offline or online mode can be set for the unit, but any of the five possible modes for the media. In unit level state, any of the five possible modes can be set for the unit, but only offline or online mode for the media Configuring Setmode on Unit Level By browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and selecting Base Unit, the Setmode can easily be configured by Offline and Online buttons and by the Current State Parameter in the Properties widget. On the front panel, select Advanced/System/Base Unit/Change State Configuring Setmode on Media Level By browsing to Service Configuration and selecting the appropriate Transport Stream in the Outputs widget, Setmode can easily be configured by Offline and Online buttons and by the Status of Service parameter in the Properties widget under the Transport Stream accordion panel. On the front panel, select Output/Slot n/ Transport Stream ID: n/change State /1553-FGC Uen Y

299 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.10 SNTP Overview The unit can obtain the current time from a network time server using SNTPv4 (RFC 4330) and is capable of working with Microsoft Windows Time, (SNTP as defined in RFC 1769) SNTP Time Server If an SNTP Time Server is selected, and communications are established with it, then the unit uses the time obtained to correct the system s real time clock, and the user cannot set the clock. If a time server has been configured, but it fails to respond, then an SNTP Server Failed To Respond alarm is generated. Note: SNTP always uses port Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite and is defined in a set of standards (RFC RFC 1067, RFC RFC 1157, RFC 1213, RFC RFC 1452, RFC RFC 1910, RFC 2576, RFC RFC 3418) published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Supported Protocols SNMP versions 1, 2c and 3 are supported, primarily for alarm trap handling. The General Ericsson Television MIB is also supported. Note: The unit does not support control via SNMP, all remote control is via HTTP Operation The unit s SNMP functionality can be enabled or disabled, with up to five IP addresses assigned for any SNMP Trap message to be sent. The default is , which causes the SNMP traps to be sent to the last SNMP master. The SNMP community name can also be set. The user can control which SNMP traps are generated. The options are; Start Messages only Fail and Start Messages only 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-25

300 Advanced Video Processing and Networking All Traps Table 6.7 SNMP Interface Parameters Parameter SNMP Read Community SNMP Location SNMP Contact SNMP Trap Community SNMP Trap Destination SNMP Trap Alarm Level Description The SNMP community name for read access. default = public Textual description of the location of the unit Name of the person responsible for this unit The SNMP community name for read access. default = private The destination IP address for SNMP trap messages. Up to five destinations can be defined, but by default none are assigned Defines what events trigger the generation of an SNMP trap message. The options are: Start Messages Only, i.e. only system start up events. Fail and Start Messages only i.e. start-up events and critical alarms. All traps i.e. start-up events and all alarms and warnings XPO The unit supports an HTTP interface that is XPO2 compliant for configuration and status monitoring. At least three simultaneous HTTP sessions can be supported. HTTP access can be enabled or disabled. Individual parameters can be controlled via XPO2. It does not require the complete XML configuration to be sent to change a single parameter. Note: The legacy XPO standard is not supported. The web pages provide a service orientated control menu structure User Access User Authentication The unit supports user authentication as defined in the XPO Specification. By default, user authentication is turned off. When set to On, a user name and password is required to access the web pages. The default user name (engineer) and password (password) can be changed by the user under the Encoder > Base Unit > User Authentication node in Device Configuration > Advanced Setup through the web user interface or in the Advanced/System/Base Unit/User Authentication menu through the Front Panel /1553-FGC Uen Y

301 Advanced Video Processing and Networking 6.14 IP Source PID Monitoring and Redundancy For source IP streams, the AVP 4000 can be set into a mode to monitor some incoming PIDs for errors. The error monitoring will check for Continuity count errors. Missing PID. The monitoring is only available for video and audio components, and is limited to a maximum of 40 PIDs in total shared across all services being transcoded. A selection of the PIDs being monitored may also be selected to control redundancy switching of the IP source. Use of this feature requires that the primary and backup are mirrors using the same PIDs for the same components. All components selected for monitoring may be selected as also used to control redundancy switching Selecting PIDs for Monitoring When configuring the AVP 4000 to perform a transcoded service from an IP source, the wizard will present a step in which the user selects which PIDs, if any, are to be monitored or monitor-and-redundancy switch. See Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to Set Up Transcoded (Re-encoded) Services on EI9001T. Alternatively, the user may select the PIDs to monitor by selecting a component whose source PID is to be monitored, and choosing its Component tab. Examples for a video and an audio component are shown in Figure 6.12 and Figure Figure 6.12 Video Components Tab 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-27

302 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.13 Audio Components Tab Configuring Thresholds for PID Monitoring The PID monitor checks for both continuity count errors and for missing PIDs, for the PIDs on which it has been enabled. Both conditions have parameters which may be adjusted for different levels of error tolerance in the environment in which the AVP 4000 has been deployed. The parameters are common to all PIDs being monitored. They may be found by navigating in the web GUI to Service Configuration > Outputs > IP or ASI > Transport Stream > Service, and viewing the Properties of that selected Service, as shown in Figure /1553-FGC Uen Y

303 Advanced Video Processing and Networking Figure 6.14 Service Properties Error Monitoring The Error Monitoring accordion panel has three parameters: Continuity Count Error Threshold - Dictates how many CC errors may occur within a sliding window in time, before an alarm is raised by the unit. Continuity Count Error Sampling Window - Sets the sliding window time period for monitoring of CC errors. Maximum Valid PID Missing Period - This parameter sets a sliding window time period for monitoring of missing PIDs. PIDs are sampled once per second for their presence. If a PID is missing for the number of seconds as set in the parameter, an alarm is raised. The alarm will only clear once the PID is present for the number of seconds set in the parameter Limitations The AVP 4000 will only monitor a maximum of 40 separate PIDs regardless of the PID distribution across incoming transport streams and transcoded services. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 6-29

304 Advanced Video Processing and Networking BLANK /1553-FGC Uen Y

305 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Chapter 7 Contents 7.1 Introduction Option Cards Available at this Release Option Card Combinations Slot Chassis Slot Chassis EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Option Cards Overview Interfaces Video Ancillary Data VBI Indications ASI I/O Option Card Overview Interfaces External Sync Input Option Card Overview Interfaces GPI Option Card Overview GPI Triggered Splicing Alarm Relay Load Stored Configurations Data Input Interfaces CE-HEVC Option Cards Overview Inputs Video Input Detection Ancillary Data Audio Compression Indications Software and Firmware Upgrades Removal and Replacement of Modules Handling Modules Electrostatic Discharge /1553-FGC Uen Y 7-1

306 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Installing a New Module Removing a Module Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module Option Card Plug and Play List of Figures Figure 7.1 Option Card Slot Numbering (6-Slot) Figure 7.2 Option Card Slot Numbering (4-Slot) Figure 7.3 EI9001 Encoder Option Card Figure 7.4 EI9001T Transcoder Option Card Figure 7.5 ASI I/O Option Card Figure 7.6 External Sync Input Option Card Figure 7.7 GPIO Option Card Figure 7.8 CE-HEVC Option Cards Figure 7.9 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules List of Tables Table 7.1 Option Cards Available at this Release Table 7.2 Option Card Combinations (6-Slot) Table 7.3 Option Card Combinations (4-Slot) /1553-FGC Uen Y

307 Options, Licensing and Upgrades 7.1 Introduction This chapter describes the options that may be used with the Ericsson Advanced Video Processor (AVP) Family, and the removal and replacement of options. It also describes the procedure for obtaining licenses and how to upgrade your unit. 7.2 Option Cards Available at this Release Table 7.1 lists the option cards that are supported at this release. Table 7.1 Option Cards Available at this Release Marketing Code Price Object Number Supply Object Number Description AVP/HWO/EI9001/A FAZ /213 ROA Single channel EI9001 Encoder AVP/HWO/EI9001T/A FAZ /214 ROA Single channel EI9001 Transcoder AVP/HWO/ASI/IO/A FAZ /215 ROA ASI Input/Output Card with 2x Inputs and 2x Outputs AVP/HWO/EXTSYNC/A FAZ /216 ROA External Sync Module AVP/HWO/GPI/A FAZ /217 ROA General Purpose Input Card CE/HWO/HEVC/BNC/A FAZ /272 ROA HEVC Media Processing module with BNC connections CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/C/A FAZ /273 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Copper CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/F/A FAZ /274 ROA HEVC Card-SFP Fiber 7.3 Option Card Combinations Slot Chassis Table 7.2 lists the option cards that are available for the AVP 6-slot chassis and the slots that the cards must be fitted in (in order of preference). Table 7.2 Option Card Combinations (6-Slot) Option Card Recommended Slot Positions EI9001 6, 5, 4, 3 EI9001T 6, 5, 4, 3 ASI I/O 1, 2, 3, 4 Ext SYNC 1, 2, 3, 4 GPI 1, 2, 3, 4 CE-HEVC BNC 6, 5, 4, 3 CE-HEVC SFP/C 6, 5, 4, 3 CE-HEVC SFP/F 6, 5, 4, 3 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-3

308 Options, Licensing and Upgrades For example, if two EI9001 are fitted in a chassis with an ASI Card, the recommended slot positions are: Slot 6: EI9001 Slot 5: EI9001 Slot 1: ASI I/O Notes: Up to four EI9001 / EI9001T can be fitted in a chassis. The numbering of option card slots on the AVP 4000 is shown in Figure 7.1. Figure 7.1 Option Card Slot Numbering (6-Slot) The features of the available Video Compression Modules (VCMs) and other Option Cards are described in the following paragraphs Slot Chassis Table 7.3 lists the option cards that are available for the AVP 4-slot chassis and the slots that the cards must be fitted in (in order of preference). Table 7.3 Option Card Combinations (4-Slot) Option Card Recommended Slot Positions EI9001 4, 3, 2, 1 EI9001T 4, 3, 2, 1 ASI I/O 1, 2, 3, 4 Ext SYNC 1, 2, 3, 4 GPI 1, 2, 3, 4 CE-HEVC BNC 4, 3, 2, 1 CE-HEVC SFP/C 4, 3, 2, 1 CE-HEVC SFP/F 4, 3, 2, 1 For example, if two EI9001 are fitted in a chassis with an ASI Card, the recommended slot positions are: Slot 4: EI9001 Slot 3: EI9001 Slot 1: ASI I/O 7-4 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

309 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Notes: Up to four EI9001 / EI9001T can be fitted in a chassis. The numbering of option card slots on the AVP 4000 is shown in Figure 7.1. Figure 7.2 Option Card Slot Numbering (4-Slot) The features of the available Video Compression Modules (VCMs) and other Option Cards are described in the following paragraphs. 7.4 EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder Option Cards Overview The EI9001 Encoder / EI9001T Transcoder can encode a single video input. Figure 7.3 EI9001 Encoder Option Card Figure 7.4 EI9001T Transcoder Option Card Note: EI9001/EI9001T modules can be fitted in slots 6, 5, 4 or 3. Up to four modules may be fitted to the base chassis. For more details on the card capabilities (Video, Audio, VBI, etc.), see Chapter 6, Advanced Video Processing and Networking. For the list of available licenses, see section Chapter 3, Getting Started (section Video Licenses) Interfaces This module provides the following inputs: 3G/HD/SD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector. One SDI Monitor Output via a 75 Ω BNC female connector (EI9001T Transcoder Option Card only). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-5

310 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Video SDI video input. Frame re-synchronization. Programmable bandwidth filter. SD & HD H.264, 4:2:0 Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). SD & HD MPEG-2 4:2:0 Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). SD & HD H.264, 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). SD & HD MPEG-2 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 567 or 480 (SD). Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 720 (SD). Reduced horizontal resolutions are configurable on the VCM but are not recommended for contribution feeds. If selected, the reduced resolution must also be supported by the decoder. Scene cut detection Ancillary Data Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334. Time Code. OP-47 (Subtitles). Generic ANC extraction VBI Video Index. Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334, or line 21. World Standard Text (WST ETS300472) (625 line only). Wide Screen Signaling (WSS or WSS-AFD). SMPTE AFD and Bar Data. VITC Timecode Indications An LED is provided to indicate SDI lock Status /1553-FGC Uen Y

311 Options, Licensing and Upgrades 7.5 ASI I/O Option Card Overview The ASI I/O option card provides two asynchronous serial input and two asynchronous serial output interfaces which conform to Part 9 of CENELCE EN , subclause 4.3 and can transmit DVB/MPEG-2 Transport Streams up to a rate of 270 Mbps. The ASI option card uses the 27 MHz System Clock Reference (SCR) signal from the base chassis as its frequency reference. The output bit rate of the ASI Card is configurable up to 150 Mbps. The module automatically configures Burst or Byte Mode. For a Transport Stream rate less than 70 Mbps, packets are sent in Byte Mode. Above 70 Mbps Burst Mode is used. Figure 7.5 ASI I/O Option Card Interfaces The ASI I/O option card has the following interfaces: Two 75 Ω female BNC input connectors. Two 75 Ω female BNC output connectors. The input connectors are used for feeding the unit with external Transport Streams to be passed through to an output. The output connectors can be configured as a mirrored output pair (with the same Transport Stream on both outputs) or two independent outputs (with different Transport Streams on each output). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-7

312 Options, Licensing and Upgrades 7.6 External Sync Input Option Card Overview With the External Sync Input option card the internal 27 MHz System Clock Reference of the unit can be locked to an external clock source. The synchronizing signal is input via a 75 Ω female BNC connector on the rear panel. The unit can be configured to lock to either a PAL or NTSC black burst signal, or a 1 V peak to peak 10 MHz reference. If the input is a black burst signal, the horizontal sync information is extracted and passed to the Host Controller Card. If the input is a 10 MHz clock signal, it is directly passed to the Host Controller card. Figure 7.6 External Sync Input Option Card Interfaces The External Sync Input option card has the following interface: One 75 Ω female BNC input connector for connecting a 10 MHz 1V pp reference signal or an analogue video signal. 7.7 GPI Option Card Overview The GPI option card supports the following functions: GPI triggered splicing. Alarm relay (not supported in this release). GPI loading of stored configurations (not supported in this release). IEC-232 (RS-232) Data Input (not supported in this release). Note: GPI is only supported for manual SCTE-35 insertion /1553-FGC Uen Y

313 Options, Licensing and Upgrades GPI Triggered Splicing The GPI card provides an option for splicing triggered by GPI pin state change. When configured, the card sends SCTE-104 messages to the encoders of the VCMs fitted in the unit by closing and opening general purpose input pins Alarm Relay The GPI card provides an alarm and a fail relay on the 25-way D-type interface. The GPI inputs allow various specific Encoder functions to be controlled using 16 contact closure inputs. The controlled functions are software assigned. The alarm/fail relay contacts provide alarm relay interfaces that can be used to send a signal to remote equipment on an alarm condition Load Stored Configurations The GPI input pins can be used to trigger the loading of any of the 64 stored configurations on the unit. The selection of the stored configuration is made by configuring 6 of the GPI input pins as a binary representation of the store number while a 7 th pin provides the toggle to action the loading of the configuration Data Input The Data Input provides an asynchronous serial data communications interface conforming to the IEC-232 (RS-232) standard Interfaces The GPI option card has the following interfaces: One 9-way D-type female connector labeled as DATA IN. One 25-way D-type female connector labeled as GPI/ALARM. Figure 7.7 GPIO Option Card 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-9

314 Options, Licensing and Upgrades 7.8 CE-HEVC Option Cards Overview The CE-HEVC VCM is can encode either a single HD HEVC video from SDI input 1, or a single UHD (4K) HEVC video using the 4 inputs provided. By default the basic card is purchased with no video or audio encode functionality. Licenses are required to enable all video and audio encoding functionality, while 2 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II Audio are available by default. Video and audio encoding functionality is enabled or extended by the purchase of feature licenses, summarized in Chapter 1, Introduction. Figure 7.8 CE-HEVC Option Cards Note: Up to 4 CE-HEVC modules can be fitted. If the appropriate licenses are available, up to 16 channel pairs of audio can be encoded using the MPEG-1 Layer II algorithm, 6 audio channel pairs can be encoded in Dolby Digital or 6 channel pairs in (HE-) AAC. There is also an option to configure the unit to pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby Digital, Dolby-E or Linear PCM audio. Audio decode is not supported. The processing Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) is not currently supported in this release Inputs There are two module options available providing either BNC or SFP inputs: 3G/HD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector. UHD using 4 off 3G-SDI Inputs via 75 Ω BNC female connectors. Or /1553-FGC Uen Y

315 Options, Licensing and Upgrades 3G/HD-SDI Input via an LC optical female connector. UHD using 4 off 3G-SDI Inputs via LC female connectors. Note: SFP Modules are NOT hot-swappable Video SDI video input. Frame re-synchronization. HD & UHD HEVC, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 2160 (UHD). Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 3840 (UHD). Low Delay/Mega Low Delay. Bit rate tracking Input Detection The CE-HEVC VCM is capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available at the SDI input. See Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to Configure and use Video Input detection for details Ancillary Data Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334. Time Code. SMPTE AFD and Bar Data HDR/WSS signalling. SDR (BT.709), UHD SDR (BT.2020), HDR HLG10 (HDR in VUI), HDR HLG10 (SDR in VUI), HDR PQ Audio Compression Up to eight channels AES/EBU digital audio input either de-embedded from SD/HD-SDI or via the Audio/Data input connector. Supported audio coding modes: - MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps) (additional pairs available with CE/SWO/M1L2 software option). - MPEG-1 Layer II Phase Aligned Audio (384 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/PAA). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-11

316 Options, Licensing and Upgrades - Dolby Digital (56 kbps to 640 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3). - AAC LC/HE-AAC (32 kbps to 192 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/AAC). - Pass-through of pre-encoded Dolby Digital (1 5.1 channels). - Pass-through of pre-encoded Dolby E. - Pass-through of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM SMPTE 302M) Indications LEDs are provided to indicate SDI Lock Status. 7.9 Software and Firmware Upgrades A single Upgrade Wizard is available for the unit and all option cards that can be fitted for upgrading the unit software and firmware through the Ethernet control port. To install software upgrade, navigate to the folder where the Upgrade Wizard is saved, and run the executable file. Notes: Follow instructions provided with the software upgrade wizard to reduce the risk of upgrade failure. The upgrade process needs approximately 50 minutes to finish. The unit automatically reboots during the process. Following an upgrade, the unit configuration is lost and any stored configurations may no longer be compatible with the new software. A configuration converter tool is available to convert existing configurations so that they can be re-used. Refer to instructions provided with the converter tool for more information. To recover the unit from a failed upgrade, refer to the instructions provided with the Upgrade Wizard Removal and Replacement of Modules This section gives information relating to the handling of option modules as they are inserted or removed from the unit /1553-FGC Uen Y

317 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Handling Modules Caution! Care must be taken to when inserting or withdrawing modules to avoid damage to underside components. Modules must be kept orthogonal, i.e. at 90 degrees to the unit, to avoid catching underside components on the chassis. Figure 7.9 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules Caution! Do not plug in modules with excessive force as this may result in damage to the module connector or other components. If any significant resistance to inserting a module is felt, withdraw the module slightly and check for obstructions Electrostatic Discharge Warning! Static electricity can damage electronic components. To avoid damage, keep modules in their static-protective package until you are ready to install them. To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following precautions: Where possible ensure that antistatic protection is worn (for example an earthed antistatic wrist strap, an ankle or heel strap). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-13

318 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Handle modules carefully, holding them by edges or rear panels. Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry. Do not leave the modules where others can handle and possibly damage them. While the module is still in its anti-static package, touch it to an unpainted metal part of the system unit for at least two seconds. (This drains static electricity from the package and from your body). Remove the module from its package and install it directly into your base chassis without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the module down, place it in its static-protective package. Take additional care when handling modules during cold weather, because heating reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity Installing a New Module A new module can be inserted when the unit is powered off or on. When inserted and powered, the unit will determine the module capabilities and make it available for configuration. Initially a default set of parameters will be in place. As long as there are licenses available for the features required, the module can then be configured and used immediately. Caution! To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section ) and avoid electrostatic discharge (see section ). To install a new module: 1. Remove the blanking plate from the module slot in which the new module is to be fitted. 2. Carefully remove the new module from its anti-static package, and insert it in to the base unit, slotting the module edges in to the module guides. 3. Push the module home, so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base unit. 4. Tighten the two captive retaining screws. 5. When the chassis detects a new card fitted, it will be displayed on the Dashboard, and an alarm will be raised. If all options are reported correctly, the Accept Hardware Configuration needs to be applied. This will accept the new hardware configuration and clear the alarm /1553-FGC Uen Y

319 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Removing a Module Caution! To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see Section ) and avoid electrostatic discharge (see Section ). To remove a module: 1. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the module in the base unit. 2. Holding the captive screws, pull the module from the unit and place it in suitable anti-static packaging. 3. Fit a blanking panel in place of the removed module. 4. When the unit detects a card is no longer present, it will be displayed on the Option Slots web page, and an alarm will be raised. If all options are reported correctly, the Accept Option Slot Configuration needs to be applied. This will accept the new hardware configuration and clear the alarm Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module A module can be replaced on a like-for-like basis without powering down the base unit, i.e. can be hot-swapped. This will cause services to be allocated to other modules, if available, enabling the removal of the module in question. In this way, essential maintenance can be carried out with minimum disruption. The replacement module must be of the same type and at the same software version as the original. The replacement module must be fitted into the same option slot as the module it is replacing. To perform a hot-swap, the modules should only be unplugged or inserted when the unit is fully booted and configured. Only ONE module should be hot-swapped at a time, to prevent problems due to inrush current, and to ensure that the host recognizes and configures the new module. A wait time of at least 40 seconds is recommended between removing the module and replacing or inserting a new module. Note: It could take between 2 to 4 minutes from inserting the module for it to be recognized, configured and produce video out following a hot swap operation. Caution! To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section ) and avoid electrostatic discharge (see section ). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 7-15

320 Options, Licensing and Upgrades Notes: If the software or firmware version on the newly inserted card is different from the software or firmware version on the replaced card, the Upgrade Wizard must be run again to resolve the version conflicts. The conflict is reported on the Dashboard in the Model accordion of the Device Information widget and on the Versions tab of the Support page. The process to replace an option card is as follows: 1. Disconnect any cables from the option card to be replaced. 2. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the option card in the base chassis. 3. Holding the captive screws, pull the option card from the unit, (observe the handling precautions and advice for module pairs where applicable). 4. Carefully remove the replacement option card from its anti-static package, and insert it in to the base chassis, slotting the card edges in to the card guides. 5. Push the card home; so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base chassis (observe the handling precautions and advice for module pairs where applicable). 6. Tighten the two captive retaining screws. 7. Connect any external cables to the replacement option card. Note: If the replacement card is of the same type as the failed card, has the same capabilities (licenses), is at the same software version and is fitted in the same slot, then it will be automatically configured to the same settings as the failed card. If the replacement card is of a different type then an alarm will be generated Option Card Plug and Play The unit is designed around a Plug and Play concept to make it as easy as possible to add new option cards and functionality. This means that the chassis and Host controller card provide a base level of functionality, while any specific functionality associated with an option card is contained on the option card itself. A good example of this is MPEG SI generation. The Host controller provides the functionality to generate and play out the SI required by a Transport Stream. However a VCM is required to provide any descriptors required for any elementary stream types that it generates /1553-FGC Uen Y

321 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Chapter 8 Contents 8.1 Introduction Preventive Maintenance Routine Inspection Cleaning Servicing Damage Requiring Service Replacement Parts Checks on Completion of Servicing Maintenance and Support Introduction Warranty Service Levels Agreements Alarms Alarms - Control Port Alarms - Data Port Alarm Monitor Widget VCM Alarms Fault-finding Fault-finding Philosophy Preliminary Checks Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working Fuse Replacement Lithium Battery Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating Cannot Access Web GUI Unit Cannot Be Pinged General Operation Problems Time for Parameters to Update Before Rebooting the Unit Problem Changing IP Address and Gateway Address on Front Panel Problems Adding Program Clock Reference (PCR) Picture in Picture (PiP) Cannot Be Configured Logo or Slate File Does Not Upload Automatic Loudness Control (ALC) Not Working in Fast Channel Zap mode VBI Operation Problems /1553-FGC Uen Y 8-1

322 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Ancillary Timecode (ATC) Not Extracted and Placed into the VBI Data PES Default Value for Bar Data Closed Captioning Conversion No VITC Control of Timecode Video Index Operation and Active Format Description (AFD) Problems Number of VBI Lines Supported Line Numbering for VBI Lines ANC Output Dropped Reflex and Seamless Operation Problems Internal Reflex Automatic Settings Problems Seamless Mode Parameter Restrictions Seamless Mode parameter results in a buffer size out of specification Transcode, Re-encoding and Pass-thru Problems Transcode Mode VBI & Teletext Configuration Not Being Completed Component Selection Problems When Transcoding Teletext Re-encoding Problems Video Limitations When Transcoding Time Taken for an Output Service to Appear when Transcoding Using EI9001T Restrictions on DVB Subtitles Pass-thru DVB Subtitles Not Supported When Outputting Down-converted Video DVB Subtitles Bit Rate Setting Video Recovery Delay When Switching MPEG-2 to H Alarms Raised for (DSP is Not Responding to its Controller) Unit XML Log Files Saved and Exported Configurations Exported Configuration Saved Configuration Remote Server Logging Overview Configuring Remote Server Logging Configuring the Remote Server Limitations and Specifications of Remote Server Logging Calling a Service Engineer List of Figures Figure 8.1 DVB Subtitles Bit Rate Figure 8.2 Selecting Remote Server Logging List of Tables Table 8.1 Alarms - Control Port Table 8.2 Alarms - Data Port Table 8.3 Status LED Unlit Fault-finding /1553-FGC Uen Y

323 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Table 8.4 Fans Not Working/Overheating Table 8.5 Cannot Access Web GUI Table 8.6 Unit Cannot be Pinged /1553-FGC Uen Y 8-3

324 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding BLANK 8-4 1/1553-FGC Uen Y

325 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding 8.1 Introduction This chapter details the schedules and instructions, where applicable, for routine inspection, cleaning and maintenance of the equipment which should be performed by an operator. It also details basic fault-finding procedures. 8.2 Preventive Maintenance Routine Inspection Check cooling fan operation regularly. The fans are temperature controlled so may not be on if the ambient temperature is low. Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for more information. Note: Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is detected by a temperature sensor on the Host Card or a MPM and causes the alarm to be raised Cleaning Caution! Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Unplug the unit from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a damp cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Note: Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned Servicing Damage Requiring Service Warning! Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only Ericsson trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this equipment. Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-5

326 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding When the power supply cord or plug is damaged. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used parts specified by the manufacturer or which have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards Checks on Completion of Servicing Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform electrical safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be required. 8.3 Maintenance and Support Introduction Ericsson is a leader in the design, integration and implementation of digital broadcasting products and systems. It has a large team dedicated to keeping our customers on-air 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service facilities in the US, UK, and Asia, Ericsson covers the world. There is a customer service centre open round the clock, every day of the year. Years of design and support experience enable it to offer a range of service options that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense Warranty All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty Service Levels Agreements Customers may choose one of several Support packages, either as an enhancement during the standard 12-month warranty or as an extension after the warranty has expired /1553-FGC Uen Y

327 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding For standalone equipment, customers may choose either Ericsson s Extended Hardware Warranty or Secure Basic Support. Extended Hardware Warranty provides hardware repair of covered equipment after the expiration of the standard warranty. Secure Basic Support provides hardware repair, remote diagnostics and support, and 24x7x365 remote support for emergencies. For systems, along with Secure Basic Support, customers have the option of either Secure Advanced Support or Secure Superior Support. These support packages provide higher committed response and resolution times, onsite support where necessary, service performance review and a host of other proactive services to help you get the maximum return on your investment in Ericsson solutions. Call Ericsson Sales for more details. 8.4 Alarms See Annex E, Alarm Lists for further details of possible alarm messages Alarms - Control Port The control ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions. Table 8.1 Alarms - Control Port Alarm Ethernet interface Ctrlx link down on Control network Ethernet interface Ctrl1 on Control network: duplicate IP detected Control Network Lost Virtual IP address on Control network: duplicate IP detected Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Control Network Network Configuration failed Description No link has been established on Ethernet Control Port Ctrl x Another device has responded to an ARP request for this Control port IP address Control Network Lost Virtual IP address on Control network: duplicate IP detected Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Control Network Failed to configure Network setting. Using default network configuration Alarms - Data Port The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-7

328 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Table 8.2 Alarms - Data Port Alarm Ethernet interface Data z link down in Data Interface Group x-y Ethernet interface Data z in Data Interface Group x-y: duplicate IP detected Virtual IP address on Data Interface Group x-y: duplicate IP detected Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Data Interface Group x-y Data x: Duplicate IP Address Data Interface Group x-y: Data Network Lost Network Configuration failed Description Data interface in data interface group x-y has gone down. Another device has responded to an ARP request for the IP address set for Data z interface in data interface group x-y. The virtual IP address assigned to data interface group 1-2 or 3-4 is already in use. Primary interface is not in use in data interface group x-y or 3-4. Duplicate IP Address Detected; Another device has responded to an ARP request for the IP address of this port The connection with data interface group x-y has been lost. Failed to configure Network setting. Using default network configuration Alarm Monitor Widget Current Tab The alarm status of the chassis is available on the Current tab of the Alarm Monitor widget on the Dashboard. All currently active alarms will be displayed, along with details of the time and date that the alarm was raised, the severity and description of the alarm and which module the alarm is associated with. Alarm History A complete history of all alarms raised and cleared since the last power cycle is displayed on the History tab of the Alarm Monitor widget on the Dashboard. Masking Alarms The severity of the currently active alarms and those displayed on the History tab can be edited if required. For this, open the required alarm, and change the severity to be a warning, minor, major, critical or masked. Note: If the alarm is masked it will not be displayed on any of the reporting interfaces, and will not produce an SNMP trap message VCM Alarms Alarm Handling The VCM provides the following alarms back to the Host Card: Loss of video (from any source) /1553-FGC Uen Y

329 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Loss of audio (from any source). Loss of VBI data. Invalid parameter (indicating which area video/audio/vbi/anc data). Critical alarm (card has malfunctioned, internal log holds nature of failure). Over temperature (including a warning level as well as a critical level). All masking of alarms is handled by the Host Card. Self-monitoring The VCM self-monitors for correct operation and correct any inconsistencies it finds. This includes the resetting of malfunctioning sub-systems or the whole card if necessary. The module attempts to maintain correct operation to minimize the effects of faults. All such actions are reported through the alarms/status/logging back to the Host Card. Module Responses The Host Card monitors all responses back from the module and resets the module if appropriate. This includes initiating redundancy switches if this results in limiting the error period. All actions are logged by the Host Card. 8.5 Fault-finding Fault-finding Philosophy It is the objective of this section to provide sufficient information to enable you to rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect module, where possible. Some basic procedures are provided to follow in the event of a suspected failure. It is assumed that fault-finding has already been performed at a system level and that other equipment units have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure. Warning! Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only Ericsson trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this equipment. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-9

330 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Caution! Do not remove the top cover of this equipment as this may invalidate any warranties. Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties. This Reference Guide does not include any maintenance information or procedures that would require the removal of the top cover. If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, call a Service Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given in the preliminary pages of this Reference Guide Preliminary Checks Always investigate the failure symptoms fully, prior to taking remedial action. Fault diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the following tasks, since the operator should NOT remove the top cover of the equipment: 1. Check the front panel alarm/status LED. If this is not lit: a b Note: Confirm that the power switch is turned on (I). See Chapter 1, Introduction for location of the power switch. Replace the fuse in the power connector at the rear panel. Only replace the fuse once. If it blows again contact Ericsson Customer Services. c Replace external equipment, power source and cables by substitution to check their performance. 2. Confirm that the equipment hardware configuration is suitable for the purpose and has been correctly installed and connected (see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment). 3. Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem, and that the equipment software set-up is capable of performing the task being asked of it. If the validity of the configuration, set-up or operation is in doubt, check it (see Chapter 3, Getting Started). 4. Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly. When the failure condition has been fully investigated, and the symptoms are known, proceed with fault-finding according to the observed symptoms. If the fault persists, and cannot be rectified using the instructions given in this Reference Guide, contact Customer Services. Switch off the equipment if it becomes unusable, or to protect it from further damage /1553-FGC Uen Y

331 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working If the unit Status LED is unlit, fault-find the problem as detailed in Table 8.3. Table 8.3 Status LED Unlit Fault-finding Step Action If Result of Action is Yes If Result of Action is No 1 Is the LED/LCD display inactive but the unit still working? 2 Check Power Source. Connect a known-working piece of equipment to the power source outlet. Does it work? 3 Check Power Cable and Fuse. Unplug the power connector from the unit and try it in another piece of equipment. Does it work? 4 Check PSU Module(s) and Fuse(s). Ensure the power connector is unplugged. Remove the fuse from the rear panel connector and inspect it. Has the fuse blown? If the unit is clearly working normally then the LED/LCD Display itself is probably at fault. Call a Service Engineer. The problem lies within the unit or power cable. Proceed to next step. The problem lies within the unit. Proceed to next step. Replace the fuse with one of the correct type and rating (see Annex B Technical Specification). If the PSU still does not work, unplug the power cable and call a Service Engineer. Proceed to next step. The problem lies with the power source. Check building circuit breakers, fuse boxes, etc. If problem persists, contact the electricity supplier. The problem lies with either the cable itself, or with the fuse in the plug. Replace the fuse or try to substitute another cable. Possible problem with the PSU module. Call a Service Engineer Fuse Replacement Lithium Battery Please refer to the Installation, Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson Compression Products Reference Guide supplied with your product for full details of how to replace the fuse in your product. The lithium battery fitted within this product is not user replaceable and as such should only be replaced by qualified service personnel Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating The fan speed can be reduced (set to lowest noise) at low temperatures to allow the unit to quickly attain operational temperature. In the event of overheating problems, refer to Table 8.4. Note: Failure to ensure a free air-flow around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is detected by a temperature sensor; it may be used to trigger an automatic alarm. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-11

332 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Table 8.4 Fans Not Working/Overheating Step Action If Result of Action is Yes If Result of Action is No 1 Check Fan Rotation. Inspect the fans located at the sides of the enclosure. Are the fans rotating? Check Base Board temperature and fan. Check that the unit has been installed with sufficient space allowed for air-flow (see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment). If the ambient air is too hot, additional cooling may be required. Possible break in the DC supply from the PSU module to the suspect fan(s). Call a Service Engineer Cannot Access Web GUI In the event that you cannot access the web GUI, refer to Table 8.5. Table 8.5 Cannot Access Web GUI Step Action If Result of Action is Yes If Result of Action is No 1 Check whether the unit can be pinged. 2 If the loading of the unit control interface is stuck with a warning message "Use of this browser configuration is not officially supported by Ericsson", check whether the Internet Explorer 8 is used in compatibility mode. Is it? 3 Does a dialogue appear after accessing the interface requesting the user name and password? Proceed to next step. Turn off the compatibility mode in Internet Explorer 8 by following the steps below: 1. Press the Alt key, then select the Tools menu. 2. Select Compatibility View Settings. 3. Make sure that all the three checkboxes at the bottom are unchecked. 4. Click Close. 5. Re-open the browser. Give the credentials set before. (The default user name is "engineer", the default password is "password".) Not remembering the user name or the password, contact the customer services. Follow the instructions given in Unit Cannot Be Pinged. Proceed to next step. If the procedures given here cannot solve the problem, contact the customer services Unit Cannot Be Pinged Pinging a computer is a method of checking if a computer is on the network. Pings send a network request to a computer asking it to respond (ICMP ECHO_REQUEST). To ping a computer from a Windows/PC machine, use the MSDOS prompt and type the command: ping <IP address> A successful ping consists of receiving back a copy of a short transmitted test message. The reply will display ping statistics (number of packets sent and received and the time taken, in ms, to receive back those packets. In the event that you cannot ping your unit, refer to Table /1553-FGC Uen Y

333 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Table 8.6 Unit Cannot be Pinged Step Action If Result of Action is Yes If Result of Action is No 1 Check that the network cable is connected to one of the control ports on the back panel of the unit. Is the green LED lit? 2 Ensure that the IP control port address of the device is within the same subnet as your PC, then check the settings for the control IP port on the Front Panel. Does the used IP address belong to the unit to be accessed? 3 Check the subnet mask and gateway settings. For more information, see Ethernet Control Port. Are they correctly set up? 4 Check the firewall settings. Are they correct? 5 Restart the unit. Can it be now pinged? The problem probably lies with the network settings. Proceed to next step. The problem probably lies with the gateway or subnet mask settings. Proceed to next step. The problem probably lies with the firewall settings. Proceed to next step. Proceed to next step. Check the cable connection between the unit and the computer or between the unit and the network device. Note: In case of a direct connection between the unit and the control computer a cross Ethernet cable needs to be used. If connecting between the unit and the network device such as a switch or a hub a cross cable is not required. For more information, see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment. Set the correct IP address. Set up the subnet mask and gateway correctly. Set the firewall correctly. If you are unsure, turn the firewall off completely. Note: By turning the firewall off, your computer may be exposed to virus threats. Contact the customer services General Operation Problems Time for Parameters to Update Before Rebooting the Unit Parameters may take up to 10 seconds to be applied. Please wait 10 seconds for the configuration to be applied before rebooting the box after a configuration change Problem Changing IP Address and Gateway Address on Front Panel Checks are made to enforce valid settings for the IP address, the Subnet Mask and the Gateway address. We recommend changing the Gateway address to first then applying IP and Gateway last. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-13

334 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Problems Adding Program Clock Reference (PCR) A separate PCR component can be added to the service. The PID at the service level must be selected to match the PID of the PCR component Picture in Picture (PiP) Cannot Be Configured When the main video is set to MPEG-2, the H.264 PiP video component is not allowed to be configured in the web GUI. The only profile selection allowed by the GUI is Off Logo or Slate File Does Not Upload Currently logo sizes are restricted by width x height <= i.e. logo size 720x576 is OK. Bigger logo sizes may result in unwanted behavior. This does not affect slate operation. The Logo and Slate file format must be OSD6. Other Logo formats (OSD5 and OSD4) are not supported on EI9001 and EI9001T Automatic Loudness Control (ALC) Not Working in Fast Channel Zap mode Audio ALC is not a requirement for Low Delay or Fast Channel Zap with Look-ahead off (because of an additional delay of 160 ms required for ALC operation) VBI Operation Problems Ancillary Timecode (ATC) Not Extracted and Placed into the VBI Data PES The ATC is not a VBI component and is not part of the VBI in separate PID (VBI in PES). The ATC is only present in the MPEG-2 Sequence/GOP header in MPEG-2 or the H.264 SEI message in H Default Value for Bar Data There is no default / user default value for Bar Data in the EI9001T. Using a default value of top/bottom or left/right 0 bars with AFD = 'as coded frame' is meaningless information and has no effect on the final displayed image. Therefore the EI9001 will only generate Bar Data if a valid external source is present (or sustain is in operation). An externally sourced Bar Data of top/bottom or left/right 0 bars (or even Bar Data with no flags set and no bar values at all) will be propagated through. This behavior matches the EN8100 SD MPEG2 encoder but is different from the EN8190 operation where it inserts top/bottom = 0 when there is no other source of Bar Data Closed Captioning Conversion All broadcasts in the US must have closed captions by law (according to FCC), therefore Closed captions in MPEG-2 user data (or H.264 SEI message in H.264) will be inserted if they are enabled by the user /1553-FGC Uen Y

335 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding The control Closed captions OFF/VBI Lines will control the insertion of closed captions in both user data and VBI PID (if the VBI component is added) The Closed captions can also be carried in a Separate VBI PID. This is only carried from SDI input (VBI component). The user has to create a separate component No VITC Control of Timecode TC mode on the VBI page controls the timecode mode on the Video PES and does not control the output on a separate VBI PID (VBI on PES), The only control for VBI on PES is the presence of the VBI component and the selection of the appropriate VBI line as VITC Video Index Operation and Active Format Description (AFD) Problems For Video Index operation a difference may be observed in AFD operation between VBI PES and AFD in the SEI. For pass-thru of the Video Index line in PES, both the 1995 (3 bit AFD code) and 2008 (4-bit AFD code) versions are supported, i.e. the relevant 4 data bits are passed through unmodified and can be interpreted as either specification. For extraction of AFD code information from Video Index to SEI message/video User Data, the assumption is made that the 1995 specification is in use in the encoder/decoder chain. (3-bit AFD code only) Number of VBI Lines Supported The current version of AVP 4000 supports up to 7 lines of VBI on the top field and 7 lines of VBI on the bottom field. If more lines are selected, unwanted VBI operation may occur (see list of defects) Line Numbering for VBI Lines The AVP 4000 lists VBI lines ranges in NTSC: NTSC: Field 1 Line 9 to 22 Field 2 Line 272 to 285 PAL: Field 1 Line 6 to 23 Field 2 Line 319 to 335 Ericsson receivers describe the VBI line numbering as followed: NTSC: Field 1 Line 10 to 22 Field 2 Line 10 to 22 PAL: Field 1 Line 6 to 23 Field 2 Line 6 to ANC Output Dropped The Generic ANC Extraction off/on is the switch for ANC Data component activity, regardless of the individual components settings that are carried over ANC (Closed captions, SMPTE2031, OP47, etc.). 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-15

336 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding There is no status of the Generic ANC input carried over SMPTE 2038 output: bit rate or ANC content. However, there is an alarm if the incoming ANC (excluding audio) exceeds the bit rate set by the user. In this case, the ANC output will be dropped to avoid exceeding the maximum user bit rate and thus avoiding corrupting other components in the Transport Stream Reflex and Seamless Operation Problems Internal Reflex Automatic Settings Problems Different video formats in the same internal Reflex group may cause range issues when the Reflex setting is set to automatic mode. In this case, we recommend using the manual settings and using the recommended settings listed in Chapter 3, Getting Started. If problems are observed with Reflex in automatic mode, the following Reflex HD MPEG-2 manual mode settings are recommended: Bmin = 3 Mbps, Bmax = 20 Mbps, Buffer Delay = 2.6 seconds Seamless Mode Parameter Restrictions When the buffer mode is set to Seamless, the configuration of the encoder buffer size (VBV buffer in MPEG-2, CPB buffer in H.264) is set by the user using the following parameters: Buffer Delay between 500 ms to 7000 ms (Seamless Buffer Delay) Min Seamless Bitrate (Bmin) Buffer Size = Bmin x Buffer Delay In seamless mode, restrictions in Bmin and seamless delay are in place to force a reasonable encoding buffer size and avoids it to be to low If the seamless delay and Bmin are set too low, the Bmin range will change so that the buffer size (Bmin x Delay) remains above 1 Mbit in SD and 3 Mbit in HD. For example, in SD if the buffer delay is set to 500 ms, the lowest allowable Bmin is 2 Mbps. in HD, a buffer delay of 1000 ms will not allow any Bmin to be set below 3 Mbps Seamless Mode parameter results in a buffer size out of specification Although you are prevented from setting Bmin and Delay to values that will result in a small buffer size, there are NO restriction on the maximum value of the resulted buffer size. To ensure the buffer is compliant to the specifications, ensure that the buffer size is limited to the MPEG-2 or H.264 specifications. Buffer Size = Bmin x Buffer Delay /1553-FGC Uen Y

337 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Should not exceed the following: SD MPEG 2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD MPEG 2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit 1.8 Mbit 10 Mbit 12.5 Mbit 9.8 Mbit 20 Mbit 25 Mbit In order to get optimum settings for seamless and reflex operation, we recommend using the recommended values listed in Chapter 3, Getting Started Transcode, Re-encoding and Pass-thru Problems Transcode Mode VBI & Teletext Configuration Not Being Completed The input components in the incoming Transport Stream are detected at the point when the transcoder is setup. There is no status of input components (bit rate) or alarm if the component disappears from the input. However, if the whole incoming transport stream is missing, an alarm is raised. The setup and routing is therefore static and not dynamic; any change in the incoming input will not be automatically picked up by the unit, such as the incoming TS changing from MPEG-2 to H.264 or the number of Teletext Lines and location changing Component Selection Problems When Transcoding Transcode mode on the GUI allows the selection of components that are not necessarily present in the incoming stream. Always check the correctness of the component selection when using the GUI for transcode operation Teletext Re-encoding Problems When setting up a re-encode of Teletext, the Teletext lines are set automatically on the encoder output. If the Teletext lines on the input change, the encoder will not dynamically detect and set the encoder output. Always ensure that all lines are set as an output for the Teletext lines to appear dynamically on the output of the transcoder Video Limitations When Transcoding Transcode only allows 4:2:0 MPEG-2 and H.264 profiles up to 25 Mbps for H.264 and 80 Mbps for MPEG-2. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-17

338 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Time Taken for an Output Service to Appear when Transcoding Using EI9001T When the AVP 4000 fitted with an EI9001T transcoder is fed with an input, it may take up to 60 seconds to: output the transcoded service and the No Data Available from input TS to be cleared from the GUI. This is due to the network handshakes taking place Restrictions on DVB Subtitles Pass-thru DVB Subtitles Not Supported When Outputting Down-converted Video DVB-Subtitles are not supported when the input is HD and the encoded output is SD. DVB-Subtitles are passed through and not modified to match the format of the encoded video output DVB Subtitles Bit Rate Setting During the configuration of DVB-Subtitles pass-thru, the user is prompted to enter a bit rate value for the DVB Subtitles Bit Rate. Figure 8.1 DVB Subtitles Bit Rate The bit rate for DVB-Subtitles is bursty and can fluctuate between 0 bps to few hundred kbps. This bit rate setting is to ensure the pipe allocated for DVB-Subs is big enough to avoid overrating the TS output. This is especially useful in bit rate tracking mode Video Recovery Delay When Switching MPEG-2 to H.264 It takes up to 20 seconds for the encoder to switch its output from MPEG-2 to H.264. We recommend the configuration is not changed during this period Alarms Raised for (DSP is Not Responding to its Controller) If this alarm is raised, the unit is indicating that an internal processing block is not responding to its controller. The reason for the failure to respond may result in loss of audio component. The loss of audio may be immediate or only exhibit itself when the unit is reconfigured (for example during a redundancy switch). If this alarm is indicated, Ericsson recommends that the unit is rebooted. If the alarm persists after reboot, the issue may be a result of an invalid incoming audio stream /1553-FGC Uen Y

339 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding 8.6 Unit XML Overview The Unit XML records the current configuration in a file. Configuration parameters provide the minimum information required for fault diagnosis. Saving Configuration When sending reporting bugs, it is required to attach the configuration to the bug report. To save the current configuration, do the following: 1. Navigate to the Support page. 2. In the Import and Export widget on the General tab, click on the Save standard configuration or Save configuration including control parameters button depending on whether you want to include the IP information of the unit in the saved xml file. 3. In the popup window, select the Save file option. 4. By default, the unit will save the configuration file to the Downloads folder on your computer. 8.7 Log Files Overview The log file records the events on the unit. Extracted from the unit, the log file may contain important information that can facilitate tracking down problems. Log Operation The event log is stored on the Host Controller Card (HCC). A log file is generated with a file format as defined by RFC3164. Once the log has filled the space allocated to it, the oldest entries in the log file are overwritten. Events that are logged include power-on, power on self test (POST) results, warning and alarm assertions and de-assertions, user log ins and log outs. Any changes to the time and date are also recorded in the system log. Each event has a UTC time and date stamp appended to it, with a time resolution of one second. The various system log files are accessible from the web pages. The system log can be exported as a comma separated list, so that it is easy to import it in to a spreadsheet, where it can be easily filtered or sorted. Saving Logs When sending reporting bugs, it is required to attach the log files extracted from the unit. To save all necessary log files and information required from the unit, do the following: 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-19

340 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding 1. Navigate to the Support page. 2. In the Log files widget on the General tab, click on the Download Logs and Status. 3. In the popup window, select the Save file option. 4. By default, the unit will save the log file to the Downloads folder on your computer. 8.8 Saved and Exported Configurations The configurations can be extracted from the unit in two xml formats: One format is obtained from the unit by exporting from the Stored Configurations page. This is often referred to as Exported Configuration. The other format can be saved from the Support page. This is often referred to as Saved Configuration Exported Configuration The exported configuration has a format that is used by the unit to efficiently store unit settings among the pre-stored configurations. This is a compact description in xml format, and contains only the most important attributes. Getting the Exported Configuration from the unit To get the exported configuration, do the following: 1. Navigate to the Stored Configurations page. 2. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to export. Its name and description will appear in the Configuration Workbench widget. 3. Click on the Export button, and save the configuration to the local disk of the control computer. Reloading an Exported Configuration to the unit Any configuration exported can be easily reloaded to the unit from the Stored Configurations page. Note: Only an exported configuration can be reloaded to the unit using this method. For this, do the following: 1. Navigate to the Stored Configurations page. 2. Select an empty slot in the Stored Configurations widget /1553-FGC Uen Y

341 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding 3. In the Configuration Workbench widget, click on the Browse button next to the Import field. A dialog box shall appear. 4. Browse to the exported configuration file, select it and then click Open. 5. To import the file, click on the Import button Saved Configuration The saved configuration gives a full description of the unit including attributes useful for debugging purposes. This is the format that shall be sent to Customer Support when reporting a bug. Getting a Saved Configuration from the unit To get the saved configuration from the unit, do the following: 1. Navigate to the Support page. 2. In the Import and Export widget on the General tab, click on the Save standard configuration or Save configuration including control parameters button depending on whether you want to include the IP information of the unit in the saved xml file. 3. In the popup window, select the Save file option. 4. By default, the unit will save the configuration file to the Downloads folder on your computer. Reloading a Saved Configuration to the unit Any previously saved configuration can be easily reloaded to the unit from the Support page. Note: Only a saved configuration can be reloaded to the unit using this method. To reload a saved configuration, do the following: 1. Navigate to the Support page. 2. In the Import and Export widget, open the Restore Configuration or Restore Configuration including Control Parameters accordion depending on whether you saved the configuration without or with control information. 3. Click on the Browse button and browse to the converted configuration file, select it and then click Open. 4. Click on the Upload button and a pop-up box Confirm Restore will appear. Click on the Yes button to upload the file. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-21

342 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding 8.9 Remote Server Logging Overview The remote server logging feature enables an external log server to be used to capture selective logs from the AVP unit. Four different categories of system log entries may be selected and delivered to a designated remote server. The four categories are: Logging messages related to alarms. Logging messages related to ESAM. Logging messages related to SCTE-35. User configuration changes made to the system Configuring Remote Server Logging Enabling Remote Server Logging To enable remote server logging: 1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page. 2. In the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the left-hand side of the screen, click on the Base Unit folder to open the folder tree. 3. Click on the Remote Server Logging folder to display the relevant properties in the Properties widget on the right-hand side of the screen. 4. Enter the Remote Server IP Address and select the log options required (see Figure 8.2). 5. Click on the Apply All button to accept the new properties Disabling Remote Server Logging To disable remote server logging: 1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page. 2. In the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the left-hand side of the screen, click on the Base Unit folder to open the folder tree. 3. Click on the Remote Server Logging folder to display the relevant properties in the Properties widget on the right-hand side of the screen. 4. Disable remote logging by entering a Remote Server IP Address of or by leaving the field blank (see Figure 8.2). 5. Click on the Apply All button to accept the new properties /1553-FGC Uen Y

343 Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding Figure 8.2 Selecting Remote Server Logging Configuring the Remote Server Any remote server running a logging process which will accept incoming log messages on port 514 via UDP, e.g. syslog or rsyslog, can be used. The firewall on the remote server must be configured to allow UDP traffic to port 514 to pass through. The configuration of the logging process, e.g. syslog or rsyslog, on the remote server determines many aspects of how the incoming messages are logged, such as: The file to which the messages are logged (the default is the normal system log). Whether or not the IP address of the source unit is included. The default is Yes for syslog and No for rsyslog. Instructions on how to configure the logging process on the remote server is beyond the scope of this manual. 1/1553-FGC Uen Y 8-23